Lexus OM30D01U
User Manual: Lexus 2013 Lexus GS 450h Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 860 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Pictorial index Search by illustration
1For safety
and security Make sure to read though them
2Instrument cluster How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.
3Operation of
each component
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.
4Driving Operations and advices which are necessary for driving
5Interior features Usage of the interior features, etc.
6Maintenance
and care Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
7When trouble
arises What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
8Vehicle
specifications Vehicle specification, customizable features, etc.
For owners
Index Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
TABLE OF CONTENTS2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
For your information...................................8
Reading this manual...................................14
How to search..............................................15
Pictorial index...............................................16
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................................28
For safety drive...............................30
Seat belts.......................................... 32
SRS airbags.....................................38
Front passenger occupant
classification system.................. 49
Safety information
for children ................................... 54
Child restraint systems............... 55
Installing child restraints.............59
Exhaust gas precautions............ 69
1-2. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features............... 70
Hybrid system precautions........74
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system.......................79
Alarm...................................................81
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights
and indicators..............................84
Gauges and meters.....................89
Multi-information display.......... 94
Head-up display.......................... 102
Energy monitor/
consumption screen............... 109
3-1. Key information
Keys....................................................118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system
with push-button start.............. 121
Wireless remote control...........134
Doors................................................137
Trunk................................................... 141
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats...................................... 148
Driving position memory......... 150
Head restraints.............................155
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel
and mirrors
Steering wheel............................. 158
Inside rear view mirror ..............159
Outside rear view mirrors......... 161
1For safety and security
2Instrument cluster
3Operation of
each component
3
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows.............................164
Moon roof.......................................167
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle ......................172
Cargo and luggage....................183
Vehicle load limits....................... 186
Trailer towing.................................187
Dinghy towing..............................188
4-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch............. 189
EV drive mode..............................196
Hybrid transmission................... 199
Turn signal lever..........................205
Parking brake .............................. 207
Brake Hold .................................... 210
Horn..................................................212
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch ..........................213
Fog light switch............................ 218
Windshield wipers
and washer ..................................219
Headlight cleaner switch........ 226
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap......227
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Cruise control............................. 232
Dynamic radar
cruise control............................236
LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist)............251
Intuitive parking assist................261
Rear view monitor system.......274
Driving mode select switch ...286
Driving assist systems ..............289
PCS
(Pre-Collision System)......... 296
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor) .............305
Lexus night view............................311
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips.......317
Winter driving tips.......................319
4Driving
TABLE OF CONTENTS4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch .............................328
Remote Touch screen..............330
Set up screen...............................336
Voice command system..........353
5-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front automatic
air conditioning system.........364
Rear air conditioning
system...........................................379
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers..........384
Windshield wiper de-icer.......385
5-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type.....................386
Using the radio ...........................409
Using the CD/DVD player....433
Playing an audio CD
and MP3/WMA discs......... 435
Playing DVD video .....................441
CD/DVD player and DVD
video disc information .......... 453
Listening to
Bluetooth® audio...................465
Listening to
a USB memory.........................475
Listening to an iPod...................485
Optimal use of
the audio/video system ........ 495
Using the AUX port..................497
Using the rear seat
audio controls...........................498
Using the steering wheel
audio switches..........................503
5Interior features
5
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone
system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ................506
Using a Bluetooth® phone..... 515
Setting the hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ................534
Setting the Bluetooth®............558
5-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list...........................571
• Interior light.............................572
• Personal lights........................572
5-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features.............574
• Glove box................................576
• Console box ...........................577
• Cup holders........................... 578
• Auxiliary boxes.....................580
Trunk features...............................581
5-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
and vanity mirrors...................583
Clock ..............................................584
Ashtrays.........................................585
Power outlets...............................586
Heated steering wheel............588
Seat heaters/
seat ventilators.........................590
Armrest..........................................593
Rear sunshade/
rear door sunshades.............. 594
Coat hooks....................................597
Assist grips ...................................598
Utility hook ...................................599
Garage door opener...............600
Safety Connect........................... 607
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ..................616
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.................. 620
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements... 623
General maintenance...............626
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs....................................630
6Maintenance and care
TABLE OF CONTENTS6
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions..................................631
Hood...............................................634
Positioning a floor jack.............635
Engine compartment................637
12-volt battery ..............................647
Tires....................................................651
Tire inflation pressure.................661
Wheels...........................................664
Air conditioning filter............... 666
Electronic key battery..............668
Checking and replacing
fuses...............................................670
Headlight aim..............................685
Light bulbs .................................... 687
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers.................. 702
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency.... 703
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed................................ 704
If you think
something is wrong..................710
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer sounds........ 711
If a warning message
is displayed..................................721
If you have a flat tire ...................749
If the hybrid system
will not start ................................762
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P......................764
If the parking brake cannot
be released.................................765
If the electronic key does not
operate properly...................... 767
If the 12-volt battery
is discharged..............................770
If your vehicle overheats.......... 774
If the vehicle becomes
stuck..............................................778
7When trouble arises
7
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) .................. 782
Fuel information...........................792
Tire information........................... 795
8-2. Customization
Customizable features............807
8-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize..........................818
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners.....................................820
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)............................................... 821
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).............................................823
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ...............................834
Alphabetical index ................................840
8Vehicle specifications
For owners
Index
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual” for information regarding the navigation system.
8
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
For your information
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, includ-
ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. How-
ever, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Approximately five hours after the hybrid system is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evapo-
ration leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under war-
ranty.
Main Owner’s Manual
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the hybrid system
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
9
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect elec-
tronic systems such as:
●Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
●Dynamic radar cruise control system
●Cruise control system
●Anti-lock brake system
●Vehicle dynamics integrated management
●SRS airbag system
●Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
10
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain
data, such as:
•Engine speed
• Electric motor speed (traction motor speed)
• Accelerator status
•Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position
• Hybrid battery (traction battery) status
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with
which it is equipped. Furthermore, these computers do not record conversations,
sounds or pictures.
●Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions,
conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the
vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a law suit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle
owner
●Usage of data collected through Safety Connect / Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland
only)
If your Lexus has Safety Connect or Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to
those services, please refer to the Safety Connect / Lexus Enform Telematics Sub-
scription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
Vehicle data recordings
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
11
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
●Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is
obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government
agency
• For use by Lexus in a law suit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing infor-
mation about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Event data recorder
12
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
Scrapping of your Lexus
Perchlorate Material
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the
moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely
cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
13
14
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Reading this manual
CAUTION:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious
injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a
malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in
numerical order.
Indicates the action (pushing,
turning, etc.) used to operate
switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the component or
position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do
this”, or “Do not let this hap-
pen”.
15
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
How to search
■Searching by name
• Alphabetical index .........P. 840
■Searching by installation posi-
tion
• Pictorial index........................P. 16
■Searching by symptom or sound
• What to do if...
(Troubleshooting)............P. 834
■Searching by title
• Table of contents ....................P. 2
16 Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Pictorial index
■Exterior
The shape of the headlights may differ depending on the grade, etc. (P. 687)
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 137
Locking/unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 122, 134
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 767
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 714, 728
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
Opening from inside the cabin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 122, 134
Opening by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 768
Warning lights/warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 714, 729
Outside rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
Adjusting the mirror angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150
Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 384
1
2
3
17
Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 319
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 385
Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 618
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227
Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 227
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 784
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 651
Tire size/inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 790
Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 319
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 651
Coping with flat tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 749
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 634
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 634
Engine compartment cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 638
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 785
Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 774
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 728
Headlights/parking lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
Fog lights* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 218
Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 205
Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
Stop lights
Brake Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 210
License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
Back-up lights
Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 199
Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
4
5
6
7
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 687, Watts: P. 791)
*: If equipped
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
18 Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Instrument panel
Power switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 189
Starting the hybrid system/changing the modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 189
Emergency stop of the hybrid system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 703
When the hybrid system will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 762
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 742
Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 199
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 199
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 704
When the shift lever does not move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 764
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89
Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 84
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 711
1
2
3
19
Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 94
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 94
Energy monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 109
When the warning messages are displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 721
Parking brake switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 207
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 207
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 320
Warning buzzer/message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 721
Turn signal lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 205
Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 213
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . .P. 213
Fog lights*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 218
Windshield wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 219
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 646
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 739
Emergency flasher switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 702
Trunk opener. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 1 41
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 634
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158
Driving position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 364
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 364
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 384
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 386
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 386
Hands-free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 506
Trunk opener main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 142
*: If equipped
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
20 Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Switches
Headlight cleaner switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 226
VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 291
Instrument panel light control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 91
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 91
HUD (Head-up display) switches*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 102
Heated steering wheel switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 588
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) main switch*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 305
Lexus night view switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 311
Brake hold switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
21
Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150
Outside rear view mirror switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 161
Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 137
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164
Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 164
PCS OFF switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 297
Tire pressure warning reset switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 654
AFS OFF switch*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 215
*: If equipped
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
22 Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Audio remote control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 503
Paddle shift switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Back switch*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 353
Ta lk sw itch *1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 353
Telephone switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 507
“DISP” button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 95
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance button*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 239
Cruise control switch
Cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 232
Dynamic radar cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 236
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 253
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
23
Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Seat heater switches*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 590
Seat ventilator switches*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 591
Intuitive parking assist switch*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 261
Rear sunshade switch*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 594
Driving mode select switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 286
EV drive mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 196
Snow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 200
*1: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
*2: If equipped
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
24 Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Interior
SRS airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38
Floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 28
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 148
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 155
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 32
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 577
Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 137
Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 578
Auxiliary boxes*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 580
Ashtrays*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 585
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
25
Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 159
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 583
Vanity mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 583
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572
Personal lights*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 572
Moon roof switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 167
“SOS” button*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 607
Garage door opener switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 600
*1: If equipped
*2: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
26 Pictorial index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
27
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
For safety and security 1
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................................28
For safety drive...............................30
Seat belts..........................................32
SRS airbags.....................................38
Front passenger occupant
classification system..................49
Safety information
for children....................................54
Child restraint systems ...............55
Installing child restraints.............59
Exhaust gas precautions............69
1-2. Hybrid system
Hybrid system features............... 70
Hybrid system precautions........74
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Immobilizer system...................... 79
Alarm .................................................. 81
28 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Before driving
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model
and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the car-
pet.
Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure the
floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustra-
tion.
Floor mat
1
*
2
29
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the
pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become diffi-
cult to stop the vehicle, leading to an accident, or leading to death or a serious injury.
■When installing the driver’s floor mat
●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,
even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
●Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■Before driving
●Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in
the correct place with all the provided
retaining hooks (clips). Be especially care-
ful to perform this check after cleaning the
floor.
●With the hybrid system stopped and the
shift lever in P, fully depress each pedal to
the floor to make sure it does not interfere
with the floor mat.
30 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
For safety drive
Adjust the angle of the seatback
so that you are sitting straight up
and so that you do not have to
lean forward to steer. (P. 148)
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so
that your arms bend slightly at the
elbow when gripping the steering
wheel. (P. 148)
Lock the head restraint in place
with the center of the head
restraint closest to the top of your
ears. (P. 155)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 32)
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving
the vehicle. (P. 32)
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 55)
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position
before driving.
Correct driving posture
1
2
3
4
Correct use of the seat belts
31
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and
outside rear view mirrors properly. (P. 159, 161)
Adjusting the mirrors
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjust-
ment mechanism may also be damaged.
●When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel
tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue
driving and take a break immediately.
32 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Seat belts
●Extend the shoulder belt so that it
comes fully over the shoulder, but
does not come into contact with
the neck or slide off the shoulder.
●Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the seat-
back. Sit up straight and well back
in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
To fasten the seat belt, push the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
To release the seat belt, press the
release button.
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving
the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Release button
1
2
33
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing the
release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and down
as needed until you hear a click.
For children or smaller-than-aver-
age people, slide the seat belt com-
fort guide forward so that the
shoulder belt does not sit close to
the person’s neck.
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
1
2
Seat belt comfort guide (outboard rear seats)
34 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
The pretensioner helps the seat belt
to quickly restrain the occupant by
retracting the seat belt when the
vehicle is subjected to certain types
of severe frontal collision.
The front seat pretensioners also acti-
vate when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe side collision.
The pretensioner does not activate in
the event of a minor frontal impact, a
minor side impact, a rear impact or a
vehicle rollover.
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the pre-
collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
(P. 296)
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used
to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the
belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 59)
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision
system)
35
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 55)
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, fol-
low the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (P. 32)
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a person-
alized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
●Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well
back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
36 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
■Pregnant women
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 32)
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■Seat belt pretensioners
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case,
the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
■Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoul-
der. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
(P. 33)
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (P. 32)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants,
extending the shoulder belt completely over
the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with
the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only
the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could
suffer death or serious injury as a result of
sudden braking or a collision.
37
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
CAUTION
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate han-
dling may lead to incorrect operation.
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
39
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
◆SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger
from impact with interior components
SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
An SRS knee airbag for the front passenger’s seat is built into the glove box
door.
◆SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats
SRS curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
1
2
3
4
40 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
SRS airbag system components
Front passenger occupant clas-
sification system (ECU and sen-
sors)
Side impact sensors (front
doors)
Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator lights
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters
Side impact sensors (front)
Front side airbags
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Rear side airbags
Side impact sensors (rear)
Driver’s seat position sensor
Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Front impact sensors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
41
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sen-
sor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information
obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram
above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information.
As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of
inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you
with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the
steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now,
you can change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm)
distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the
back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to
see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the
seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still
maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the
instrument panel controls.
42 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the
front passenger seat. (P. 55)
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckle but the
seat belt extender has not also been fas-
tened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the
SRS front airbags will judge that the driver
and front passenger are wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the SRS front air-
bags may not activate correctly in a colli-
sion, resulting in death or serious injury in
the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the
seat belt with the seat belt extender.
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
43
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not allow the front seat occupants to
hold items on their knees.
●Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seats toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
●Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steer-
ing wheel pad, lower portion of the instru-
ment panel and door of the glove box.
These items can become projectiles when
the SRS driver, front passenger and knee
airbags deploy.
44 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items
could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy.
●If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to
remove it.
●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the
side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door
or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off
any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad,
door of the glove box and front and rear pillar garnishes are damaged or cracked,
have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.
●Do not attach anything to areas such as a
door, windshield glass, side door glass, front
or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.
45
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as
the seats, the glove box, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails may be
hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●The windshield may crack.
●For Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event of a
severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the
response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push
the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascer-
tain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to
communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to
dispatch the necessary emergency services. (P. 607)
CAUTION
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications with-
out consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy
(inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, glove box, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars
or roof side rails
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
●Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars or kangaroo
bar etc.)
●Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
46 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set
threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situa-
tions:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can
move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the
front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck
●Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretension-
ers will activate.
●The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passen-
ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front
passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
(P. 49)
■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that
exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact
force produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the
vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an
approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).
●The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal colli-
sion.
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or falling
47
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or
rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But,
whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehi-
cle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield
airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to
a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed
side collision.
●Collision from the side
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
●Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the front*
●Collision from the rear
●Vehicle rollover
*: Depending on the conditions and type of
accident, the curtain shield airbags may
deploy (inflate) upon frontal impact.
48 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
●A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side and curtain shield air-
bags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel, dash-
board near the front passenger airbag,
lower portion of the instrument panel or
door of the glove box is scratched, cracked,
or otherwise damaged.
●The surface of the seats with the side airbag
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
●The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or
roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing
the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
49
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification
system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat
and activates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.
Seat belt reminder light
SRS warning light
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
1
2
3
4
50 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Adult*1
■Child*3 or child restraint system*4
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classifi-
cation system
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights “A IR BAG O N ”
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
“A IR BAG
OFF”*5
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
51
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
■Unoccupied
■There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light Off
Seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
Indicator/
warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light On
Seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag
on the front passenger seat Activated
Curtain shield airbag
in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
52 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits
in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child
depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on
his/her physique or posture.
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A
forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front pas-
senger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 55)
*5: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to
install the child restraint system properly. (P. 59)
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classi-
fication system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and
reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the
passenger may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury
in the event of a collision.
●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seat-
back pockets or armrest).
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
●Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on
the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
53
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illu-
minated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn cor-
rectly. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the pas-
senger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 59)
●Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection sys-
tem. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
●Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
54 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Safety information for children
●It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental
contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
●Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to
avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power
window accidentally.
●Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch
body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
CAUTION
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is
also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the
moon roof or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely
cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
55
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
Child restraint systems
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropri-
ate to the age and size of the child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 59)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use
of child restraint systems.
Points to remember
56 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child:
■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large
enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
●If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use
the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 32)
Types of child restraints
Rear facing Infant seat/con-
vertible seat
Forward facing Convertible
seat
Booster seat
57
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the wind-
shield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
●Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child
restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether
strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether
strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possi-
ble and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of an accident.
●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the
SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
58 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
■When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted
around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could
result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut
the belt.
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
59
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
Installing child restraints
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for the
outboard rear seats. (Buttons display-
ing the location of the anchors are
attached to the seats.)
Seat belts equipped with a child
restraint locking mechanism (ALR/
ELR belts except driver’s seat belt)
(P. 34)
Anchor brackets (for top tether
strap)
An anchor bracket is provided for
each rear seat.
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat
belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not
compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children)
system.
60 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Remove the head restraint.
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
Type A
Latch the hooks of the lower
straps onto the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a top
tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top
tether strap anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Installation with LATCH system
1
2
Canada only
3
61
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the
LATCH anchors. If the child
restraint has a top tether strap,
the top tether strap should be
latched onto the top tether strap
anchor.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of
a lower connector system.
Canada only
3
62 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Rear-facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child restraint system
on the rear seat facing the rear
of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode, the
belt cannot be extended.
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock
function belt)
1
2
3
63
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
While pushing the child
restraint system down into the
rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child
restraint system is securely in
place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■Forward-facing Convertible seat
Rear outboard seats:
Remove the head restraint.
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of
the vehicle.
4
1
2
64 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not
twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and allow it to retract to put it
in lock mode. In lock mode, the
belt cannot be extended.
While pushing the child
restraint system into the rear
seat, allow the shoulder belt to
retract until the child restraint
system is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should
be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 66)
3
4
5
6
65
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
■Booster seat
Place the child restraint system
on the seat facing the front of
the vehicle.
Sit the child in the child
restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint sys-
tem according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions and insert
the plate into the buckle. Make
sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is cor-
rectly positioned over the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 32)
Push the buckle release button and
fully retract the seat belt.
1
2
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
66 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Rear outboard seats:
Remove the head restraint.
Secure the child restraint system
using the seat belt or LATCH
anchors.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can
be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
1
2
3
67
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoul-
der belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or dis-
comfort to the child. (P. 3 4)
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passen-
gers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden braking or an
accident.
●If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
●Adjust the front passenger seat so that it
does not interfere with the child restraint
system.
●Only put a forward-facing child restraint
system on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible
even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated. Failure to do so may result in
death or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
68 1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from
the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so
may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or a sudden brak-
ing.
●Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
●Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to
ensure that it has been securely installed.
●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking, sudden
swerving or an accident.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or
serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden braking or
an accident.
69
1-1. For safe use
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if
inhale.
CAUTION
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odor-
less. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an acci-
dent caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■Important points while driving
●Keep the trunk lid closed.
●If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open
the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
■When parking
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop
the hybrid system.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the hybrid system on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●Do not leave the hybrid system operating in an area with snow build-up, or where
it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the hybrid system is
operating, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
■Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have
the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
70 1-2. Hybrid system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Hybrid system features
Gasoline engine
Electric motor (traction motor)
Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics different from
conventional vehicles. Be sure you are closely familiar with the charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and operate with care.
The hybrid system combines the use of a gasoline engine and an elec-
tric motor (traction motor) according to driving conditions, improving
fuel efficiency and reducing exhaust emissions.
1
2
71
1-2. Hybrid system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
◆When stopped/during start off
The gasoline engine stops when the vehicle is stopped. During start off,
the electric motor (traction motor) drives the vehicle. At slow speeds or
when traveling down a gentle slope, the engine is stopped and the elec-
tric motor (traction motor) is used.
◆During normal driving
The gasoline engine is predominantly used. The electric motor (traction
motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction battery) as necessary.
◆When accelerating sharply
When the accelerator pedal is depressed heavily, the power of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) is added to that of the gasoline engine
via the electric motor (traction motor).
◆When braking (regenerative braking)
The electric motor (traction motor) charges the hybrid battery (traction
battery).
When driving with the gasoline engine stopped, a sound, which changes
in accordance with the driving speed, will be played in order to warn peo-
ple nearby of the vehicle’s approach. The sound will stop when the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).
Vehicle proximity notification system
72 1-2. Hybrid system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Regenerative braking
In the following situations, kinetic energy is converted to electric energy and decel-
eration force can be obtained in conjunction with the recharging of the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery).
●The accelerator pedal is released while driving with the shift position in D or S.
●The brake pedal is depressed while driving with the shift position in D or S.
■EV indicator
■Conditions in which the gasoline engine may not stop
The gasoline engine starts and stops automatically. However, it may not stop auto-
matically in the following conditions:
●During gasoline engine warm-up
●During hybrid battery (traction battery) charging
●When the temperature of the hybrid battery (traction battery) is high or low
●When the heater is switched on
■Charging the hybrid battery (traction battery)
●As the gasoline engine charges the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery
does not need to be charged from an outside source. However, if the vehicle is left
parked for a long time the hybrid battery will slowly discharge. For this reason, be
sure to drive the vehicle at least once every few months for at least 30 minutes or
10 miles (16 km). If the hybrid battery becomes fully discharged and you are unable
to jump-start the vehicle with the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.
●If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged.
Always put the shift lever in P when the vehicle is stopped. When driving in heavy
traffic, operate the vehicle with the shift lever in D or S to avoid discharging the bat-
tery.
■Charging the 12-volt battery
P. 771
The EV indicator comes on when driving the
vehicle using only the electric motor (traction
motor).
73
1-2. Hybrid system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
■After the 12-volt battery has discharged or has been changed or removed
The gasoline engine may not stop even if the vehicle is running on the hybrid battery
(traction battery). If this continues for a few days, contact your Lexus dealer.
■Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
There may be no engine sounds or vibration even though the vehicle is able to move.
For safety, apply the parking brake and make sure to shift the shift position to P when
parked.
The following sounds or vibrations may occur when the hybrid system is operating
and are not a malfunction:
●Motor sounds may be heard from the engine compartment.
●Sounds may be heard from the hybrid battery (traction battery) behind the rear
seats when the hybrid system starts or stops.
●Sounds from the hybrid system may be heard when the trunk lid is open.
●Sounds may be heard from the hybrid transmission when the hybrid system starts
or stops.
●Engine sounds may be heard when accelerating sharply.
●Sounds may be heard due to regenerative braking when the brake pedal is
depressed.
●Vibration may be felt when the gasoline engine starts or stops.
●Cooling fan sounds may be heard from the air intake vents on the both sides of the
rear seatback.
■Vehicle proximity notification system
In the following cases, the vehicle proximity notification system may be difficult for
surrounding people to hear.
●In very noisy areas
●In the wind or the rain
Also, as the vehicle proximity notification system is installed on the front of the vehi-
cle, it may be more difficult to hear from the rear of the vehicle compared to the
front.
■Maintenance, repair, recycling, and disposal
Contact your Lexus dealer regarding maintenance, repair, recycling and disposal.
Do not dispose of the vehicle yourself.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. on/off operation of the EV indicator) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 807)
74 1-2. Hybrid system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Hybrid system precautions
Take care when handling the hybrid system, as it contains a high voltage
system (about 650 V at maximum) as well as parts that become
extremely hot when the hybrid system is operating. Obey the caution
labels attached to the vehicle.
Caution label
Power control unit
Electric motor (traction motor)
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery)
Service plug
High voltage cables (orange)
Air conditioning compressor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
75
1-2. Hybrid system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
There are air intake vents on the
both sides of the rear seatback for
the purpose of cooling the hybrid
battery (traction battery). If the
vents become blocked, the hybrid
battery may overheat, leading to a
reduction in hybrid battery output.
When a certain level of impact is detected by the impact sensor, the emer-
gency shut off system blocks off the high voltage current and stops the fuel
pump to minimize the risk of electrocution and fuel leakage. If the emer-
gency shut off system activates, your vehicle will not restart. To restart the
hybrid system, contact your Lexus dealer.
A message is automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in the
hybrid system or an improper operation is attempted.
If a warning message is shown on
the multi-information display, read
the message and follow the instruc-
tions. (P. 721)
Hybrid battery (traction battery) air vents
Emergency shut off system
Hybrid warning message
76 1-2. Hybrid system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■If a warning light comes on, a warning message is displayed, or the 12-volt battery is
disconnected
The hybrid system may not start. In that case, try to start the system again. If the
“READY” indicator does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer.
■Running out of fuel
When the vehicle has run out of fuel and the hybrid system cannot be started, refuel
the vehicle with at least enough gasoline to make the low fuel level warning light
(P. 714) go off. If there is only a small amount of fuel, the hybrid system may not be
able to start. (The minimum amount of fuel to add to make the low fuel level warning
light go out is about 2.6 gal. [10.0 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.], when the vehicle is on a level sur-
face. This value may vary when the vehicle is on a slope.)
■Electromagnetic waves
●High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehicles incorporate electromagnetic
shielding, and therefore emit approximately the same amount of electromagnetic
waves as conventional gasoline powered vehicles or home electronic appliances.
●Your vehicle may cause sound interference in some third party-produced radio
parts.
■Hybrid battery (traction battery)
The hybrid battery (traction battery) has a limited service life. The lifespan of the
hybrid battery (traction battery) can change in accordance with driving style and
driving conditions.
77
1-2. Hybrid system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
CAUTION
■High voltage precautions
The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems as well as a 12-volt system. DC
and AC high voltage is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric
shock that may result in death or serious injury.
●Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace the high voltage parts, cables or
their connectors.
●The hybrid system will become hot after starting as the system uses high voltage.
Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature, and always obey
the caution labels attached to the vehicle.
■Road accident cautions
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury:
●Pull your vehicle off the road, apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, and
turn the hybrid system off.
●Do not touch the high voltage parts, cables and connectors.
●If electric wires are exposed inside or outside your vehicle, an electric shock may
occur. Never touch exposed electric wires.
●If a fluid leak occurs, do not touch the fluid as it may be strong alkaline electrolyte
from the hybrid battery (traction battery). If it comes into contact with your skin or
eyes, wash it off immediately with a large amount of water or, if possible, boric
acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
●If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave the vehicle as soon as possible. Never
use a fire extinguisher that is not meant for electric fires. Using even a small
amount of water may be dangerous.
●If your vehicle needs to be towed, do so with rear wheels raised. If the wheels
connected to the electric motor (traction motor) are on the ground when towing,
the motor may continue to generate electricity. This may cause an electricity
leakage leading to a fire. (P. 704)
●Carefully inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that liquid has leaked
onto the ground, the fuel system may have been damaged. Leave the vehicle as
soon as possible.
●Never try to open the service plug access
hole located behind the rear seats. The ser-
vice plug is used only when the vehicle is
serviced and is subject to high voltage.
78 1-2. Hybrid system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
■Hybrid battery (traction battery)
●Your vehicle contains a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery. Never resell, hand
over or modify the hybrid battery. To prevent accidents, hybrid batteries that have
been removed from a disposed vehicle are collected through Lexus dealer. Do
not dispose of the battery yourself.
Unless the battery is properly collected, the following may occur, resulting in
death or serious injury:
• The hybrid battery may be illegally disposed of or dumped, and it is hazardous
to the environment or someone may touch a high voltage part, resulting in an
electric shock.
• The hybrid battery is intended to be used exclusively with your hybrid vehicle.
If the hybrid battery is used outside of your vehicle or modified in any way,
accidents such as electric shock, heat generation, smoke generation, an
explosion and electrolyte leakage may occur.
When reselling or handing over your vehicle, the possibility of an accident is
extremely high because the person receiving the vehicle may not be aware of
these dangers.
●If your vehicle is disposed of without the hybrid battery having been removed,
there is a danger of serious electric shock if high voltage parts, cables and their
connectors are touched. In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of, the
hybrid battery must be disposed of by your Lexus dealer or a qualified service
shop. If the hybrid battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock
that can result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■Hybrid battery air vents
●Do not put foreign objects near the air vents. The hybrid battery (traction battery)
may overheat and be damaged.
●Clean the air vents regularly to prevent the hybrid battery (traction battery) from
overheating.
●Do not wet or allow foreign substances to enter the air vents as this may cause a
short circuit and damage the hybrid battery (traction battery).
●Do not carry large amounts of water such as water cooler bottles in the vehicle. If
water spills onto the hybrid battery (traction battery), the battery may be dam-
aged. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
79
1-3. Theft deterrent system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
Immobilizer system
The indicator light flashes after the
power switch has been turned off to
indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the power switch has been
turned to ACCESSORY or ON
mode to indicate that the system has
been canceled.
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type immobilizer system.
■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a
built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
hybrid system from starting if a key has not been previously registered
in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
80 1-3. Theft deterrent system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Certifications for the immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-3
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Certifications for the immobilizer system
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
81
1-3. Theft deterrent system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
1
For safety and security
Alarm
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:
●A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than
using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key.
(The doors will lock again automatically.)
●The hood is opened.
Close the doors, trunk and hood,
and lock all the doors. The system
will be set automatically after 30
seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the system
is set.
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
●Unlock the doors or open the trunk.
●Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or start the
hybrid system. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few
seconds.)
The alarm
Setting the alarm system
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
82 1-3. Theft deterrent system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the fol-
lowing:
●Nobody is in the vehicle.
●The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.
●No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
■Alarm-operated door lock
When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to prevent intrud-
ers.
●A person inside the vehicle opens a door,
the trunk or hood.
●The 12-volt battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked. (P. 772)
NOTICE
■To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation
of the system cannot be guaranteed.
84
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
◆Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending on
the target region.
◆Center panel
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all
warning lights and indicators illuminated.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
85
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s
systems.
Warning lights
*1
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning light
(P. 711)
*1, 2
(if equipped)
“AFS OFF” indicator
(P. 713)
*1
(Canada)
Brake system warning light
(P. 711)
*1, 2 Brake hold operated
indicator (P. 713)
*1Charging system warning
light (P. 712)
*2
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
( P. 713)
*1
(U.S.A.)
Malfunction indicator
lamp (P. 712)
*2
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 713)
*1
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator
lamp (P. 712)
*1Brake system warning light
(P. 714)
*1SRS warning light
(P. 712)
Open door warning light
(P. 714)
*1
(U.S.A.)
ABS warning light
(P. 712)
Low fuel level warning light
(P. 714)
*1
(Canada)
ABS warning light
(P. 712)
Seat belt reminder light
(P. 714)
*1Electric power steering
system warning light
(P. 712)
*1Master warning light
(P. 714)
86
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
*1: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that
a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on,
or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not
come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
*1, 2
(if equipped)
“PCS” warning light
(P. 712, 726)
*1Tire pressure warning light
(P. 715)
*1Slip indicator (P. 713)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
87
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s vari-
ous systems.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator
(P. 205)
(if equipped)
LKA (Lane-Keeping
Assist) indicator
(P. 251)
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator
(P. 213)
(if equipped)
Intuitive parking assist indi-
cator (P. 261)
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 213)
*1
(if equipped)
“AFS OFF” indicator
(P. 215)
Headlight high beam indi-
cator (P. 214)
*1, 2
Slip indicator
(P. 291)
(if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 218)
*1VSC OFF indicator
(P. 291)
“READY” indicator
(P. 189)
*1, 3
(if equipped)
“PCS” warning light
(P. 297)
EV indicator (P. 72)
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
( P. 207)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 232, 236) (Canada)
Parking brake indicator
(P. 207)
(if equipped)
Radar cruise control indi-
cator (P. 236)
*1Brake hold standby indica-
tor (P. 210)
Cruise control “SET” indi-
cator (P. 232, 236)
*1Brake hold operated indi-
cator (P. 210)
*1“A I R B AG O N /
OFF” indicator
(P. 49)
88
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
*1: These lights turn on when the power switch is turned to ON mode to indicate that
a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the hybrid system is on,
or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not
come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
*3: The light comes on when the system is turned off. The light flashes faster than
usual to indicate that the system is operating.
CAUTION
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on
when you start the hybrid system, this could mean that these systems are not avail-
able to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
90
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
Hybrid System Indicator
Displays hybrid system output or regeneration level (P. 72)
ECO lamp and SPORT lamp
Changes colors or brightness according to driving mode or way of driving
(P. 93)
Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P. 94)
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P. 199)
Odometer and trip meter display
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven
Trip m et er :
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset.
Trip meters “A” and “B” can be used to record and display different distances inde-
pendently.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
91
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Switches between odometer and
trip meter displays. When the trip
meter is displayed, pressing and
holding the button will reset the trip
meter.
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
Changing the display
Instrument panel light control
1
2
92
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
■The meters and display illuminate when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■Instrument panel brightness adjustment
The instrument panel brightness levels when the tail lights are on and off can be
adjusted individually. However, when the surroundings are bright (daytime, etc.),
turning on the tail lights will not change the instrument panel brightness. At this time,
any adjustments made to the instrument panel brightness levels will be applied to
both settings at once.
■Limitation of brightness adjustment
The brightness of the instrument panel lights is automatically adjusted based on the
light sensor detecting how bright the surroundings are. However, if the instrument
panel brightness has been manually set to either the brightest or darkest setting, the
automatic adjustment will not be performed.
■Hybrid System Indicator
●Hybrid System Indicator is displayed when the driving mode is other than the sport
mode.
●By keeping the indicator needle within Eco area, more Eco-friendly driving can be
achieved.
●Charge area indicates regeneration* status. Regenerated energy will be used to
charge the battery.
*: When used in this manual, “regeneration” refers to the conversion of energy cre-
ated by the movement of the vehicle into electrical energy.
Charge area
Shows regenerative charging.
Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is not
being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically stop
and restart under various conditions.
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an
Eco-friendly manner.
Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving range is
being exceeded (during full power driving
etc.)
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
93
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■ECO lamp and SPORT lamp
●When sport mode is selected, SPORT lamp (red) will illuminate.
●When all of the following conditions are satisfied and Eco-friendly driving, ECO
lamp (blue) will illuminate. (ECO lamp will become brighter the more Eco-friendly
driving you perform. Also, while the vehicle is stopped or the acceleration exceeds
Zone of Eco driving, ECO lamp turns off. (P. 92) However, when Eco drive
mode is selected, while the vehicle is stopped or the acceleration exceeds Zone of
Eco driving, ECO lamp does not turn off.):
• Driving with the shift lever in D
• Paddle shift switch is not operated.
• Either normal mode or Eco drive mode is selected.
• The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or below.
■Tachometer
Hybrid System Indicator switches to the tachometer when driving mode is in sport
mode.
■Engine speed
On hybrid vehicles, engine speed is precisely controlled in order to help improve
fuel efficiency and reduce exhaust emissions etc.
There are times when the engine speed that is displayed may differ even when vehi-
cle operation and driving conditions are the same.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. on/off operation of ECO lamp) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 807)
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
●The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the
red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check
the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 774)
94
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-
related data including the current outside air temperature.
●Energy monitor (P. 110)
●Outside temperature display
(P. 95)
●Trip information (P. 95)
Displays driving range, fuel consump-
tion and other cruising related infor-
mation
●Tire inflation pressure
(if equipped) (P. 661)
●Drive monitor (P. 97)
●Intuitive parking assist display*
(if equipped) (P. 263)
●Dynamic radar cruise control dis-
play* (if equipped) (P. 236)
●LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) dis-
play* (if equipped) (P. 255)
●Warning messages (P. 721)
Automatically displayed when a mal-
function occurs in one of the vehicle’s
systems. Display can be switched by
pressing the “DISP” button. (P. 95)
*: Automatically displayed when the sys-
tem is used. Display can be switched
by pressing the “DISP” button.
(P. 95)
Display contents
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
95
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■Switching the display
Items displayed can be switched
by pressing the “DISP” button.
■Energy monitor
P. 110
■Outside temperature
■Current fuel consumption
■Average fuel consumption after refueling
Trip information
Displays the outside air temperature
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40F (-40C) to 122F (50C)
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
vehicle was last refueled
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a ref-
erence.
96
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
■Average fuel consumption
■Average vehicle speed
■Driving range
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset
• The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP”
button for longer than 1 second when the average
fuel consumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a
reference.
Displays the average vehicle speed since the
function was reset
The function can be reset by pressing the “DISP” but-
ton for longer than 1 second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
Displays the estimated approximate distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
When refueling, turn the power switch off. If the
vehicle is refueled without turning the power switch
off, the display may not be updated.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
97
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■Tire inflation pressure (if equipped)
Outside temperature, average fuel
consumption after refueling or driv-
ing range can be selected and dis-
played.
If displayed on the drive monitor,
other trip information or warning
messages can be displayed simulta-
neously.
For display and selection proce-
dures, follow the “Setting up the dis-
plays”.
The information displayed on the drive
monitor will not be displayed on the
trip information screen.
Displays inflation pressure of each tire
The inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be dis-
played
Drive monitor
98
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
While the vehicle is stopped,
press the “DISP” button until the
“Settings” screen appears.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
until the screen changes.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
after selecting the desired set-
ting item by pressing the “DISP”
button.
Setting up the displays
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
99
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Press and hold the “DISP” button
after selecting the desired set-
ting by pressing the “DISP” but-
ton.
The display goes back to step .
Press and hold the “DISP” button
after selecting the “EXIT” by
pressing the “DISP” button.
The display goes back to step .
(The display goes back to step
automatically in few seconds without
proceeding step .)
4
3
5
1
1
5
100
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
■System check display
After turning the power switch to ON mode, “SYSTEM CHECK” is displayed while
system operation is checked.
■Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or
the display may take longer than normal to change.
●When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
●When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a
garage, tunnel, etc.)
■Setting display automatic cancelation
In the following situations, setting display in which the settings can be changed
through the “DISP” button will automatically be turned off.
●When a warning message appears while the setting display is displayed
●When the vehicle begins to move while the setting display is displayed
■Tire inflation pressure (if equipped)
●It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the power switch
is turned to ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation
pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.
●“---” may be displayed if the tire information cannot be determined due to unfavor-
able radio wave conditions.
●Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be
different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.
■Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is character-
istic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
■Customization
Setting of available languages can be changed. (Customizable features P. 807)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
101
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
CAUTION
■The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal informa-
tion display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number
appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, caus-
ing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death
or injury.
■Cautions during setting up the display
As the hybrid system needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure
that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such
as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect
and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■During setting up the display
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating
while setting up the display features.
102
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
Head-up display
The head-up display can be used to project vehicle speed and other infor-
mation onto the windshield.
Head-up display
Display brightness will change auto-
matically according to the brightness
of the surrounding area.
“HUD” button
Display brightness adjustment
switch
Display brightness can be adjusted to
the desired level.
Display position adjustment
switch
“DISP” button
: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
3
4
5
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
103
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
●Vehicle speed
●Hybrid System Indicator (P. 106)
●Tachometer
●Shift position and shift range
Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (P. 199)
●Audio display
Displays audio information for approximately 3 seconds when the audio system is
operated
●Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)
(P. 107)
When approaching an intersection while the navigation system is giving route
guidance, an arrow will automatically be displayed to indicate the direction of
travel.
●Lane departure warning display (LKA [Lane-Keeping Assist])
(if equipped) (P. 736)
●Approach warning display (dynamic radar cruise control)
(if equipped) (P. 735)
●Pre-collision braking warning message (pre-collision system)
(if equipped) (P. 723)
Head-up display contents
104
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
■“HUD” button
Pressing the switch turns the
head-up display on/off and
changes the vehicle speed dis-
play units as follows:
U.S.A.
OFF ON (MPH)
ON (km/h) OFF
Canada
OFF ON (km/h)
ON (MPH) OFF
■“DISP” button
Pressing the button changes the
display items (except vehicle
speed).
Off
Hybrid System Indicator
Tachometer
Switching the head-up display
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
105
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■Adjusting the display position
Higher
Lower
■Setting the brightness
The brightness of the display is automatically adjusted in accordance
with the brightness of the surrounding environment. However, the
brightness can also be manually adjusted in 9 stages.
Brighter
Darker
Making the display easier to see
1
2
1
2
106
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
Charge area
Shows regenerative charging.
Hybrid Eco area
Shows that gasoline engine power is
not being used very often.
The gasoline engine will automatically
stop and restart under various condi-
tions.
Eco area
Shows that the vehicle is being driven
in an Eco-friendly manner.
Power area
Shows that an Eco-friendly driving
range is being exceeded (during full
power driving etc.)
Hybrid System Indicator
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
107
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
When the vehicle approaches an
intersection, the direction the vehi-
cle should go is guided by the arrow.
When the vehicle approaches an
intersection, the route guidance will
start and the distance* to the inter-
section will also be displayed.
*: The distance decreases in increments
of 164 ft. (50 m) and the distance indi-
cation will disappear when the vehicle
passes through the intersection.
The audio display can be shown or hidden.
Press and hold the “DISP” button
until the screen changes.
Customization can be performed
when the head-up display is on and
the vehicle is traveling at less than 5
mph (8 km/h).
Press the “DISP” button to switch
between on and off.
On and off will be switched between
each time the button is pressed.
If the button is left alone without being
operated for a short time, setting will
be finished automatically.
Route guidance display (vehicles with navigation system)
Display customization
1
2
108
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
■Head-up display
●The head-up display may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sun-
glasses, especially polarized sunglasses.
Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.
●When the head-up display is turned off, it will remain off even if the power switch is
turned to ON mode after the power switch has been turned off.
■When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
The customize settings of the head-up display will be reset.
CAUTION
■Before using the head-up display
Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not
interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image’s position or bright-
ness may obstruct the driver’s view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or
serious injury.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to components
●Do not place any drinks near the head-up
display projector. If the projector gets wet,
electrical malfunctions may result.
●Do not place anything on or put stickers
onto the head-up display projector.
Doing so could interrupt head-up display
indications.
●Do not touch the inside of the head-up dis-
play projector or thrust sharp edges or the
like into the projector.
Doing so could cause mechanical malfunc-
tions.
110
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
■Remote Touch screen
Vehicles without a navigation system
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.
Select “Info” on the “Menu”
screen.
If the “Trip Information” or “Past
Record” screen is displayed, select
“Energy”.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.
Select “Info/Apps” on the
“Menu” screen.
Select “Fuel Consumption” on
the “Information” screen.
If the “Trip Information” or “Past
Record” screen is displayed, select
“Energy”.
The “Energy Monitor” screen can be displayed on the “Side Display”.
For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Energy monitor
1
2
1
2
3
112
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
These images are examples only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
Remote Touch screen Multi-information display
When the vehicle is pow-
ered by the electric motor
(traction motor)
When the vehicle is pow-
ered by both the gasoline
engine and the electric
motor (traction motor)
When the vehicle is pow-
ered by the gasoline engine
When the vehicle is charg-
ing the hybrid battery (trac-
tion battery)
When there is no energy
flow
Hybrid battery (traction bat-
tery) status
Low Full
Low Full
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
113
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
Vehicles with a navigation system: The consumption screen can be dis-
played on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info” on
the “Menu” screen.
If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select “Fuel Consumption”.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info/
Apps” on the “Menu” screen.
Select “Fuel Consumption” on the “Information” screen.
If the “Energy Monitor” screen is displayed, select “Fuel Consumption”.
Consumption
1
2
1
2
3
114
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
2. Instrument cluster
■Trip information
If the “Past Record” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.
Resetting the consumption
data
Fuel consumption in the past
15 minutes
Regenerated energy in the
past 15 minutes
One symbol indicates 50 Wh.
Up to 5 symbols are shown.
Displays the average vehicle
speed since the hybrid system
was started.
Displays the elapsed time
since the hybrid system was
started.
Cruising range (P. 115)
Average fuel consumption for the
past 15 minutes is divided by color
into past averages and averages
attained since the power switch
was last turned to ON mode. Use
the displayed average fuel con-
sumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and
may vary slightly from actual condi-
tions.
1
2
3
4
5
6
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
115
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
■Past record
If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.
Updating the average fuel
consumption data
Resetting the past record data
Best recorded fuel consump-
tion
Average fuel consumption
Previous fuel consumption
record
The average fuel consumption his-
tory is divided by color into past
averages and the average fuel con-
sumption since the last updated.
Use the displayed average fuel
consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and
may vary slightly from actual condi-
tions.
■Updating the past record data
Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current
fuel consumption again.
■Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel
remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
1
2
3
4
5
117
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3
Operation of
each component
3-1. Key information
Keys ....................................................118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk
Smart access system
with push-button start..............121
Wireless remote control.......... 134
Doors................................................137
Trunk...................................................141
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats...................................... 148
Driving position memory.........150
Head restraints ............................ 155
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel
and mirrors
Steering wheel.............................158
Inside rear view mirror.............. 159
Outside rear view mirrors.........161
3-5. Opening, closing the windows
and moon roof
Power windows............................ 164
Moon roof.......................................167
118
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access system
with push-button start (P. 121)
• Operating the wireless remote
control function (P. 13 4)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
To take out the mechanical key, push
the release button and take the key
out.
The mechanical key can only be
inserted in one direction, as the key
only has grooves on one side. If the
key cannot be inserted in a lock cylin-
der, turn it over and re-attempt to
insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store
it in the electronic key. Carry the
mechanical key together with the
electronic key. If the electronic key
battery is depleted or the entry func-
tion does not operate properly, you
will need the mechanical key.
(P. 767)
The keys
1
2
3
Using the mechanical key
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
119
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
■When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off and lock the glove box as circumstances
demand. (P. 142, 576)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■If you lose your mechanical keys
New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other
mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the
plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
■When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any
buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an
electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed
accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that
could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
120
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-1. Key information
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.
●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to
such materials.
●Do not disassemble the keys.
●Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
●Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs,
audio systems and glass top ranges, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-
frequency therapy equipment.
■Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that
are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm)
of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function
properly.
■In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-
related problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
■When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys that was
provided with your vehicle.
121
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the elec-
tronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should
always carry the electronic key.)
■Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■Welcome light illumination control
The side marker, parking, tail and license plate lights automatically turn on at night
when the doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if
the light switch is in the “AUTO” position.
Function summary
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 122)
Opens the trunk (P. 122)
Starts the hybrid system (P. 189)
1
2
3
122
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Grip the driver’s door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passen-
ger’s door handle to unlock all the
doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on the
back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the doors are locked.
*: The door unlock settings can be
changed. (P. 126)
Touch the lock sensor (the indenta-
tion on the upper part of the door
handle) to lock all the doors.
Press the button.
If the vehicle is equipped with power
trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid
automatically opens fully.
Unlocking and locking the doors
Opening the trunk
124
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking the
doors
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about
2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door
handle. (Only the doors detecting
the key can be operated.)
When opening the trunk
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is within about
2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release
button.
When starting the hybrid sys-
tem or changing power switch
modes
The system can be operated when
the electronic key is inside the vehi-
cle.
■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door
handle
If the door will not lock even when the topside
sensor area is touched, try touching both the
topside and underside sensor areas at the
same time.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
125
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
■Alarms and warning indicators
An alarm sounds and warning message displays shown on the multi-information dis-
play are used to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle result-
ing from erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take
appropriate measures based on the displayed message. (P. 721)
When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as fol-
lows.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm sounds
once for 5 seconds
The trunk was closed
while the electronic key
was still inside the trunk
and all the doors were
locked.
Retrieve the electronic
key from the trunk and
close the trunk lid.
An attempt was made to
lock the vehicle while a
door was open.
Close all of the doors and
lock the doors again.
Interior alarm sounds
continuously
The power switch was
turned to ACCESSORY
mode while the driver’s
door was open (or the
driver’s door was opened
while the power switch
was in ACCESSORY
mode).
Turn the power switch off
and close the driver’s
door.
126
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote
control.
Turn the power switch off.
When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold ,
or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding .
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat step .)
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless
remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been
changed. (If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the
doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 81)
1
2
2
Multi-information
display Unlocking function Beep
Holding the driver’s door han-
dle unlocks only the driver’s
door. Exterior: Beeps 3 times
Interior: Pings once
Holding a passenger’s door
handle unlocks all the doors.
Holding a door handle unlocks
all the doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
127
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
■Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key
battery and the 12-volt battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in
operation for a long time.
●In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take
some time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or
longer.
●If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or
longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this
case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the
mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
■Electronic Key battery-Saving Function
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the
electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press twice while pressing and holding
. Confirm that the electronic key indi-
cator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the
smart access system with push-button start
cannot be used. To cancel the function, press
any of the electronic key buttons.
128
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the follow-
ing situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote
control and immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 767)
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, air-
port or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless
communication device
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic
objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
•Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
●When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit
radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
129
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
■Note for the entry function
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear
bumper center when the trunk is opened.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the
door pockets or glove box when the hybrid system is started or power switch
modes are changed.
●Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door
pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception condi-
tions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will
become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the
vehicle.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked
or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can
be used to unlock the vehicle.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the
hybrid system if the electronic key is near the window.
●The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door han-
dle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effec-
tive range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds
if the doors are not opened and closed.)
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is
near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
130
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Note for locking the doors
●Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock
operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again.
●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective
range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following
correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access sys-
tem with push-button start. (P. 127)
●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a
car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer
will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud,
etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor
on the lower part of the door handle.
●Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be
careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.
■Note for the unlocking function
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors
from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position
and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective
range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following
correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access sys-
tem with push-button start. (P. 127)
●If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to
unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.
●Fingernails may scrape against the door during operation of the door handle. Be
careful not to injure fingernails or damage the surface of the door.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
131
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
●The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.
(P. 807)
■Alarm
Using the smart access system with push-button start to lock the doors will set the
alarm system. (P. 81)
■To operate the system properly
●Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key
may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The
alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not oper-
ate.)
●Do not leave the electronic key inside the luggage compartment.
The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the loca-
tion of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the luggage compartment),
conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the
surrounding area. (P. 143)
■If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 767)
●Starting the hybrid system: P. 768
132
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Electronic key battery depletion
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the hybrid system
stops. (P. 746)
●As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become
depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate
that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when neces-
sary. (P. 668)
• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control
does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
•Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
•Table lamps
•Glass top ranges
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 668
■Customization
Settings (e. g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)
■If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a cus-
tomized setting
●Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 13 4, 767)
●Starting the hybrid system and changing power switch modes: P. 768
●Stopping the hybrid system: P. 190
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
133
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
■Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
FCC ID: HYQ14CBA
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-3
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
from the smart access system with push-button start antennas. (P. 123)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency
of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor
to see if you should disable the entry function.
●Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.
134
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 5 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
Opens the windows and moon
roof (press and hold)*
Opens the trunk
(press and hold)
If the vehicle is equipped with a power
trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid
automatically opens fully.
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold) (P. 135)
*: This setting must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.
Function summary
1
2
3
4
5
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
135
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
■Operation signals
Doors:
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have
been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
Trun k :
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been opened.
Windows and moon roof:
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof are operating.
■Welcome light illumination control
P. 121
■Door lock buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer
sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock
the vehicle once more.
■Panic mode
■Security feature
P. 121
■Alarm
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(P. 81)
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 128
When is pressed for longer than about
one second, an alarm will sound intermittently
and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any
person from trying to break into or damage
your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
electronic key.
136
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■If the wireless remote control does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(P. 767)
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 132
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 668
■Confirmation of the registered key number
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)
■Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ23AAB FCC ID: HYQ14FBA
FCC ID: HYQ14CBA
FCC ID: NI4TMLF10-3
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
137
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switches.
◆Entry function
P. 121
◆Wireless remote control
P. 134
◆Door lock switches
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
◆Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened by
pulling the inside handle even if the
lock buttons are in the lock posi-
tion.
Unlocking and locking the doors
1
2
1
2
138
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON
mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent chil-
dren from opening the rear doors.
Push down on each rear door switch
to lock both rear doors.
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
Rear door child-protector lock
1
2
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
139
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
The following functions can be set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 807.
■Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 767)
■If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely to isolate inside mechanism.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
Function Operation
“A u t o Lo ck by Sp e e d ”
All doors are automatically locked
when vehicle speed is approximately
12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
“A u t o Lo ck by Sh i f t f ro m P ”
All doors are automatically locked
when shifting the shift lever to position
other than P.
“Auto Unlock by Shift to P” All doors are automatically unlocked
when shifting the shift lever to P.
“Auto Unlock by Driver Door” All doors are automatically unlocked
when driver’s door is opened.
140
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the
vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
●Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the
inside lock buttons are in locked position.
●Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
141
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
Trunk
Press the opener switch.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power
trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid
automatically opens fully.
■Entry function
P. 121
■Wireless remote control
P. 134
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or
wireless remote control.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the
trunk can be closed using the trunk closer.
Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
142
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Pressing the switch closes the trunk
lid automatically. (A buzzer sounds.)
Pressing the switch while the trunk lid
is closing opens the trunk lid again.
Using the trunk grip, lower the trunk
without applying force to the side
and push the trunk down from the
outside to close it.
The trunk opener switch can be temporarily disabled to protect luggage
stored in the trunk against theft.
Turn the main switch in the glove
box off to disable the trunk opener.
On
Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened even
with the wireless remote control or the
entry function.
Trunk closer switch (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
When closing the trunk
Luggage security system
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
143
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
■Tr un k lig ht
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
■Trunk easy closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automati-
cally close it to the fully closed position.
■Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside
●When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left
inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the
trunk lid.
●Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the
key confinement prevention function can be activated so the trunk can be opened.
In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
●Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked, the
key may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding radio wave
conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be acti-
vated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check
where the key is before closing the trunk.
●The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the
doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.
■Overload protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk
lid.
■Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
While the trunk lid is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop
the opening operation to prevent the trunk lid from rapidly falling down.
■Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
While the trunk lid is closing automatically, the trunk lid will stop closing and open if
something gets caught.
144
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Internal trunk release lever
■Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 768)
■When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
P. 119
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the
glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside
of the trunk lid to the side.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■Before driving
●Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may
open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk
may be thrown out, causing an accident.
●Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffocate.
●Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s
hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
■Important points while driving
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they
are susceptible to death or serious injury.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
145
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
CAUTION
■Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious
injury.
●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening
it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again after it is opened.
●When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-
rounding area is safe.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
●Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may
move abruptly in strong wind.
●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid.
Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed again after
it is opened.
●The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened fully.
It is more difficult to open or close the trunk
lid on an incline than on a level surface, so
beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly open-
ing or closing by itself. Make sure that the
trunk lid is fully open and secure before
using the trunk.
●When closing the trunk lid, take extra care
to prevent your fingers etc. from being
caught.
●When closing the trunk lid, make sure to
press it lightly on its outer surface. If the
trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk
lid, it may result in hands or arms being
caught.
146
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■Trunk easy closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
■Power trunk opener and closer (if equipped)
Observe the following precautions when operating the power trunk opener and
closer.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
●Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or
anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the
trunk is about to open or close.
●If the trunk closer switch is pressed while the trunk lid is opening during automatic
operation, the trunk lid stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the
trunk lid may open or close suddenly.
●On an incline, the trunk lid may fall after it opens automatically. Make sure the
trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.
●In the following situations, the power trunk opener and closer may detect an
abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the trunk lid
has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped trunk
lid may suddenly fall, causing an accident.
• When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle
• When the 12-volt battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the power
switch is turned to ON mode or the hybrid system is started during automatic
operation
●Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. The
power trunk opener and closer may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or
the trunk lid may fall closed again after it is opened.
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly
open, the trunk easy closer will automatically
close it to the fully closed position. It takes
several seconds before the trunk easy closer
begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fin-
gers or anything else in the trunk lid, as this
may cause bone fractures or other serious
injuries.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
147
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
3
Operation of each component
CAUTION
■Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the trunk lid fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the
trunk lid.
●The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object
that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
NOTICE
■To prevent trunk easy closer malfunctions (vehicles with power trunk opener and
closer)
Do not apply force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating.
■To prevent damage to the power trunk opener and closer (vehicles with power
trunk opener and closer)
●Make sure that there is no luggage or snow on the trunk lid before operating the
power trunk opener and closer. In addition, make sure that there is no ice
between the trunk lid and frame that prevents movement of the trunk lid. Operat-
ing the power trunk opener and closer when excessive load is present on the
trunk lid may cause a malfunction.
●Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the power trunk opener and
closer is operating.
148
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats
Type A
Type B
Adjustment procedure
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback angle adjustment
switch
Seat cushion (front) angle adjust-
ment switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Seatback upper angle adjust-
ment switch (if equipped)
Lumbar support adjustment
switch
Pelvic support adjustment
switch (if equipped)
Seat cushion length adjustment
switch (if equipped)
Seatback side support adjust-
ment switch (if equipped)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
149
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
■Power easy access system
The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with power switch mode
and the driver’s seat belt condition. The passenger’s seat moves when the passen-
ger’s door is opened. (P. 153)
CAUTION
■When adjusting the seat position
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
■Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the
seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt,
increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move
and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
■When adjusting the seat positions
Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.
150
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Driving position memory
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to
the desired positions. (When memorizing the front passenger’s seat,
adjust the front passenger’s seat to the desired positions.)
While pressing the “SET” button,
or within 3 seconds after the
“SET” button is pressed, press
button “1”, “2” or “3” until the sig-
nal beeps.
If the selected button has already
been preset, the previously recorded
position will be overwritten.
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steer-
ing wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and
recalled by pressing a button. It is also possible to set this function to
activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.
Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.
The same buttons are found on the front passenger’s side, allowing the
position of the front passenger’s seat to be memorized (if equipped).
Entering a position to memory
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
151
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
Check that the shift lever is in P.
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
Press button “1”, “2” or “3” to
recall the desired position.
■When you want to stop the position recall operation part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
●Press the “SET” button.
●Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
●Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
■The adjusted positions that can be memorized
Vehicles without seatback side support adjustment switch
The adjusted positions other than the position adjusted by lumber support switch can
be memorized.
Vehicles with seatback side support adjustment switch
All adjusted positions can be memorized.
Recalling the memorized position
1
2
3
152
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
A desired driving position can be recalled linked with the unlocking of the
door.
■Setting procedure
Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing
the following:
Carrying only the key to which you want to link the driving position, shift
the shift lever to P and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be linked
properly.
Turn the power switch to ON mode and recall the position which you
want to link.
While pressing the button to
recall the position, press the
driver’s door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the
signal beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver’s door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
(driver’s side only)
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
153
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
■Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key for which you want to cancel the linked door unlock
operation.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be can-
celed properly.
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
While pressing the “SET” button, press the driver’s door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the signal beeps.
The auto away/return function
enables easy access by activating
when the driver or front passenger
attempts to enter or exit the vehicle.
■Auto away function when exiting the vehicle (driver’s/front passen-
ger’s seat)
Driver’s seat
When all of the following actions have been performed, the steering
wheel will move up and back to the point farthest away from the driver
and the seat will move backward:
• The shift lever has been shifted to P.
• The power switch has been turned off.
• The driver seat belt has been unfastened.
Front passenger’s seat (if equipped)
If the lumbar support, side support (if equipped), etc. of the front pas-
senger’s seat has been adjusted, the seat will return to its original state if
the front passenger’s door is opened while the vehicle is stopped to
allow easy exit from the vehicle.
Power easy access system
1
2
154
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■Auto return function when entering the vehicle (driver’s seat only)
When either of the following actions has been performed, the steering
wheel will move toward the driver and seat will move forward:
• The power switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode.
• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.
■When driving position memory is linked with door unlock operation
If the driver’s door is opened, the driver’s seat will move toward the memorized posi-
tion but stop slightly beforehand to allow easy access to the vehicle.
Turning the power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode, or fastening the driver’s
seat belt moves the seat fully into the memorized position.
■Operating the driving position memory after turning the power switch off
Driver’s seat:
Memorized seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door
is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again. Memorized steering
wheel position can be activated by pressing the power switch.
Front passenger’s seat:
Memorized positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s
door is opened by pressing button “1”, “2” or “3”.
■Correct seat position
When the seat is in the most forward or most backward position, and the seat is
being moved in those directions, the system may not correctly recognize the current
position and the memorized position will not be correctly recalled.
■The auto away function for exiting the driver’s seat
If the seat is already close to the rearmost position, the auto away function may not
operate when the driver exits the vehicle.
■Customization
The distance that the driver’s seat moves backward during the auto away function
can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 807)
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passen-
ger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
155
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
Head restraints
Vertical adjustment
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Lock release button
1
2
Angle adjustment (if equipped) Side support adjustment
(if equipped)
The position of the head restraint
can be adjusted forward in 4 stages.
If the head restraint is pulled forward
from the foremost position, it will
return to the rearmost position.
156
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
■Removing the head restraints
■Installing the head restraints
Front seats
Rear seats
Rear seats
Lock release button
1
2
Pull the head restraint up while pressing the
lock release button.
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button when
lowering the head restraint.
Align the head restraint with the installation
holes and push it down to the lowest lock
position while pressing the lock release but-
ton.
Lock release button
Lock release button
Lock release button
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
157
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are
locked in position.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
158 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Steering wheel
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:
Up
Down
Toward the driver
Away from the driver
■The steering wheel can be adjusted when
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode*.
*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of
power switch mode.
■Automatic adjustment of the steering position
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by
the driving position memory system. (P. 150)
■Power easy access system
The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with power switch mode
and the driver’s seat belt condition. (P. 153)
Adjustment procedure
1
2
3
4
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
159
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Inside rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving pos-
ture.
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind,
the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Changing automatic anti-glare
function mode
ON
OFF
When the automatic anti-glare func-
tion is in ON mode, the indicator illu-
minates.
The function will set to ON mode
each time the power switch is turned
to ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function
to OFF mode. (The indicator also
turns off.)
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient
confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Anti-glare function
Indicator
1
2
160 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover them.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■Rear view mirror adjustment (vehicles with LKA [Lane-Keeping Assist])
To ensure that the LKA operates properly,
make sure that it does not block the LKA
camera sensor.
161
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Outside rear view mirrors
To select a mirror to adjust, press
the switch.
Left
Right
Pressing the same switch again will
put the switch in neutral.
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle’s rear.
Adjustment procedure
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
Folding the mirrors
162 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
■Linked mirror function when reversing
●When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear view
mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order
to give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, select neither “L” nor
“R”.
●If the mirror angle adjustment switch is operated while the linked mirror function is
in operation, the angle and position of the mirrors can be remembered, and the
mirrors will operate at the angle adjusted to the last time the linked mirror function
was operated.
However, because the mirrors move based on the angle they are in when the linked
mirror function is not operating, the mirror angle when the linked mirror function is
operating will also be changed if the mirrors are adjusted while the function is not
operating.
■When the mirrors are fogged up
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the
rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (P. 384)
■Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically
by the driving position memory. (P. 150)
■Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside
rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mir-
ror to reduce reflected light. (P. 159)
163
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
■Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
164
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*:Pushing the switch in the opposite
direction will stop window travel part-
way.
Press the switch to lock the passen-
ger window switches.
The indicator will come on.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or closing a
passenger window.
Opening and closing procedures
1
2
3
4
Window lock switch
Indicator
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
165
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
■The power windows can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■Operating the power windows after turning the hybrid system off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■When the power window does not close normally
If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be
closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch on the rele-
vant door.
●After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the power window
switch in the one-touch closing position while the power switch is turned to ON
mode.
●If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation as explained
above, initialize the function by performing the following procedure.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position. Continue
holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the window has closed.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position. Continue
holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has opened com-
pletely.
Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again.
Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the window has
closed.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the
above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
1
2
3
166
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■Door lock linked window operation
●The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.*
(P. 767)
●The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (P. 13 4)
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after
reconnecting the 12-volt battery.
■Power windows open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is
opened with the power windows open.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■Closing the windows
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
■Jam protection function
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
167
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
Moon roof
Opens the moon roof*
The moon roof stops slightly before
the fully open position to reduce wind
noise.
Press the switch again to fully open the
moon roof.
Closes the moon roof*
*: Lightly press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof
partway.
Tilts the moon roof up*
Tilts the moon roof down*
*: Lightly press either way of the moon
roof switch to stop the moon roof
partway.
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it
up and down.
Opening and closing
1
2
Tilting up and down
1
2
168
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■The moon roof can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■Operating the moon roof after turning the hybrid system off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the power
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be oper-
ated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is
closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open
automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■Door lock linked moon roof operation
●The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (P. 767)
●The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (P. 134)
*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
169
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
3
Operation of each component
■When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
●If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2
Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it
will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release
the switch.
●If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up posi-
tion and stops.
Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.*1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt
down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release
the switch.
*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be per-
formed again from the beginning.
*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic
operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP”
switch, and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then
it will tilt down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is com-
pletely closed and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure cor-
rectly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
170
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
■Moon roof open warning buzzer
The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the
instrument cluster when the power switch is turned off and the driver’s door is
opened with the moon roof open.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■Opening the moon roof
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■Closing the moon roof
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection func-
tion.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
171
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle.......................172
Cargo and luggage....................183
Vehicle load limits .......................186
Trailer towing................................. 187
Dinghy towing...............................188
4-2. Driving procedures
Power (ignition) switch..............189
EV drive mode .............................196
Hybrid transmission...................199
Turn signal lever ......................... 205
Parking brake...............................207
Brake Hold.....................................210
Horn.................................................. 212
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch..........................213
Fog light switch.............................218
Windshield wipers
and washer..................................219
Headlight cleaner switch........226
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 227
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Cruise control.............................232
Dynamic radar
cruise control............................236
LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist)........... 251
Intuitive parking assist................261
Rear view monitor system.......274
Driving mode select switch ...286
Driving assist systems...............289
PCS
(Pre-Collision System)..........296
BSM
(Blind Spot Monitor)..............305
Lexus night view............................311
4-6. Driving tips
Hybrid vehicle driving tips........317
Winter driving tips ...................... 319
172
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle
P. 189
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 199)
If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake.
(P. 207)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator
pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to
P. (P. 199)
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If the parking brake is in manual mode, set the parking brake.
(P. 207)
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 199)
Press the power switch to stop the hybrid system.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your
person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:
Starting the hybrid system
Driving
Stopping
Parking the vehicle
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
173
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
■When starting off on a uphill
The brake hold is available. (P. 21 0)
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there
may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the
steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recom-
mended:
●For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
Starting off on a steep uphill
1
2
3
174
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-1. Before driving
■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system
needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding
down operation.
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 792)
■For efficient use
●Shift the shift lever to D when driving.
In the N position, the gasoline engine operates but electricity cannot be generated.
The hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge, requiring unnecessary engine
power to recharge.
●Drive your vehicle smoothly.
Avoid abrupt acceleration and deceleration. Gradual acceleration and decelera-
tion will make more effective use of the electric motor (traction motor) without hav-
ing to use gasoline engine power.
●Avoid repeated acceleration.
Repeated acceleration consumes hybrid battery (traction battery) power, resulting
in poor acceleration. Battery power can be restored by driving with the accelerator
pedal slightly released.
●Shift the shift lever to P when parking.
In the N position, the hybrid battery (traction battery) does not recharge.
Leaving the shift lever in the N position for an extended period of time may dis-
charge the hybrid battery (traction battery). The vehicle cannot run if the hybrid
battery (traction battery) is discharged.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
175
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the hybrid system
operating. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals prop-
erly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an acci-
dent.
●The driver should pay extra attention to pedestrians when the vehicle is powered
only by the electric motor (traction motor). Because there is no engine noise, the
pedestrians may misjudge the vehicle’s movement.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
176
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■When driving the vehicle
●During normal driving, do not turn off the hybrid system. Turning the hybrid sys-
tem off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer
and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way: P. 703
●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effec-
tiveness. (P. 199)
●Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not
outside the vehicle.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
177
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle.
●Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
●After driving through a puddle, depress the brake pedal to make sure that the
brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected.
■When shifting the shift lever
●Do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may result in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
●Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to D while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
●Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the hybrid
system. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
●Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shift-
ing the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid accel-
eration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious
injury.
178
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
Front brakes only: Moderate levels of brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced
front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conven-
tional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends
that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
●In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep
depressing the brake pedal while the “READY” indicator is on, and apply the
parking brake as necessary.
●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the
vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely
apply the parking brake as needed.
●Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the
exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is
nearby.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
179
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical com-
ponents.
●Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such
as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded
or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
●Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place contain-
ers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs
or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
●Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metal-
lized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to
act as a lens, causing a fire.
●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the hybrid system
and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the hybrid system is operating.
●Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the hybrid system is operating or immedi-
ately after turning the hybrid system off.
Doing so may cause burns.
180
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-1. Before driving
CAUTION
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the hybrid system off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to
hybrid system overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly venti-
lated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a
serious health hazard.
■When braking
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side
of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.
●The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems
fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.
If this happens, do not continue to drive the vehicle. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
181
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
NOTICE
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving,
as this may restrain driving torque.
●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at
the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■When parking the vehicle
Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or
the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally
depressed.
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an
extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
●The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 749)
182
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-1. Before driving
NOTICE
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause
the following serious damage to the vehicle:
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following:
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission,
differential, etc.
●Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where
possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
183
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Cargo and luggage
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5150) = 650
lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
(P. 186)
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not
designed for trailer towing.
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions,
cargo capacity and load:
Capacity and distribution
184
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-1. Before driving
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in
your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 825 lb. (370 kg), the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
825 lb. — 366 lb. = 459 lb. (370 kg —166 kg = 204 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb. (176
kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
459 lb. — 388 lb. = 71 lb. (204 kg — 176 kg = 28 kg)
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the
increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an
increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load
capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load),
you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
Example based on your vehicle
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
185
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
CAUTION
■Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
●Receptacles containing gasoline
●Aerosol cans
■Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block
the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly
causing an accident.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
•On the dashboard
• In front of the Remote Touch screen
●Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
■Capacity and distribution
●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause dete-
rioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
186
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-1. Before driving
Vehicle load limits
◆Total load capacity: 825 lb. (370 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
◆Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
◆Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
◆Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
■Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 661)
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
CAUTION
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
187
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus
also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a
tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is
not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted car-
riers.
189
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Power (ignition) switch
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the hybrid system cannot be started.
Press the power switch.
Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the hybrid system is completely
started.
The hybrid system can be started from
any power switch mode.
Check that the “READY” indicator is on.
The vehicle will not move when the “READY” indicator is off.
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key
on your person starts the hybrid system or changes power switch
modes.
Starting the hybrid system
1
2
3
4
5
190
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the parking brake. (P. 207)
Press the power switch.
Release the brake pedal and check that “POWER ON” on the multi-
information display is off.
Modes can be changed by pressing the power switch with brake pedal
released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
Off*
The emergency flashers can be used.
The multi-information display will not
be displayed.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as
the audio system can be used.
“POWER ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
ON mode
All electrical components can be
used.
“POWER ON” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
*: If the shift lever is in a position other
than P when turning off the hybrid sys-
tem, the power switch will be turned to
ACCESSORY mode, not to off.
Stopping the hybrid system
Changing power switch modes
1
2
3
4
5
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
191
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
If the hybrid system is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P,
the power switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCES-
SORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:
Check that the parking brake is set.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” are displayed alter-
nately on the multi-information display and then press the power switch
once.
Check that “POWER ON” and “Turn Power OFF” on the multi-infor-
mation display are off.
When stopping the hybrid system with the shift lever in a position
other than P
1
2
3
4
192
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
■Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or ON mode
(the hybrid system is not operating) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the
power switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely pre-
vent 12-volt battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the power switch in
ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of time when the hybrid system is not
operating.
■Sounds and vibrations specific to a hybrid vehicle
P. 73
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 132
■When the ambient temperature is low, such as during winter driving conditions
It may take time until the “READY” indicator comes on.
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 128
■Notes for the entry function
P. 129
■If the hybrid system does not start
●The immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 79)
Contact your Lexus dealer.
●Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The hybrid system may not start if the
shift lever is displaced out of P. “Shift to P position when Starting” will be displayed
on the multi-information display.
■Steering lock
After turning the power switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering
wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the power switch
again automatically cancels the steering lock.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
193
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
■When the steering lock cannot be released
■Steering lock motor overheating prevention
To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if
the hybrid system is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this
case, refrain from operating the hybrid system. After about 10 seconds, the steering
lock motor will resume functioning.
■When “Check Access System with Elec. Key” will be displayed on the multi-infor-
mation display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
■If the “READY” indicator does not come on
If the “READY” indicator does not come on when you press the power switch with
the shift lever in P and the brake pedal depressed, contact your Lexus dealer imme-
diately.
■If the hybrid system is malfunctioning
P. 722
■If the electronic key battery is depleted
P. 668
■Operation of the power switch
●When operating the power switch, one short, firm press is enough. If the switch is
pressed improperly, the hybrid system may not start or the power switch mode may
not change. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.
●If attempting to restart the hybrid system immediately after turning the power
switch off, the hybrid system may not start in some cases. After turning the power
switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the hybrid system.
■If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a cus-
tomized setting
P. 767
“Steering Lock active” will be displayed on
the multi-information display.
Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the
power switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
194
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When starting the hybrid system
Always start the hybrid system while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the hybrid system under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Caution while driving
If hybrid system failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the
doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering
lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious
injury.
■Stopping the hybrid system in an emergency
If you want to stop the hybrid system in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
press and hold the power switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times
or more in succession. (P. 703)
However, do not touch the power switch while driving except in an emergency.
Turning the hybrid system off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking
control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more dif-
ficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
195
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
●Do not leave the power switch in ACCESSORY or ON mode for long periods of
time without the hybrid system on.
●If “POWER ON” is displayed on the multi-information display, the power switch
is not off. Exit the vehicle after turning the power switch off.
●Do not stop the hybrid system when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If
the hybrid system is stopped in another shift lever position, the power switch will
not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is
left in ACCESSORY mode, 12-volt battery discharge may occur.
■Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the power switch
If the power switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as
the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer
immediately.
196
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
EV drive mode
Turns EV drive mode on/off
When EV drive mode is turned on,
“EV MODE” will be displayed on the
multi-information display. Pressing the
switch when in EV drive mode will
return the vehicle to normal driving
(using the gasoline engine and electric
motor [traction motor]).
■Situations in which EV drive mode cannot be turned on
It may not be possible to turn EV drive mode on in the following situations. If it cannot
be turned on, a buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-informa-
tion display.
●The temperature of the hybrid system is high.
The vehicle has been left in the sun, driven on a hill, driven at high speeds, etc.
●The temperature of the hybrid system is low.
The vehicle has been left in temperatures lower than about 32F (0C) for a long
period of time etc.
●The gasoline engine is warming up.
●The hybrid battery (traction battery) is low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is low.
(P. 110)
●Vehicle speed is about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
●The windshield defogger is in use.
In EV drive mode the electric motor (traction motor), powered by the
hybrid battery (traction battery), is used to drive the vehicle.
This mode allows you to drive in residential areas early in the morning
and late at night, or in indoor parking lots etc. without concern for
noises and gas emissions.
However, when the vehicle proximity notification system is active, the
vehicle may produce sound.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
197
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
■Switching to EV drive mode when the gasoline engine is cold
If the hybrid system is started while the gasoline engine is cold, the gasoline engine
will start automatically in order to warm up. In this case, you will become unable to
switch to EV drive mode.
■Automatic cancelation of EV drive mode
When driving in EV drive mode, the gasoline engine may automatically restart in the
following situations. When EV drive mode is canceled, a buzzer will sound and the
EV drive mode indicator will flash and go off.
●The hybrid battery (traction battery) becomes low.
The remaining battery level indicated in the “Energy Monitor” display is low.
(P. 110)
●Vehicle speed becomes more than about 25 mph (40 km/h).
●The accelerator pedal is depressed firmly or the vehicle is on a hill etc.
When it is possible to inform the driver of automatic cancelation in advance, a prior
notice screen will appear on the multi-information display.
■Possible driving distance when driving in EV drive mode
EV drive mode’s possible driving distance ranges from a few hundred meters to
approximately 0.6 mile (1 km). Driving is possible at speeds of less than approxi-
mately 25 mph (40 km/h). However, depending on vehicle conditions, there are sit-
uations when EV drive mode cannot be used.
(The distance that is possible depends on the hybrid battery [traction battery] level
and driving conditions.)
■Fuel economy
Your Lexus is designed to achieve the best possible fuel economy during normal
driving (using the gasoline engine and electric motor [traction motor]). Driving in EV
drive mode more than necessary may lower fuel economy.
To prevent gasoline engine warm up in order
to reduce noises, start the hybrid system with-
out starting the gasoline engine, pressing the
power switch with fully depressing the brake
pedal and pressing the EV drive mode switch.
198
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
When driving in EV drive mode no engine noise is made. As such, pedestrians,
people riding bicycles or other people and vehicles in the surrounding area may
not be aware of the vehicle starting off or approaching them. Therefore, take extra
care while driving even if the vehicle proximity notification system is active.
199
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Hybrid transmission
While the power switch is in ON mode, move the shift lever with the
brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is
completely stopped.
*1: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in D for normal
driving.
*2: By selecting shift ranges using S mode, you can control accelerating forces and
engine braking forces.
Shifting the shift lever
Shift position purpose
Shift position Objective or function
PParking the vehicle/starting the hybrid system
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*1
SS mode driving*2 (P. 202)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
201
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” paddle shift
switch. Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest shift
range, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine
braking force to be selected. The shift range can then be selected by
operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The selected shift range, from D1 to
D5, will be displayed in the meter.
To return to normal D position driving,
the “+” paddle shift switch must be
held down for a period of time.
■Shift ranges and their functions
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.
Selecting shift ranges in the D position
1
2
Meter display Function
D2 - D5
A gear in the range between D1 and the selected shift
range is automatically chosen depending on vehicle
speed and driving conditions
D1 Setting the shift range at D1
202
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
To enter S mode, shift the shift lever to S. Shift ranges can be selected by
operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in
the shift range of your choosing. The shift range can be selected by the
shift lever or operating the “-” and “+” paddle shift switches.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The selected shift range, from S1 to
S6, will be displayed in the meter.
The initial shift range in S mode is
automatically set to S3, S4 or S5
according to vehicle speed.
■Shift ranges and their functions
●You can choose from 6 levels of accelerating force and engine brak-
ing force.
●A lower shift range will provide greater accelerating force and
engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revo-
lutions will also increase.
●If you accelerate while in ranges 1 to 5, the shift range may automati-
cally range up in accordance with the vehicle’s speed.
Selecting shift ranges in the S position
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
203
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
■When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position
A shift range will be automatically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range
will be one gear lower than the gear in use during normal D position driving.
■Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
●When the vehicle comes to a stop
●If the “+” paddle shift switch is operated when the shift range is in 5
●If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time
●When the shift lever is shifted to other than D
■Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may some-
times be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever or paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
■Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned off after driving
in snow mode.
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 764
204
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehi-
cle skidding to the side or spinning.
NOTICE
■Hybrid battery (traction battery) charge
If the shift lever is in N, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will not be charged
even when the engine is running. Therefore, if the vehicle is left with the shift lever
in N for a long period of time, the hybrid battery (traction battery) will discharge,
and this may result in the vehicle not being able to start.
205
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Turn signal lever
The lever will return to its original position immediately after operation.
Right turn
Lane change to the right (move
the lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3
times.
Lane change to the left (move the
lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
Left turn
■If the turn signals do not stop flashing after turning left or right, or if
you want to stop them flashing
Operate the lever in the opposite direction to either position or .
If you move the lever to either position or , the selected turn sig-
nals will flash.
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
2 3
1 4
206
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
■Turn signals can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
■If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.
■Customization
The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.
(Customizable feature P. 807)
207
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
Parking brake
Sets the parking brake
The parking brake indicator light will
come on. (P. 208)
Press and hold the parking brake
switch if an emergency occurs and it is
necessary to operate the parking
brake while driving.
Releases the parking brake
Operate the parking brake switch
while depressing the brake pedal.
Make sure that the parking brake indi-
cator light goes off.
A selections can be made as desired from the following modes.
Manual mode
U.S.A. Canada
1
2
208
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
The parking brake is set or released automatically according to shift lever
operation.
Turns automatic mode on/off
●When the shift lever is moved out
of P, the parking brake will be
released.
●When the shift lever is moved into
P, the parking brake will be set.
Operate the shift lever with the brake
pedal depressed.
■Parking brake operation
●When the power switch is not in ON mode, the parking brake cannot be released
using the parking brake switch.
●When the power switch is not in ON mode, automatic mode (automatic brake set-
ting and releasing) is not available.
●If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system
may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operat-
ing the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.
■Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■Parking brake indicator light
●Depending on the power switch mode, the parking brake indicator light will come
on and stay on as described below:
ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released.
Not in ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.
●When the power switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake
indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
Automatic mode
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
209
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
■When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning message will turn on or flash. (P. 713, 726)
Depending on the condition, the parking brake indicator light may flash.
■Usage in winter time
P. 320
NOTICE
■When parking the vehicle
Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P and
make sure that the vehicle does not move.
■When the system malfunctions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.
■When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction
Use the parking brake release tool to manually release the parking brake.
(P. 765)
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components over-
heating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
210
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-2. Driving procedures
Brake Hold
Turns the brake hold system on
The brake hold standby indicator
(green) comes on. While the system is
holding the brake, the brake hold
operated indicator (yellow) comes on.
■Brake hold system operating conditions
The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:
●The trunk or hood is not closed.
●The driver’s door is not closed.
●The driver is not wearing the seat belt.
If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled,
the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addi-
tion, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a
warning buzzer will sound and a message will be shown on the multi-information dis-
play. The parking brake will then be set automatically.
■Brake hold function
●If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system
has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this
case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information
display.
●To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the
brake pedal and press the button again.
●The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep
incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. The
multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation.
The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift lever is in
D, S or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to
stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator
pedal is depressed with the shift lever in D or S to allow smooth start off.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
211
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
■When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes
The parking brake will not be released automatically. Release the parking brake by
operating the parking brake switch, making sure that the parking brake indicator
light goes off. (P. 207)
■When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 713, 725)
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is on a steep incline
When using the brake hold system on a steep incline exercise caution. The brake
hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.
■When stopped on a slippery road
The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been
exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.
NOTICE
■When parking the vehicle
The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long
period of time. Turning the power switch off while the system is holding the brake
may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating
the power switch, depress the brake pedal, set the parking brake and shift the shift
lever to P.
213
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
Headlight switch
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
U.S.A. Canada
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate and instru-
ment panel lights turn on.
The headlights and all lights
listed above turn on.
The headlights, daytime
running lights and all the
lights listed above turn on
and off automatically.
(When the power switch is
in ON mode.)
Off
The daytime running lights
turn on.
1
2
3
4
214
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
With the headlights on, push the
lever away from you to turn on
the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high beams
once.
You can flash the high beams with the
headlights on or off.
Turning on the high beam headlights
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
215
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) secures excellent visibility at inter-
sections and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light
axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the
tire’s angle as controlled by steering input.
AFS operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■Deactivating AFS
Turn on the AFS OFF switch.
The indicator turns on when the
AFS is deactivated.
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) (if equipped)
216
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■Daytime running light system
●To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the parking lights turn on auto-
matically (at an increased intensity) whenever the hybrid system is started and the
parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
●Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers
greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel econ-
omy.
■Headlight control sensor
■Automatic light off system
When the light switch is in : The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after the power switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and a door is
opened and all of the doors and trunk are closed. (The lights turn off immediately if
on the key is pressed twice after all the doors are closed.)
To turn the lights on again, turn the power switch to ON mode, or turn the light
switch off once and then back to or .
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept open, the lights automatically turn off after 20
minutes.
■Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the power switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY
mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.
■Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of pas-
sengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not
interfere with other road users.
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-
shield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight system to malfunction.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
217
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
■If the “AFS OFF” indicator flashes
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■Customization
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
218
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Turns the front fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights on
■Fog lights can be used when
The headlights are on in low beam.
: If equipped
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving conditions,
such as in rain and fog.
1
2
219
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
Windshield wipers and washer
Operate the lever as follows to operate the wipers. The lever will return to
its original position immediately after operation.
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Move the lever up 2 levels
Move the lever up 1 level
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Move the lever down 1 level
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Move the lever down 2 lev-
els
AUTO mode on/off switch
With AUTO mode selected, the wip-
ers will operate automatically when
the sensor detects falling rain. The sys-
tem automatically adjusts wiper timing
in accordance with rain volume and
vehicle speed.
AUTO mode indicator will turn on
when AUTO mode is selected.
Operating the wiper lever
AUTO mode
indicator
1
2
3
4
5
220
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
*1: After temporary operation, the mode will return to AUTO mode.
*2: AUTO mode will be canceled.
When AUTO mode is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by
turning the switch ring.
Increases the sensitivity
Decreases the sensitivity
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer
squirts.
or or or
Off Temporar y
operation
Temporar y
operation
Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
Low speed
operation Off Off High speed
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation Off Low speed
operation No change No change
AUTO
mode
Intermittent
operation Off
Te mp or ar y
operation*1Low speed
operation*2High speed
operation*2
Continuously No change
Operation
Status
before
operation
6
7
8
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
221
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
The wipers can be used as intermittent windshield wipers, which operate
regardless of vehicle speed or amount of raindrops.
Press and hold until the AUTO
mode indicator stops flashing.
If is pressed and held until the
AUTO mode indicator stops flashing
again, it will return to its previous state.
The wiper can be switched when the
vehicle is stopped and the wiper is off.
■Operating the intermittent windshield wipers
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Move the lever up 2 lev-
els
Move the lever up 1 level
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Move the lever down 1
level
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Move the lever down 2
levels
Switching to the intermittent windshield wipers
1
2
3
4
222
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent operation is selected.
Increases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a
couple of times after the washer
squirts.
or or or
Off Temporar y
operation
Temp orary
operation
Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
Intermittent
operation Off Off Low speed
operation
High speed
operation
Low speed
operation Off Intermittent
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation
High speed
operation Off Low speed
operation No change No change
Status
before
operation
Operation
5
6
7
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
223
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
■The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■Dripping prevention wiper sweep
After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more time
after a short delay to prevent dripping.
However, the last sweep will not happen if the vehicle is traveling above 106 mph
(170 km/h).
■Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode.
●Intermittent wiper interval
●Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention wiper
sweep occurs)
With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be
switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
224
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■Raindrop sensor
●If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode while the power switch is in ON mode, the
wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated.
●If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F
(-30°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the
wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode.
■When the windshield wipers are in temporary operation
AUTO mode cannot be activated even if is pressed.
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the wind-
shield washer fluid reservoir.
●The raindrop sensor judges the amount of
raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not
operate properly when sunlight from the
rising or setting of the sun intermittently
strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are
present on the windshield.
CAUTION
■Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or
anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm.
The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
225
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
M
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
■When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
■When standing the windshield wipers up
Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (P. 322)
Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.
226
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight cleaner switch
Press the switch to clean the head-
lights.
■The headlight cleaners can be operated when
The power switch is in ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.
■Windshield washer linked operation
When the windshield washer is operated with the power switch in ON mode and the
headlights on, the headlight cleaners will operate once. (P. 219)
: If equipped
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
NOTICE
■When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
227
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
Opening the fuel tank cap
●Close all the doors and windows, and turn the power switch off.
●Confirm the type of fuel.
■Fuel types
Use premium unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 91 [Research Octane Number 96]
or higher)
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
228
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-4. Refueling
CAUTION
■When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury.
●After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted
metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static
electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can
cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressur-
ized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to
come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
●Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
●Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
●Do not top off the fuel tank.
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted
surface.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
229
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
With the doors unlocked, press
the center of the rear edge of the
fuel filler door.
Push until you hear a click and take
your hand away to slightly open the
fuel filler door. Then open the door
fully by hand.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
Opening the fuel tank cap
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
231
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
Close the fuel filler door, and
press the center of the rear edge
of the fuel filler door until you
hear a click.
When you lock the doors, the fuel filler
door will lock also.
■Fuel filler door lock condition
The fuel filler door may not be locked even when the vehicle’s doors are locked in the
following conditions:
●When operating the door lock button inside the vehicle
●When the automatic door locking system is operated (P. 810)
●When the fuel filler door is closed after the vehicle’s doors are locked
Closing the fuel tank cap
1
2
CAUTION
■When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious
injury.
232
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Cruise control
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
Press the “ON/OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come on.
Press the button again to deactivate
the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed, and
push the lever down to set the
speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set
speed.
: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
Setting the vehicle speed
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
233
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is
obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move
the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is oper-
ated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until
the lever is released.
Pulling the lever toward you can-
cels the constant speed control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes the
constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the vehi-
cle speed is more than approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
Adjusting the set speed
1
2
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
1
2
234
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Cruise control can be set when
●The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
●Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift.
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
●The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
●Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first
accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to
set the new speed.
■Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situa-
tions.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the
preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●VSC is activated.
●TRAC is activated for a period of time.
●When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
■If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-information dis-
play
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the but-
ton again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
235
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
CAUTION
■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in
death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●During emergency towing
236
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Dynamic radar cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in
order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance but-
ton
Display
Set speed
Indicators
Cruise control switch
: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
3
4
5
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
237
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Press the “ON/OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate
the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed, and
push the lever down to set the
speed.
“SET” indicator will be displayed.
The vehicle speed at the moment the
lever is released becomes the set
speed.
Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode)
1
2
238
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is
displayed.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily move
the lever in the desired direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
• When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds
the lever is held
• When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Fine adjustment: By approximately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the lever is
operated
Large adjustment: By approximately 3.1 mph (5 km/h) for each 0.75 seconds
the lever is held
In the constant speed control mode (P. 243), the set speed will be increased or
decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is oper-
ated
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until
the lever is released.
Adjusting the set speed
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
239
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Pressing the button changes the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance as fol-
lows:
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set
automatically to long mode when the
power switch is turned to ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the
preceding vehicle mark will also be
displayed.
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown cor-
respond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Preceding
vehicle mark
1
2
3
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
Medium Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
240
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Pulling the lever toward you can-
cels the cruise control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.
Pushing the lever up resumes the
cruise control and returns vehicle
speed to the set speed.
Resuming is available when the vehi-
cle speed is more than approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
Canceling and resuming the speed control
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
241
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to
approximately 400 ft. (120 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-
vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following
distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill
slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle
distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Example of deceleration cruising
When the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decel-
erates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the
system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot
decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle
ahead.
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
1
2
242
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Example of follow-up cruising
When following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed
of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the
driver.
Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any vehicles ahead driving slower than the
set speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to
constant speed cruising.
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient auto-
matic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will
flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver. An example of this
would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a
vehicle. Apply the brakes to ensure an appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance.
■Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, there is a possibility that the warnings will not
occur:
●When the speed of the vehicle ahead matches or exceeds your vehi-
cle speed
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely slow speed
●Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
●At the instant the accelerator is applied
Approach warning
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
243
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain
a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this
mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not func-
tion correctly due to dirt etc.
Press the “ON/OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to deactivate
the cruise control.
Switch to constant speed control
mode.
(Push the lever forward and hold
for approximately one second.)
Cruise control indicator will come on.
When in constant speed control
mode, to return to vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode, push the lever
forward again and hold for approxi-
mately 1 second.
After the desired speed has been set,
it is not possible to return to vehicle-
to-vehicle distance control mode.
If the power switch is turned off and
then turned to ON mode again, the
vehicle will automatically return to
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode.
Adjusting the speed setting: P. 233
Canceling and resuming the speed
setting: P. 233
Selecting conventional constant speed control mode
1
2
244
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Dynamic radar cruise control can be set when
●The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.
●Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift.
●Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.
However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may
decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.
■Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following
situations:
●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●VSC is activated.
●TRAC is activated for a period of time.
●When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
●The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.
●The windshield wipers are operating at high speed (when the wipers are in AUTO
mode or the high speed wiper operation).
●When snow mode is set.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
245
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Automatic cancelation of constant speed control
The cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in the following situations:
●Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set
vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
●VSC is activated.
●TRAC is activated for a period of time.
●When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off by pressing the VSC OFF switch.
■When the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) will be activated
Using the radar cruise control in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, lane
keeping assistance control is activated.
■Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice and plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
■Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to
inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. (P. 723)
Grille cover
Radar sensor
1
2
246
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
247
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
CAUTION
■Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropri-
ate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehi-
cles ahead by applying the brakes etc.
■Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control is only intended to help the driver in determin-
ing the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated
vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive
driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It
is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
●Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control determines whether the following distance
between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is
appropriate or not. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.
Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to deter-
mine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
●Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control has no capability to prevent or avoid a collision
with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any danger, the driver
must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in
order to ensure the safety of all involved.
248
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and
down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
●At entrances to expressways
●When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
●When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
●During emergency towing
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
249
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
CAUTION
■When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the
approach warning (P. 242) will not be activated, and a fatal or serious accident
may result.
●Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●Vehicles traveling at low speeds
●Vehicles that are not moving
●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and a fatal or serious accident may
result:
●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
●When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.)
●When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
●When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
●When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
250
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the cruise control system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
●Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
●Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
●Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
251
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
While driving on a freeway or motor highway that has lane markers and
no sharp curves, the system recognizes the lanes using a camera located
above the inside rear view mirror as a sensor to assist the driver with stay-
ing in the lane. The LKA system has two functions.
Camera sensor
: If equipped
Summary of functions
252
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lane departure warning function
If the system judges that the vehicle may deviate from its lane, it alerts
the driver using beeping, screen displays and a sensory warning* given
via the steering wheel.
*: A slight steering torque is applied for a short period of time in the direction of
the center of the lane.
Lane keeping assist function
• This function will be active when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode of the cruise control (P. 236) is set with vehicle speed
above approximately 45 mph (72 km/h) and while the lane depar-
ture warning function is active.
• When the lane keeping assist function is active, a slight steering
torque will be applied, to help the driver maintain the vehicle inside
the lane.
The lane keeping assist function will be temporarily canceled if the steering
wheel is not operated, or if you continue driving with your hands lightly touch-
ing the steering wheel. (P. 256)
Functions included in the LKA
1
2
254
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Lane departure warning function
●When the vehicle speed is approximately 30 mph (48 km/h) or
more
●When the lane width is more than approximately 9.1 ft. (2.8 m)
●When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of
more than approximately 394 ft. (120 m)
■Lane keeping assist function
●When the vehicle speed is between approximately 45 and 112 mph
(72 and 180 km/h)
●When the vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode of the radar cruise
control is on, and the set vehicle speed is approximately 45 mph (72
km/h) or more (the function will not operate when the radar cruise
control is in set speed mode)
●When the lane width is between approximately 9.1 and 13.1 ft.
(2.8 and 4.0 m)
●When driving on a straight road or through a curve with a radius of
more than approximately 755 ft. (230 m)
Operating conditions for each function
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
255
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
When the LKA system is on, the lane line display and steering wheel dis-
play are shown.
Lane keeping assist function
operation indication
Steering wheel displayed:
Indicates that the function is currently
operating. (If the lane departure warn-
ing operates at this time, the steering
wheel flashes orange.)
Steering wheel not displayed:
Indicates that the function is not cur-
rently operating. (When the lane
keeping assist function is canceled,
the buzzer will beep twice.)
Dynamic radar cruise control dis-
play
Lane departure warning function
indication (when the inside of the
white line is white):
The function has recognized lane
markers. (If the lane departure warn-
ing operates at this time, the lines flash
orange.)
Lane departure warning function
indication (when the inside of the
white line is black):
A lane marker is not recognized by
the system, or the LKA system func-
tions are temporarily canceled.
Indication on the multi-information display
1
2
3
4
256
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Temporary cancelation of the LKA system functions
If any of the following occurs, the LKA system functions will be temporarily canceled.
The functions will resume after the necessary operating conditions have returned.
●The steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to cause the vehicle to change
lanes.
●When the system detects no-handed driving. (The lane keeping assist function will
be temporarily canceled, but the lane departure warning function will continue.)
●The turn signal lever is operated.
●The vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LKA system functions.
(The buzzer will beep twice when the lane keeping assist function is being can-
celed.)
●When the lane lines cannot be recognized while driving. (The buzzer will beep
twice when the lane keeping assist function is being canceled.)
●The wiper switch is set on high speed mode or is set on AUTO mode with wipers
operating at high speed. (The lane keeping assist function will be temporarily can-
celed, but the lane departure warning function will continue.)
●If the vehicle crosses a line for approximately half a minute or more. (The lane keep-
ing assist function will be temporarily canceled, but the lane departure warning
function will continue.)
●When the lane departure warning function is activated.
The lane departure warning function will not operate again for a several seconds
after it has been activated, even if the vehicle leaves the lane again.
■The lane departure warning
It may be difficult to feel the sensory warning depending on the road conditions.
■No-handed driving warning
If the steering wheel is not operated for approximately 15 seconds on a straight road
or approximately 5 seconds on a curve, the buzzer will beep twice, indicators on the
multi-information display will flash, and the lane keeping assist function will be tem-
porarily canceled. If you drive the vehicle with your hands lightly touching the steer-
ing wheel, this may also be detected as no-handed driving.
■After the vehicle has been parked in the sun
The LKA system functions may not be available and a warning message (P. 735)
will be displayed for a while after driving has started. In such cases, turn the LKA sys-
tem off and turn it on again after normal temperature returns. When the temperature
in the cabin decreases and the temperature around the camera sensor (P. 251)
becomes suitable for its operation, the functions will begin to operate.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
257
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■If there are lane markers on only one side of the vehicle
The lane keeping assist function will not operate. Also, the lane departure warning
will not operate for the side on which lane markers could not be recognized.
■Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly
In the following conditions, the LKA system functions may not operate, or it may not
be possible to ensure adequate performance. Also, the camera sensor may be
unable to recognize lane lines causing the lane departure warning function to oper-
ate incorrectly, or the lane keeping assist function may not operate properly. How-
ever, this does not indicate a malfunction.
●When driving through an area with no lane markers, such as a tollbooth, a crossing
or before a ticket checkpoint
●When driving on a sharp curve
●When lanes are extremely narrow or extremely wide
●When the vehicle leans to one side an unusual amount due to a heavy load or
improper tire inflation pressure
●When the following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is
extremely short
●When the lane markers are yellow (These may be more difficult for the system to
recognize compared to white markers.)
●When the lane markers are broken, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or
stones
●When lane markers are obscured or partially obscured by sand, dirt, etc.
●When there are shadows on the road running parallel with lane markers, or if a
shadow covers the lane markers
●When driving on a particularly bright road surface, such as concrete
●When driving on a road surface that is bright due to reflected light
●When driving in a location where the light level changes rapidly, such as the
entrance to or exit from a tunnel
●When sunlight or the headlights of oncoming vehicles are shining directly into the
camera lens
●When driving on roads that are branching or merging
●When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, previous rainfall, standing
water, etc.
●When the vehicle experiences strong up-and-down motion such as when driving
on an extremely rough road or on a seam in the pavement
●When headlight brightness at nighttime is reduced due to dirt on the lenses, or
when the headlights are misaligned
●When driving with a strong crosswind
258
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
●When driving on winding roads or roads that are uneven
●When driving on rough or unpaved roads
■When changing the tires
Depending on the tires used, sufficient performance may not be maintainable.
■Warning messages for LKA
Warning messages are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver
of the need for caution while driving. (P. 724, 735)
CAUTION
■Before using the LKA system
Do not rely solely on the LKA system. The LKA system does not drive the vehicle
automatically, nor does it reduce the amount of care you need to take. As such, the
driver must always assume full responsibility for understanding his/her surround-
ings, for operating the steering wheel to correct the driving line, and for driving
safely.
Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an accident.
■To avoid operating the LKA by mistake
Switch the LKA off using the “LKA” switch when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for LKA
Do not use LKA in any of the following situations.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
●When driving with snow tires, tire chains, a spare tire, or similar equipment
●When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is
low.
●When there are objects or structures along the roadside that might be misinter-
preted as lane markers (such as guardrails, curb, reflector posts, etc.)
●When driving on snowy roads
●When pavement lane markers are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, etc.
●When there are visible lines on the pavement from road repairs, or if the remains
of old lane markers are still visible on the road
●When driving on slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●When driving in a lane other than the driving or passing lanes on a freeway or
highway
●When driving on a road with lane closures due to maintenance, or when driving
in a temporary lane
●When emergency towing
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
259
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to or incorrect operation of the LKA system
●Do not modify the headlights or attach stickers to the surface of the lights.
●Do not modify the suspension or sun visor, or replace them with non-genuine
parts.
●Do not install or place anything on the hood or the grille. Also, do not install a
grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.).
●Do not modify the sun visor or replace it with anything other than a genuine
Lexus product.
●If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■Camera sensor (P. 251)
Observe the following to ensure that the LKA system functions correctly.
●Keep the windshield clean at all times.
Performance could be affected if the windshield is dirty, or if raindrops, conden-
sation or ice are adhering to the windshield.
●When adjusting the rear view mirror, make sure that it does not block the camera
lens.
●Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
●Do not install an antenna in front of the camera lens.
●If the windshield is fogged up, use the windshield defogger to remove fog from
the windshield.
When it is cold, using the heater with air blowing to the feet may allow the upper
part of the windshield to fog up. This will have a negative effect on the images.
●Do not attach a sticker or other items to the
windshield near the camera sensor.
●Do not install or place anything near the
camera.
260
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
●Do not place anything on the dashboard.
The camera sensor may recognize the image reflected on the windshield as lane
markers by mistake.
●Do not scratch the camera lens, or let it get dirty.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, be careful not to get any glass
cleaner etc. on the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
For lens repair, contact your Lexus dealer.
●Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or
remove it. The direction of the camera sensor is precisely adjusted.
●Do not subject the camera sensor to strong impact or force, and do not disas-
semble the camera sensor.
261
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Intuitive parking assist
■Types of sensors
: If equipped
The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel park-
ing or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and com-
municated via the multi-information display, Remote Touch screen and
a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.
Front center sensors
Front corner sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
263
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multi-
information display and Remote Touch screen depending on the position
and distance to the obstacle.
■Multi-information display
Front corner sensor detection
Front center sensor detection
Rear corner sensor detection
Rear center sensor detection
Display
1
2
3
4
264
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Remote Touch screen
For 8-inch display
When the rear view monitor
system is not displayed
A graphic is automatically dis-
played when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set so
that the graphic is not displayed.
(P. 269)
When the rear view monitor
system is displayed (insert dis-
play)
A simplified image is displayed on
the right upper corner of the
Remote Touch screen when an
obstacle is detected.
For 12.3-inch display
A graphic will be shown on the
side display
A graphic is automatically dis-
played when an obstacle is
detected. The screen can be set so
that the graphic is not displayed.
(P. 269)
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
265
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Front center sensor
Sensor detection display, obstacle distance
Approximate
distance to obstacle
Multi-
information
display
Remote Touch screen
8-inch
display
8-inch
display
(insert
display)
12.3-inch
display
3.3 ft. (100 cm) to
1.6 ft. (50 cm)
(continuous) (continuous) (blinking
slowly)
(continuous)
1.6 ft. (50 cm) to
1.2 ft. (37.5 cm)
(continuous) (continuous) (blinking) (continuous)
1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) to
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
(continuous) (continuous) (blinking
rapidly)
(continuous)
Less than
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
(blinking) (continuous) (continuous) (continuous)
266
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Corner sensors
Approximate
distance to obstacle
Multi-
information
display
Remote Touch screen
8-inch
display
8-inch
display
(insert
display)
12.3-inch
display
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm)
(continuous) (continuous) (blinking) (continuous)
1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
(continuous) (continuous) (blinking
rapidly)
(continuous)
Less than
1.0 ft. (30 cm)
(blinking) (continuous) (continuous) (continuous)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
267
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Rear center sensor
Approximate distance
to obstacle
Multi-information
display
Remote Touch screen
8-inch display
(insert display) 12.3-inch display
4.9 ft. (150 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm)
(continuous) (blinking slowly) (continuous)
2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm)
(continuous) (blinking) (continuous)
1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(continuous) (blinking rapidly) (continuous)
Less than
1.1 ft. (35 cm)
(blinking) (continuous) (continuous)
268
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
●The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obsta-
cle, the buzzer sounds continuously:
• Front center sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
• Corner sensors: Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)
●When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer
system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within
the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast
beeps.
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect obstacles that
are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object
etc.
Detection range of the sensors
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
269
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
You can change the warning beep volume and Remote Touch screen
operating conditions.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (P. 328)
Select “SETUP” on the “Menu” screen.
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Select “Lexus Park Assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
Alert volume setting
Display on/off
Alert distance setting
Make sure to save after changing
settings.
Setting up intuitive parking assist
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
270
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Alert volume setting
The alert volume can be adjusted.
Select “1” to “5” on the “LEXUS Park Assist Settings”.
Select “Save”.
■Display on/off setting
On or off can be selected for intuitive parking assist display.
Select “Display Off”.
When the “Display Off” indicator is turned on, the display of intuitive parking
assist will be off. Select “Display Off” again to turn the display of intuitive park-
ing assist on.
Select “Save”.
■Alert distance setting
Front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be set.
Select “Front” or “Rear”.
Long distance or short distance can be selected.
Select “Save”.
■The intuitive parking assist can be operated when
●Front center sensors:
• The power switch is in ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P or R.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
●Front corner sensors:
• The power switch is in ON mode.
• The shift lever is in a position other than P.
• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
●Rear corner and rear center sensors:
• The power switch is in ON mode.
• The shift lever is in R.
1
2
1
2
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
271
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Intuitive parking assist display
When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system, is in use, the warn-
ing indicator will appear in the top right of the screen even if the display setting has
been set to off.
■Sensor detection information
●The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front cor-
ner and rear bumpers.
●Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability
of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this may
occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this
problem.)
• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnor-
mal display, or obstacles may not be detected.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.
• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.
• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shape, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they
are.
272
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
●The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
•Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
●The following situations may occur during use.
• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection dis-
tance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.
• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow
speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor’s
detection areas before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.
• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected for collision
when approached, even if they have been detected once.
• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow
noise of air conditioning system.
■If a message is displayed on the multi-information display
P. 723, 73 4
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
273
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
CAUTION
■When using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possi-
bly cause an accident.
●Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
●The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving for-
ward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides
of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s
speed.
●Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.
NOTICE
■When using intuitive parking assist-sensor
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor
malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
●The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sounds when no
obstacles are detected.
●If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong
impact.
●If the bumper collides with something.
●If the display shows continuously without a beep.
●If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that
the sensor is malfunctioning.
■Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
274
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Rear view monitor system
Rear view monitor system will acti-
vate when the shift lever is in R.
If you move the lever out of R, the rear
view monitor system will be deacti-
vated.
When the shift lever is shifted to the R
position and any mode button (such as
“MENU”) is pressed, the rear view
monitor system is canceled, and the
screen is switched to the mode of the
button that was pressed.
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image
of the view behind the vehicle and fixation guide lines while backing up,
for example while parking.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and
may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the screen.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
275
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Screen description
The rear view monitor system screen will be displayed if the shift lever is
shifted to R while the power switch is in ON mode.
Vehicle width extension guide line
The line indicates a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up.
The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.
Vehicle center guide lines
These lines indicate the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
Distance guide line
The line shows points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the center of the
edge of the bumper.
Distance guide line
The line shows distance behind the vehicle, a point approximately 3 ft. (1 m)
(blue) from the edge of the bumper.
Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped)
If an obstacle is detected while the Intuitive parking assist-sensor is on, a dis-
play is shown in the top right corner of the screen.
Using the rear view monitor system
1
2
3
4
5
276
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Area displayed on screen
The rear view monitor system dis-
plays an image of the view from
the bumper of the rear area of the
vehicle.
To adjust the image on the rear
view monitor system screen.
(P. 332)
• The area displayed on the screen
may vary according to vehicle ori-
entation conditions.
• Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper cannot be displayed.
• The camera uses a special lens. The
distance of the image that appears
on the screen differs from the
actual distance.
• Items which are located higher
than the camera may not be dis-
played on the monitor.
Rear view monitor system precautions
Corners of bumper
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
277
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Rear view monitor system camera
The camera for the rear view
monitor system is located above
the license plate.
●Using the camera
If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. If
water droplets, snow or mud adhere to the lens, rinse with water and
wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild
cleanser and rinse.
■Differences between the screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width extension guide lines
may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space,
even when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distances between the vehicle width extension guide lines and the
left and right dividing lines of the parking space may not be equal, even
when they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually.
The distance guide lines give a distance guide for flat road surfaces. In
any of the following situations, there is a margin of error between the
fixation guide lines on the screen and the actual distance/course on the
road.
278
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
●When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be closer to the vehicle
than the actual distance. Because
of this, objects will appear to be
farther away than they actually
are. In the same way, there will be
a margin of error between the
guidelines and the actual dis-
tance/course on the road.
●When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply
The distance guide lines will
appear to be further from the
vehicle than the actual distance.
Because of this, objects will
appear to be closer than they
actually are. In the same way,
there will be a margin of error
between the guidelines and the
actual distance/course on the
road.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
279
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
●When any part of the vehicle sags
When any part of the vehicle sags
due to the number of passengers
or the distribution of the load,
there is a margin of error
between the fixation guide lines
on the screen and the actual dis-
tance/course on the road.
■When approaching three-dimensional objects
The distance guide lines are displayed according to flat surfaced
objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of
three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the distance guide
lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends out-
ward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.
●Distance guidelines
Visually check the surroundings
and the area behind the vehicle.
On the screen, it appears that a
truck is parking at point .
However, in reality if you back up
to point , you will hit the truck.
On the screen, it appears that
is closest and is furthest away.
However, in reality, the distance
to and is the same, and
is farther than and .
A margin of error
2
1
1
3
1 3 2
1 3
280
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Vehicle width extension guide lines
Visually check the surroundings and
the area behind the vehicle. In the
case shown below, the truck appears
to be outside of the vehicle width
extension guide lines and the vehicle
does not look as if it hits the truck.
However, the rear body of the truck
may actually cross over the vehicle
width extension guide lines. In reality if
you back up as guided by the vehicle
width extension guide lines, the vehi-
cle may hit the truck.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
281
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and
the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Things you should know
Symptom Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to
see
• The vehicle is in a dark
area
•The temperature
around the lens is
either high or low
• The outside tempera-
ture is low
•There are water drop-
lets on the camera
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud
etc.) is adhering to the
camera
• There are scratches on
the camera
•Sunlight or headlights
are shining directly into
the camera
• The vehicle is under flu-
orescent lights, sodium
lights, mercury lights
etc.
If this happens due to
these causes, it does not
indicate a malfunction.
Back up while visually
checking the vehicle’s
surroundings. (Use the
monitor again once con-
ditions have been
improved.)
To adjust the image on
the rear view monitor sys-
tem screen. (P. 332)
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter
(such as water droplets,
snow, mud etc.) is adher-
ing to the camera.
Rinse the camera lens
with water and wipe it
clean with a soft cloth.
Wash with a mild soap if
the dirt is stubborn.
282
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The image is out of align-
ment
The camera or surround-
ing area has received a
strong impact.
Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
The fixation guide lines
are very far out of align-
ment
The camera position is
out of alignment.
Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
Symptom Likely cause Solution
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
283
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
CAUTION
■When using the rear view monitor system
When backing up, be sure to check visually behind and all around the vehicle
before proceeding.
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death
or serious injuries.
●The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist the
driver when backing up. Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely
when backing up. Always make sure your intended path is clear.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
●Never back up while looking only at the screen.
The image shown on the screen may differ from the actual state, and you could
collide with another vehicle or obstacles if backing up looking only at the screen,
possibly causing an accident. When backing up, be sure to check in front of and
behind the vehicle, both directly and with mirrors.
●Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
●The instructions given are only guidelines.
When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traffic con-
ditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when parking. It is neces-
sary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view monitor system.
●When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate your
vehicle before maneuvering into it.
●Do not use system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or the compact spare tire
• When the trunk lid is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
●In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become faint. The
image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may become unable to
see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct visually and with mirror all
around the vehicle before proceeding.
●If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixation guide lines displayed on
the screen may change.
●The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians
that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ from the actual dis-
tances. (P. 277)
284
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■When using the rear view monitor system screen
●The position of the fixation guide lines displayed on the screen may change in
accordance with the number of passengers, the amount of cargo etc. Be sure to
check behind and all around the vehicle direct visually and with mirror before
proceeding.
●The vehicle width extension guide lines are wider than the actual width of the
vehicle. When backing up, be sure to check behind and all around the vehicle
direct visually and with mirror before proceeding.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
285
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
NOTICE
■How to use the camera
●The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases, or
if the precautions described below are not followed.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera
may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
• Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it cannot
transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere
to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the
vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the cam-
era or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.
• When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mercury
light etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.
●Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If
this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
286
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving mode select switch
Normal mode
For normal driving.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when selected to
Eco drive mode or sport mode.
Eco drive mode
Use Eco drive mode to help achieve low fuel consumption during trips
that involve frequent accelerating.
When not in Eco drive mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the
left, the “ECO MODE” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.
The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
287
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Sport mode
• SPORT S mode
Assists acceleration response by controlling the hybrid system. Suit-
able for when precise handling is desirable, for example when driv-
ing on mountain roads.
When not in SPORT S mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to
the right, the “SPORT S” indicator comes on in the multi-information display,
and the Hybrid System Indicator changes to the tachometer. (P. 89)
Also, on vehicles equipped with a
12.3-inch display, the driving mode
is also automatically displayed on
the “Side Display”. (P. 330)
• SPORT S+ mode
Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simul-
taneously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the
hybrid system. Suitable for sporty driving.
When in SPORT S mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the
right, the “SPORT S+” indicator comes on in the multi-information display, and
the Hybrid System Indicator changes to the tachometer. (P. 89)
Also, on vehicles equipped with a
12.3-inch display, the driving mode
is also automatically displayed on
the “Side Display”. (P. 330)
3
288
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air
conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency (P. 364). To improve air condition-
ing performance, adjust the fan speed or turn off Eco drive mode.
■Automatic operation of the seat heater during Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating operation and fan speed of the air conditioning
system to enhance fuel efficiency. If the driving mode select switch is switched to Eco
drive mode in cold temperatures, the seat heater will be automatically operated to
assist heating performance.
■Sport mode automatic deactivation
Sport mode is automatically deactivated if the power switch is turned off after driving
in sport mode.
289
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Driving assist systems
◆ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
◆Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
◆VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces
◆TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spin-
ning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
◆EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to
turn the steering wheel
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be
aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not
be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
290
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
◆AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension system)
By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers
for each of the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions,
this system helps riding comfort with superior steering stability, and
helps good vehicle posture (P. 286)
◆VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC and
EPS
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road sur-
faces by controlling the brakes, hybrid system output, steering assist,
and steering ratio
◆PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 296
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
291
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
The slip indicator light will flash
while the TRAC/VSC/ABS sys-
tems are operating.
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRAC/VSC systems
may reduce power from the hybrid system to the wheels. You may need to
turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■Turning off the TRAC system only
To turn the TRAC system off,
quickly press and release the but-
ton.
The “TRAC OFF” will be shown on
the multi-information display. Press
the button again to turn the system
back on.
When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating
Disabling the TRAC/VSC systems
292
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Turning off both TRAC/VSC systems
To turn the TRAC/VSC systems
off, press and hold the button for
3 seconds and more while the
vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will
come on and the “TRAC OFF” will
be shown on the multi-information
display.
Press the button again to turn the
systems back on.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
293
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that
TRAC has been disabled even if the VSC OFF switch has not been pressed
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is
depressed repeatedly, when the hybrid system is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in
any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating.
None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
■EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
■Reactivation of the TRAC/VSC systems
Even after the TRAC/VSC systems have been turned off, turning the hybrid system
off and then on again will automatically reactivate the TRAC/VSC systems.
■Reactivation of the TRAC system linked to vehicle speed
When only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when vehi-
cle speed increases. However, when both TRAC/VSC systems are turned off, the
systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheat-
ing when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steer-
ing wheel may feel heavy as a result.* Should this occur, refrain from excessive
steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid system off. The effectiveness
will improve after a short while.
*: If the LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system cannot operate in this case, a warning
message will be shown on the multi-information display.
294
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn tires on
a snow covered road).
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal condi-
tions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always main-
tain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations:
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery
road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause
an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As
these are the systems to help vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the
TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
295
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
CAUTION
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are
installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the
driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
296
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
◆Pre-collision seat belts (front seat only)
If the pre-collision sensor detects that a collision is unavoidable, the
pre-collision system will retract the seat belt before the collision occurs.
The same will happen if the driver makes an emergency braking or
loses control of the vehicle. (P. 34)
◆Pre-collision brake assist
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system applies
greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
◆Pre-collision braking
When there is a high possibility of a frontal collision, the system warns
the driver using a warning light, warning display and buzzer. If the sys-
tem determines that a collision is unavoidable, the brakes are automati-
cally applied to reduce the collision speed.
: If equipped
When the radar sensor detects that a frontal collision is highly likely or
even unavoidable, safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are
automatically engaged to lessen impact as well as vehicle damage.
The pre-collision system can be turned on and off as necessary by oper-
ating the switch. (P. 297)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
297
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
◆Suspension control
When the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the opera-
tion of AVS (P. 290) optimally controls the damping force of the
shock absorber.
◆Driver monitor system (if equipped)
When the system determines that there is a possibility of a collision, and
either the driver is not facing forward or the driver’s eyes are closed,
PCS warnings are given in advance to warn the driver. If the system
determines that the conditions to operate pre-collision alert braking
have been met even when the possibility of a collision increases further,
pre-collision alert braking will operate.
Enabled
Disabled
The “PCS” warning light comes on
when pre-collision system is disabled.
Disabling pre-collision system
1
2
298
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The radar sensor detects vehicles or
other obstacles on or near the road
ahead and determines whether a
collision is imminent based on the
position, speed, and heading of the
obstacles.
The driver monitor sensor detects
the direction the driver is facing and
whether the driver’s eyes are open
or closed.
The system determines whether the
driver is facing forward and whether
or not the driver’s eyes are closed.
Radar sensor
Driver monitor sensor (if equipped)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
299
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■The pre-collision system is operational when
The pre-collision system off button is not pressed and the following conditions are
met:
●Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehi-
cle is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
●Pre-collision seat belts (operating conditions A):
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Pre-collision seat belts (operating conditions B):
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehi-
cle is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle run-
ning ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
●Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle run-
ning ahead of you is greater than about 10 mph (15 km/h).
●Suspension control:
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 4 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle run-
ning ahead of you is greater than about 19 mph (30 km/h).
●Pre-collision alert braking:
• The system determines that the driver is not facing forward, or that the driver’s
eyes are closed.
• Vehicle speed is greater than about 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the vehicle running ahead of
you is greater than about 25 mph (40 km/h).
• The steering is not being turned.
300
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of a collision
●When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
●When driving over a narrow iron bridge
●When there is a metal object on the road surface
●When driving on an uneven road surface
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
●When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
●When a grade separation/interchange, sign, billboard, or other structure appears
to be directly in the vehicle’s line of travel
●When climbing a steep hill causes an overhead billboard or other metallic structure
to appear directly in the vehicle’s line of travel
When the system is activated in the situations described above, there is also a possi-
bility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten it.
■Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as traffic cones. There may also be
occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcy-
cles, trees, or snowdrifts.
■Situations in which the pre-collision system does not function properly
The system may not function effectively in situations such as the following:
●On roads with sharp bends or uneven surfaces
●If a vehicle suddenly moves in front of your vehicle, such as at an intersection
●If a vehicle suddenly cuts in front of your vehicle, such as when overtaking
●In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
●When your vehicle is skidding such as the VSC system off
●When your vehicle is steeply inclined
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
301
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■Automatic cancelation of the pre-collision system
When a malfunction occurs due to sensor contamination, etc. that results in the sen-
sors being unable to detect obstacles, the pre-collision system will be automatically
disabled. In this case, the system will not activate even if there is a collision possibility.
■When there is a malfunction in the system
“PCS” warning light will flash and warning messages will be displayed.
(P. 713, 723)
■Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQDNMWR004
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator (antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
302
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not overly rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
Otherwise, the system may not function correctly and could result in an accident.
●Keep the sensor and grille cover clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and grille cover with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding
area.
●Do not modify or paint the sensor and grille cover.
●Do not replace them with non-genuine parts.
■Determining the direction the driver is facing and whether the driver’s eyes are
open or closed
The direction the driver is facing and whether the driver’s eyes are open or closed
may not be determined correctly if the following conditions exist:
●There is an object between the driver monitor sensor and the driver’s face, such
as when the sensor is blocked.
●A part of the driver’s face is covered.
●The sensor or the driver’s face is exposed to intense light such as sunlight.
●The driving posture is improper.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
303
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
CAUTION
■Handling the driver monitor sensor
Observe the following to ensure the driver monitor sensor can function effectively.
Failure to do so may result in a malfunction or may prevent the system from cor-
rectly determining the direction the driver is facing, resulting in an unexpected
accident.
●Do not disassemble, damage, lift or pull on the sensor.
●Do not select the sensor while driving.
●Do not wet or spill water on the sensor.
●Do not drop anything on or allow anything to hit against the sensor. Do not sub-
ject the sensor to an impact.
●Make sure that there are no scratches, dirt or stickers on the side of the sensor
that faces the driver.
●Do not place any objects in front of the side of the sensor that faces the driver or
cover the sensor.
304
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■Cautions regarding the assist contents of the system
By means of alarms and brake control, the pre-collision system is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding collisions through the process of LOOK-JUDGE-ACT.
There are limits to the degree of assistance the system can provide, so please keep
in mind the following important points.
●Assisting the driver in watching the road
The pre-collision system is only able to detect obstacles directly in front of the
vehicle, and only within a limited range. It is not a mechanism that allows careless
or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibil-
ity conditions. It is still necessary for the driver to pay close attention to the vehi-
cle’s surroundings.
●Assisting the driver in making correct judgment
When attempting to estimate the likelihood of a collision, the only data available
to the pre-collision system is that from obstacles it has detected directly in front of
the vehicle. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant
and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of collision in any given situ-
ation.
●Assisting the driver in taking action
The pre-collision system’s braking assist feature is designed to help reduce the
severity of a collision, and so only acts when the system has judged that a collision
is unavoidable. This system by itself is not capable of automatically avoiding a col-
lision or bringing the vehicle to a stop safely. For this reason, when encountering a
dangerous situation the driver must take direct and immediate action in order to
ensure the safety of all involved.
NOTICE
■Precautions for cleaning the driver monitor sensor
●Gently wipe the sensor with a soft cloth to prevent damage.
●Wipe any excess dirt with a cloth dampened with neutral detergent, all liquids
having been wringed out of the cloth. After that, wipe again with a dry cloth.
●Do not use benzene, thinner, glass cleaners, wax, etc.
305
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
: If equipped
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that assists the driver to confirm
safety when changing lanes.
The system uses radar sensors to detect vehicles that are traveling in an
adjacent lane in the area that is not reflected in the outside rear view
mirror (the blind spot), and advises the driver of the vehicle’s existence
via the outside rear view mirror indicator.
BSM main switch
Pressing the switch turns the system on or off. When the switch is set to on, the
switch’s indicator illuminates.
Outside rear view mirror indicator
When a vehicle is detected in the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indica-
tor on that side illuminates. If the turn signal lever is operated when a vehicle is in
the blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes.
1
2
306
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The blind spot that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of the detection area
extends to:
Approximately 11.5 ft. (3.5 m)
from the side of the vehicle
The first 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of
the vehicle is not in the detection area
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from
the rear bumper
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) for-
ward of the rear bumper
The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
307
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■The Blind Spot Monitor system is operational when
The BSM main switch is set to on and vehicle speed is greater than approximately
25 mph (40 km/h).
■The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle when
●A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
●Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
■Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor system is not designed to detect the following types of vehi-
cles and/or objects:
●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians etc.*
●Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*
●Following vehicles that are in the same lane*
●Vehicles driving 2 lanes across from your vehicle*
*: Depending on conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
308
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■Conditions under which the Blind Spot Monitor system may not function correctly
●The Blind Spot Monitor system may not detect vehicles correctly in the following
conditions:
• During bad weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow etc.
• When ice or mud etc. is attached to the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet due to rain, standing water etc.
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
• When a vehicle is in the detection area from a stop and remains in the detection
area as your vehicle accelerates
• When driving up or down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, a dip in the
road etc.
• When multiple vehicles approach with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When vehicle lanes are wide, and the vehicle in the next lane is too far away
from your vehicle
• When the vehicle that enters the detection area is traveling at about the same
speed as your vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the
vehicle that enters the detection area
• Directly after the BSM switch is set to on
●Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object
may increase under the following conditions:
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall
etc.
• When there is only a short distance between your vehicle and a following vehi-
cle
• When vehicle lanes are narrow and a vehicle driving 2 lanes across from your
vehicle enters the detection area
■The outside rear view mirror indicators visibility
When under strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to
see.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
309
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■When there is a malfunction in the system
If a system malfunction is detected due to any of the following reasons, warning mes-
sages will be displayed: (P. 727)
●There is a malfunction with the sensors
●The sensors have become dirty
●The outside temperature is extremely high or low
●The sensor voltage has become abnormal
■Certification for the BSM
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: OAYBSDTX
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing three conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
(3) This device may only work when the vehicle is in operation pursuant to § 15.252
(a) (4).
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
IC: 4135A-BSDTX
This device complies with the radio standards specification RSS-220 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
During printing time of this user manual the approvals listed below are granted. Fur-
ther countries may become available or actual certification identifiers may be sub-
ject to change or update.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
310
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to
observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary system which alerts the driver that a
vehicle is present in the blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor
system. The system cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, therefore over reli-
ance could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. According to
conditions, the system may not function correctly. Therefore the driver’s own visual
confirmation of safety is necessary.
■Handling the radar sensor
One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehi-
cle rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot
Monitor system can function correctly.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and
vehicles that enter the detection area may not be detected. If the sensor or sur-
rounding area is subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the
bumper.
●Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
●Do not paint the sensor or surrounding area on the bumper.
●Keep the sensor and its surrounding area
on the bumper clean at all times.
311
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
Lexus night view
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
Turn the headlights on.
Press the Lexus night view switch.
The Lexus night view is displayed on
the Remote Touch screen.
To return the screen to its previous
state, press the switch again.
When the light sensor (P. 216)
determines that it is currently night
time from the brightness of the sur-
rounding area, the Lexus night view
can be operated by pressing the
Lexus night view switch while the
headlights are on.
: If equipped
Lexus night view is a system which assists with nighttime driving.
Near-infrared rays are irradiated forward and an image converted
from the irradiated light is shown on the Remote Touch screen. The
image shows pedestrians, obstacles, and road conditions ahead of the
vehicle, which are difficult to see at nighttime with the naked eye.
Displaying the Lexus night view
1
2
3
312
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■When displaying on the “Main Display” (P. 33 0 )
Lexus night view screen
“Side Display” switching button
If this button is selected using the Remote Touch when the Lexus night view is
being shown on the “Main Display”, the “Side Display” will change to a map dis-
play. (P. 328)
If the button is selected again, the screen will return to its previous display.
Brightness adjustment button
The brightness of the display can be
adjusted by selecting this button using
Remote Touch.
Make sure to select the “OK” after
adjusting the brightness.
“-”: Darker
“+”: Brighter
The Lexus night view display
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
313
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
■When displaying on the “Side Display”
When another screen is displayed on
the “Main Display” while the Lexus
night view is being shown on the
“Main Display”, the Lexus night view
screen will be displayed on the “Side
Display”.
Lexus night view screen
“Main Display” switching but-
ton
Switches the Lexus night view from
the “Side Display” to the “Main Dis-
play”.
■Imaging range
The image is shown ranging from the tip of the low beam to the high beam.
■If the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) when the Lexus
night view is operating
An image will be displayed on the Lexus night view screen, but both the range and
the distance of the projection will be limited as near-infrared rays are not being radi-
ated outward.
■When the Lexus night view switch is pressed while the Lexus night view cannot be
operated
Advice information will be displayed on the Lexus night view screen. Follow the dis-
played advice.
■If the Lexus night view switch is pressed at a time when the Lexus night view opera-
tion is not possible
Follow the advice displayed on the Remote Touch screen.
■When the shift lever is shifted to R while the Lexus night view is operating
The Lexus night view screen switches as follows.
“Main Display”: Switches to the rear view monitor system screen.
“Side Display”: The display blacks out and no image is displayed.
1
2
314
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
CAUTION
■Before using the Lexus night view
Never depend on this system only.
Lexus night view is intended as a supplemental aid to help you see pedestrians and
road conditions ahead of the vehicle. As there are limits to the system, do not rely
solely on the system while in use, and drive safely while observing the following
precautions.
■When using the Lexus night view
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
●Never drive while looking at the Lexus night view screen only.
●Do not look continuously at the Lexus night view screen while driving. Pedestri-
ans, objects etc. ahead of the vehicle may be overlooked by the system. The sys-
tem should always be used as a supplemental aid only.
●Lexus night view is designed to help you see objects better when driving in dark-
ness on a road with few curves. Do not use the Lexus night view in well-lit areas or
on roads with many curves or slopes. There may be areas that cannot be dis-
played by the system due to the road conditions (curve size, gradient, etc.)
●Lexus night view may be unable to project some features at an appropriate level
of brightness. Some or all parts of certain features may be dark or difficult to see.
Do not rely solely on the Lexus night view, and drive carefully while checking the
surroundings for safety, as you would with a normal vehicle. Also, the following
features and conditions may not be displayed clearly.
Features that are difficult to display:
• Clothing of a pedestrian made of a certain kind of material (ex. leather jackets)
• The characters on signs and billboards
• The information on road signs
Conditions in which display is difficult:
• Unfavorable weather conditions such as rain, fog, snowfall, snow storms etc.
• There are large puddles of water on the road surface following rainfall
• The area of the front windshield in front of the camera is fogged up, dirty or icy
• The areas around the headlights are covered with ice, snow, mud etc.
• The 12-volt battery voltage is remarkably low
• There are bright lights ahead of the vehicle
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
315
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
NOTICE
■The near-infrared camera
●Make sure the front windshield is kept clean.
●System performance may deteriorate if rain water, condensation or ice adheres
to the camera. If you notice the inner lens of the camera is dirty, the garnish will
have to be replaced. Consult your Lexus dealer.
●Do not subject the camera to strong impacts, or disassemble the camera.
●As the alignment of the camera has been very finely adjusted, do not change or
remove the mounting.
●If the front windshield fogs up, defog the windshield using the front defroster.
●Do not dirty or scratch the camera lens.
●Night view may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or any-
thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.
Follow these precautions to avoid damage to
or incorrect operation of the Lexus night
view.
316
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
■The near-infrared light
Follow these precautions to avoid damage to
or incorrect operation of the Lexus night
view system
●System performance may deteriorate if the
areas around the headlights are dirty. Clean
the vehicle if it is dirty.
●The near-infrared light irradiates strong
energy not visible to the eyes. Do not stare
at the light at close range for a long time.
Vehicles with discharge head-
lights
Vehicles with LED headlights
317
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
Hybrid vehicle driving tips
■Using Eco drive mode
When using Eco drive mode, the torque corresponding to the acceler-
ator pedal depression amount can be generated more smoothly than it
is in normal conditions. In addition, the operation of the air conditioning
system (heating/cooling) will be minimized, improving the fuel econ-
omy. (P. 286)
■Use of Hybrid System Indicator
The Eco-friendly driving is possible by keeping the indicate of Hybrid
System Indicator within Eco area. (P. 92)
■When braking the vehicle
Make sure to operate the brakes gently and in good time. A greater
amount of electrical energy can be retained when slowing down.
■Delays
Repeated acceleration and deceleration, as well as long waits at traffic
lights, will lead to bad fuel consumption. Check traffic reports before
leaving and avoid delays as much as possible. When encountering a
delay, gently release the brake pedal to allow the vehicle to move for-
ward slightly while avoiding overuse of the accelerator pedal. Doing so
can help control excessive gasoline consumption.
■Highway driving
Control your speed and keep at a constant speed. Also, before stop-
ping at a toll booth or similar, allow plenty of time to release the acceler-
ator and gently apply the brakes. A greater amount of electrical energy
can be retained when slowing down.
For economical and ecological driving, pay attention to the following
points:
318
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-6. Driving tips
■Air conditioning
Use the air conditioning only when necessary. Doing so can help con-
trol excessive gasoline consumption.
In summer: In high temperatures, use the recirculated air mode. Doing
so will help to reduce the burden on the air conditioner and reduce fuel
consumption as well.
In winter: Because the gasoline engine will not automatically cut out
until the gasoline engine and the interior of the vehicle are warm, it will
consume fuel. Also, fuel consumption can be improved by avoiding
overuse of the heater.
■Checking tire inflation pressure
Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure frequently. Improper tire
inflation pressure can cause poor fuel consumption.
Also, as snow tires can cause large amounts of friction, their use on dry
roads can lead to poor fuel consumption. Use a tire that is appropriate
for the season.
■Luggage
Carrying heavy luggage can lead to poor fuel consumption. Avoid car-
rying unnecessary luggage. Installing a large roof rack can also cause
poor fuel consumption.
■Warming up before driving
Since the gasoline engine starts up and cuts out automatically when
cold, warming up the engine is unnecessary. Moreover, frequently driv-
ing short distances will cause the engine to repeatedly warm up, which
can lead to poor fuel consumption.
319
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
Winter driving tips
●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine/power control unit coolant
• Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the condition of the 12-volt battery.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the
size of the tires.
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate
to the prevailing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter
320
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-6. Driving tips
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.
Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the
water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove
any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the wind-
shield.
●Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumu-
lated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on
the brakes.
●Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting
in the vehicle.
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the
vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being
released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or
creeping.
Before driving the vehicle
When driving the vehicle
When parking the vehicle
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
321
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain
(0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter)
Cross chain
(0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter)
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
Selecting tire chains
1
2
Regulations on the use of tire chains
322
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-6. Driving tips
If heavy snow or icy condition is expected, shift the rest position manually.
Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper
position.
■To rest position
Raise the wiper in line with the
windshield.
You can stand the wipers up for the
rest position.
★: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)
■To retract position
Lower the wipers by pressing on
the upper part of the hook sec-
tion.
■Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
●Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving
1/4 1/2 mile (0.5 1.0 km).
●Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
Shifting the windshield wiper position
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
323
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
CAUTION
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
●Use tires of the specified size.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
●Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system.
■Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, as well as sudden braking and shift-
ing operation to engine braking.
●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
●Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) system.
324
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
4-6. Driving tips
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire
retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when
tire chains are fitted.
■When standing the windshield wipers up
Raise the wipers in line with the windshield. (P. 322)
Failure to do so may result in damage to the wipers and/or the hood.
326
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch..............................328
Remote Touch screen.............. 330
Set up screen...............................336
Voice command system..........353
5-2. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Front automatic
air conditioning system.........364
Rear air conditioning
system ..........................................379
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers.......... 384
Windshield wiper de-icer ......385
5-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type.....................386
Using the radio............................409
Using the CD/DVD player....433
Playing an audio CD
and MP3/WMA discs .........435
Playing DVD video......................441
CD/DVD player and DVD
video disc information...........453
Listening to
Bluetooth® audio ...................465
Listening to
a USB memory ........................ 475
Listening to an iPod...................485
Optimal use of
the audio/video system.........495
Using the AUX port ..................497
Using the rear seat
audio controls...........................498
Using the steering wheel
audio switches..........................503
Interior features 5
327
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Interior features
5-4. Using the hands-free phone
system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)................ 506
Using a Bluetooth® phone.....515
Setting the hands-free system
(for cellular phone)................ 534
Setting the Bluetooth®........... 558
5-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list........................... 571
• Interior light ............................572
• Personal lights........................572
5-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features..............574
• Glove box.................................576
• Console box...........................577
• Cup holders............................578
• Auxiliary boxes.....................580
Trunk features ...............................581
5-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
and vanity mirrors...................583
Clock...............................................584
Ashtrays........................................ 585
Power outlets...............................586
Heated steering wheel........... 588
Seat heaters/
seat ventilators.........................590
Armrest..........................................593
Rear sunshade/
rear door sunshades..............594
Coat hooks................................... 597
Assist grips....................................598
Utility hook....................................599
Garage door opener............... 600
Safety Connect...........................607
5
328
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch
“•” button
Press this button to change map scale and scroll through lists.
“COMPASS” button
Press this button to display the compass mode screen.
Remote Touch knob
Use this knob to move the cursor and select items on the screen.
Feedback force, pointer sound volume, on or off of selection sounds etc. can be
changed.
“MENU” button
Press to display the “Menu” screen.
The Remote Touch can be used to operate the Remote Touch screens.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
The illustration below is for vehicles without navigation system.
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
329
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
CAUTION
■When using the Remote Touch
●Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Remote Touch as
this may cause an injury.
●Be careful when selecting the Remote Touch in extreme temperatures as it may
become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the Remote Touch
●Do not allow the Remote Touch to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or
lit cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop
functioning.
●Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact as the
knob may bend or break off.
●Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the
Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop functioning.
●Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Remote Touch knob.
●If your hand or any object is on the Remote Touch knob when the power switch is
turned to ACCESSORY mode, the Remote Touch knob may not operate prop-
erly.
330
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Remote Touch screen
By using the Remote Touch, you can control the audio system and air
conditioning system, and adjust the screen display etc.
Vehicles with a navigation system: Different information can be dis-
played on the left and right of the screen. The 8-inch display area on the
left of the screen is called the “Main Display”, and the area to the right is
called the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
“Menu” screen
Vehicles without navigation
system
Vehicles with a navigation
system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
331
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
If the power switch is turned to
ACCESSORY or ON mode, the
initial screen will be displayed for a
few seconds as the system starts up.
Images shown on the initial screen can
be changed to suit individual prefer-
ences. (P. 341)
Switch Page
“Destination” Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Info/Apps” or “Info” P. 1 09/
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Setup” P. 336
“Radio” P. 386, 409
“Media” P. 386, 435
“Climate” P. 364
“Phone” P. 506
“Display” P. 332
Initial screen
332 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
The contrast and brightness of the screen display and the image the cam-
era displays can be adjusted. (For information regarding audio/video
screen adjustment: P. 447)
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and select “Display”
on the “Menu” screen.
Select “Map•Menu” /“Menu” or “Camera” to display the desired
screen.
Select “<” or “>” to select the desired function (“Contrast” or “Bright-
ness”) and then select the desired screen button to adjust contrast
and brightness.
After adjusting the screen, select “OK”.
Adjusting the display
1
2
Display screen (“Map•Menu”/
“Menu”)
Display screen (“Camera”)
If the map menu adjust screen does
not appear, select “Map•Menu”/
“Menu”.
If the camera adjust screen does
not appear, select “Camera”.
3
“-” “+”
“Contrast” Weaker Stronger
“Brightness” Darker Brighter
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
333
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
■When using the Remote Touch screen
●If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operat-
ing slightly slower than normal.
●When the screen is viewed through polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pattern may
appear on the screen due to optical characteristics of the screen. If this is disturb-
ing, please operate the screen without polarized sunglasses.
●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
■Changing between day mode and night mode
The display condition is not changed to night mode even if the headlight switch is
turned on when the vehicle is in a bright area such as daytime.
■To turn off the display
The display goes off when “Screen Off” is selected. To turn the “Display” screen back
on, select any button. The selected screen appears.
To display the screen in day mode, even with
the headlight switch on, select “Day Mode”
for brightness and contrast control.
If the screen is set to day mode with the
headlight switch turned on, this condition is
memorized even with the hybrid system
turned off.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the Remote Touch screen
Wipe off fingerprints using a glass cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical cleaners to
clean the screen, as they may damage the Remote Touch screen.
334 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Letters and numbers can be input via the screen.
■To input letters and numbers/symbols
Select the keys directly to enter letters, numbers or symbols.
: Select to erase one character. Select and hold to continue erasing
characters.
“A-Z”: To change letters and numbers
“Other”: To display symbols
: To enter in lower case
: To enter in upper case
Inputting letters and numbers/list screen operation
Letters and numbers Symbols
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
335
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
■Layout type
Keyboard layout can be changed. (P. 3 41)
■List screen operation
When a list is displayed, use the
appropriate screen button to
scroll through the list.
: Select to skip to the next or
previous page. Select and hold
or to scroll through the
displayed list.
: This indicates the displayed
screen’s position.
:If appears to the right of an
item name, the complete name
is too long for the display.
Select to scroll to the end of
the name. Select to move to
the beginning of the name.
■If you select
The display returns to the previous screen.
“A B C” ty p e “QWERTY” type
336
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-1. Remote Touch screen
Set up screen
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
You can change the Remote Touch screen to your desired settings.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup” on
the “Menu” screen.
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Vehicles without navigation
system
Vehicles with a navigation
system
Switch Page
“General” P. 337/
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Voice” P. 349/
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Navigation” Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Vehicle” P. 350/
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
“Phone” P. 351
“Bluetooth*”P. 351
“A u d i o ” P. 352
“Other” Navigation System Owner’s Manual
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
337
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
This screen is used for language selection and the on/off settings of opera-
tion sounds and automatic screen change, etc.
Select “General” on the “Setup” screen.
System time settings
Selecting a language
Unit of measurement*1
Selecting a button color
Selecting keyboard layout
Changing the startup image
Changing the screen off image
Auto screen change*1
Selection sound on/off
Pointer sound on/off
Error sound on/off
Pointer sound volume settings
Setting a feedback force
Delete personal data
Software update*2
Gracenote database update*2
Select “Save” after changing set-
tings.
*1: Vehicles with a navigation system.
*2: For details, contact your Lexus
dealer.
General settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
338 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■System time settings
Used for changing time zones and the on/off settings of daylight saving
time.
Select “System Time” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select the items to be set.
Time zone
Daylight saving time
Select “Save”.
●Time zone
A time zone can be selected and GMT can be set.
Select “Time Zone”.
Select the desired time zone.
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
339
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
If “Other” is selected, the zone
can be adjusted manually. Select
“+” or “-” to adjust the time zone
and then select “OK”.
●Daylight saving time
To select “On” or “Off” for daylight saving time.
■Selecting a language
The language can be changed.
Select “Language” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select the desired screen but-
ton.
Select “Yes”.
The previous screen will be displayed.
Select “Save”.
1
2
3
4
340 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Unit of measurement (vehicles with a navigation system)
Distance unit can be changed.
This function is available only in English or Spanish. To change lan-
guage, see “Selecting a language”. (P. 339)
Select “Unit of Measurement” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select “km” or “mile”.
The previous screen will be dis-
played.
Select “Save”.
■Selecting a button color
The color of the screen buttons can be changed.
Select “Button Color” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select the desired screen but-
ton color.
The previous screen will be dis-
played.
Select “Save”.
1
2
3
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
341
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
■Selecting a keyboard layout
Keyboard layout can be changed.
Select “Keyboard Layout” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select “ABC” or “QWERTY”.
The previous screen will be dis-
played.
Select “Save”.
■Changing the startup image (vehicles without a navigation system)
An image can be copied from a USB memory and used as the startup
image.
When saving the images to a USB memory, name the folder that the
startup image is saved to “StartupImage”. If these folder names are not
used, the system cannot download the images. (The folder names are
case sensitive.)
1
2
3
342 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
●Transferring data
Open the console box.
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
Close the console box.
Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select “Transfer”.
Select “Yes”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
343
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
●Setting the startup image
Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select the desired image.
Select “Save”.
●Deleting transferred image
Select “Customize Startup Image” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select “Delete All”.
Select “Yes”.
1
2
3
1
2
3
344 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Changing the screen off image
Select “Screen Off” on the “Display” screen to turn off the screen. An
image can be copied from a USB memory and can be set to display
when “Screen Off” is selected.
When saving the images to a USB memory, name the folder that the
screen off image is saved to “DisplayOffImage”. If these folder names
are not used, the system cannot download the images. (The folder
names are case sensitive.)
●Transferring data
Open the console box.
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
Close the console box.
Select “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings”
screen.
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
345
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
Select “Transfer”.
Select “Yes”.
●Setting the screen off image
Select “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings”
screen.
Select the desired image.
Select “Save”.
●Deleting transferred images
Select “Customize Screen Off Image” on the “General Settings”
screen.
Select “Delete All”.
Select “Yes”.
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
346 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Pointer sound volume settings
The pointer sound volume can be adjusted.
Select “Pointer Sound Volume” on the “General settings” screen.
Select the desired button.
Select “OK”, and then “Save”.
■Setting a feedback force
When the pointer moves close to a button, it will be automatically
pulled onto that button. The strength of this pull can be adjusted.
Select “Feedback Force” on the “General settings” screen.
Select “+” or “-”.
Select “OK”, and then “Save”.
1
2
3
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
347
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
■Delete personal data
This function is not available while driving.
Select “Delete Personal Data” on the “General Settings” screen.
Select “Delete”.
Check carefully beforehand, as
data cannot be retrieved once
deleted.
Select “Yes”.
The following personal data can be deleted or returned to their default settings:
• Maintenance conditions*
• Maintenance information off setting*
• Address book*
•Areas to avoid*
• Previous points*
• Route guidance*
• Route trace*
•Phonebook data
• Call history data
• Speed dial data
• Bluetooth® phone data
• Phone sound settings
• Phone display settings
• Message settings
• Audio setting
• Bluetooth® audio setting
• Startup image data
• Screen off image data
*: Vehicles with a navigation system.
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
349
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
Voice guidance can be set.
Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
Select voice guidance volume
Voice guidance on/off during
route guidance*
Voice guidance on/off during
audio system is in use
Voice recognition prompt on/off
This setting can also be changed on
the “Shortcut Menu” screen.
(P. 361)
Restore default settings
Voice commands on/off when
using the audio/video and air
conditioning system
Voice guidance on/off when
using the traffic information*
Voice guidance on/off when
using the XM NavWeather™*
Make sure to save after changing
settings.
*: Vehicles with a navigation system.
Voice settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
350 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Voice volume
The voice guidance volume can be adjusted or switched off.
Select “Voice” on the “Setup” screen.
Select the desired level.
Vehicles with a navigation system:
If voice guidance is not needed,
select “Off” to disable the feature.
Select “Save”.
Select “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.
Maintenance information set-
tings
Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s
Manual”.
Vehicle customization
Detailed information: P. 809
Setting up intuitive parking assist
Detailed information: P. 269
1
2
Vehicle settings
3
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
351
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
Select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
Phone sound settings
Detailed information: P. 535
Phonebook settings
Detailed information: P. 537
Message settings
Detailed information: P. 551
Phone display settings
Detailed information: P. 555
Select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup” screen.
Registered devices
Detailed information: P. 559
Selecting a Bluetooth® phone
Detailed information: P. 565
Selecting portable player
Detailed information: P. 566
Detailed Bluetooth® settings
Detailed information: P. 567
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark
of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Phone settings
1
2
3
4
Bluetooth® Settings
1
2
3
4
353
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
Voice command system
◆Talk switch
Press .
To cancel, press and hold the talk
switch.
◆ Back switch
Press .
To return to the previous screen.
◆Microphone
The voice command system enables the navigation, audio/video,
hands-free and air conditioning systems to be operated using voice
commands.
For details of the navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
354 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Voice command system operation
Press .
After the “Shortcut Menu” screen has been displayed, voice guidance will
commence.
Voice guidance for the voice command system can be skipped by pressing
.
After a beep sounds, say the
command of your choice.
Voice commands are marked with
.
Some commonly used commands
are displayed on the screen.
If you wish to display the com-
mands displayed on the page in the
background, perform one of the
following:
• Say “Next page” or “Previous
page”.
• Select “Next Pg.” or “Prev. Pg.”
If you wish to display the “Main
Menu” screen when the “Shortcut
Menu” screen is displayed, per-
form one of the following:
• Say “Main menu”.
• Select “Main Menu”.
To cancel, select “Cancel”, or press
and hold .
Saying “Help” prompts voice guid-
ance to offer examples of com-
mands and operation methods.
Voice command system operation
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
355
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
Say the command displayed on
the screen.
If a desired outcome is not shown, or if
no selections are available, perform
one of the following to return to the
previous screen:
• Say “Go back”.
• Select “Go Back”.
•Press .
To cancel, select “Cancel”, or press
and hold .
■Voice command example (search for a track using artist name or
album name)
Press .
“Play Artist <name>” and “Play Album <name>” are displayed in the “Shortcut
Menu” screen.
Say “Play artist <name>” or “Play album <name>”.
Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.
A confirmation screen will be displayed showing the recognition results. If mul-
tiple matching items are found, a selection screen will be displayed.
When “Play Artist <name>” is used to play music, the first track is selected ran-
domly.
Say “Yes” or select “Yes”.
3
1
2
3
356 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system
enables recognition of a command when spoken naturally. However, the
system cannot recognize every variation of each command. In some situa-
tions, it is possible to omit the command for the procedure and directly
state the desired operation. Not all voice commands are displayed in the
short cut menu.
■Expression examples for each function
*: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.
Commands that are not displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen can be
accessed from the main menu.
For example, to make an “International Call”, say “Main menu” while the “Short-
cut Menu” screen is being displayed. Then say “Use the phone” followed by say-
ing the desired number, e.g. “123456789”.
Natural speech information (English only)
Command Expression examples
“Call <name> <type>”
Get me <Robert Brown>.
I need to call <Robert Brown> at <Work>
right away.
“Dial <number>”
Please dial the number
<3334445555>.
Ring <3334445555>.
“Play Artist <name>” Play the artist <XXXXX>.
I’d like to hear the band <XXXXX>.*
“Play Album <name>” Play album <XXXXX>.
Music from album <XXXXX>.*
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
357
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
Selecting “On” next to “Expanded Voice Commands” on the “Voice Set-
tings” screen enables voice command operation of the audio/video and
air conditioning system. (P. 3 49)
For more information on operations that can be controlled using
expanded voice commands, refer to “Command list”. (P. 358)
■Voice command example (turn the audio system)
Press .
Say “Audio on”.
Expanded voice commands
1
2
358 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.
●For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands
will not be displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen. Also, according to
conditions, other commands may not be displayed in the “Shortcut
Menu” screen.
●Voice recognition language can be changed. (P. 339)
●Commands that have a “O” in the “Shortcut Menu” column in the fol-
lowing table can be recognized from the “Shortcut Menu” screen.
Commands that have a “—” in the Shortcut Menu column can only be
recognized from the screen that they are displayed in.
■Calling a phone (P. 52 0 )
*: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Use the phone” while the “Short-
cut Menu” screen is being displayed.
Command list
Command Action Shortcut
Menu
“Call <name> <type>”
Calls made by saying a name from the
phonebook.
For example: Say “Call John Smith”,
“Call John Smith, mobile” etc.
O
“Dial <number>”
Calls made by saying the phone number.
For example: Say “Dial 911”, “Dial
5556667777” etc.
O
“International Call”*Calls international numbers by saying
the phone number. —
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
359
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
■Playing a music
*1: Say the desired artist name or album name in the place of the “<>”.
*2: To use this function, say “Main menu” and then “Play music” while the “Short-
cut menu” screen is being displayed.
Command Action Shortcut
Menu
“Play Artist <name>”
Plays tracks by the selected artist.
For example: Say “Play artist
<XXXXX>”*1O
“Play Album <name>”
Plays tracks from the selected album.
For example: Say “Play album
<XXXXX>”*1O
“Play Song <name>”*2
Plays the selected track.
For example: Say “Play song Summer-
time”, “Play song Concerto in A Major”
etc.
—
“Play Playlist
<name>”*2
Plays tracks from the selected playlist.
For example: Say “Play playlist My
Favorite Songs”, “Play Playlist Classic
Hits” etc.
—
360 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Select audio mode
When expanded voice commands are turned “On”. (P. 349)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
■Air conditioning system command
When expanded voice commands are turned “On”. (P. 349)
Command Action Shortcut
Menu
“Radio” Sets the audio mode to radio. O
“A M ” Selects the AM band. O
“FM” Selects the FM band. O
“Satellite radio” Selects the satellite radio mode. O
“Disc” Selects the disc audio mode. O
“Auxiliary” Selects the auxiliary audio mode. O
“Bluetooth* audio” Selects the Bluetooth® audio mode. O
“iPod” Selects the iPod audio mode. O
“USB audio” Selects the USB audio mode. O
“A u d i o on ” Turns the audio system on. O
“Audio off” Turns the audio system off. O
Command Action Shortcut
Menu
“Automatic climate
control” Turns air conditioning system on and off. O
“Warmer” Turns temperature up. O
“Cooler” Tu rn s t em perat u re down . O
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
361
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
■Voice command system
●Commands that are not displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen can be operated
from the “Main Menu” screen.
●If the system does not respond or the confirmation screen does not disappear,
press and try again.
●Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting
when it is desirable to say a command immediately after pressing and hearing
a beep.
■If a voice command cannot be recognized
●If a voice command cannot be recognized within 6 seconds, voice guidance will
say “Pardon?” (“Command not recognized.” will be displayed on the screen) and
voice command reception will restart.
●If a voice command cannot be recognized 2 consecutive times, the voice com-
mand guidance system will say “Paused. To restart voice recognition, push the talk
switch. To cancel voice recognition, push and hold the talk switch.” Voice recogni-
tion will then be suspended. Select “Cancel” or “Go Back”, or press .
■When selecting “Voice Prompts”
●The voice recognition prompt can be set to on or off. This setting can also be
changed on the “Voice Settings” screen. (P. 349)
●Voice recognition will be temporarily suspended. Press again.
362 5-1. Remote Touch screen
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■When using the microphone
●It is unnecessary to speak directly into the microphone when giving a command.
●Wait for the confirmation beep before speaking a command.
●Voice commands may not be recognized if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone.
●In the following conditions, the system may not recognize the command properly
and using voice commands may not be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear. Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise.
■When searching for a track
●A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and play-
back. (P. 477, 487)
●When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so tracks
can be searched using voice commands.
●Recognition data is updated under the following conditions:
• When the USB memory or iPod data has changed.
• When the voice recognition language is changed. (P. 339)
●While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search can-
not be performed using a voice command.
●While “Play Music” is displayed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen, say “Play Music” to
display the music screen from which searching for a track using a voice command
can be performed.
●When “Play Music” is dimmed in the “Shortcut Menu” screen, it is not possible to
search for a track using a voice command. In this situation, reduce the amount of
music data in the USB memory or iPod and update the recognition data to enable
searching by voice command.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
363
5-1. Remote Touch screen
5
Interior features
■Natural speech information
●The “Use the Phone” and “Play Music” commands displayed on the “Shortcut
Menu” screen can be operated using natural language speech recognition tech-
nology.
●If the command cannot be recognized completely, the command input screen will
be displayed. (Search results will be shown based on the part of the command that
was recognized.)
■When turning the audio system or air conditioning system on
●Commands relating to operation of the audio/video and air conditioning systems
can only be performed when the audio/video and air conditioning systems are
turned on.
●Expanded voice commands can be recognized when the “Shortcut Menu” screen
is displayed.
■The Gracenote® media database
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
364
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front automatic air conditioning system
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Vehicles with a navigation system: The air conditioning system can be
displayed and operated on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Climate”
to display the air conditioning operation screen.
The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the
system.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
367
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
Fan speed control
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
Outside temperature
Right-hand front seat side tem-
perature control
Right-hand front seat side tem-
perature display
Front seat air outlet selector
Micro dust and pollen filter
DUAL/3-ZONE mode
Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off
Left-hand front seat side tem-
perature display
Left-hand front seat side tem-
perature control
Windshield defogger
Outside air or recirculated
mode
Air outlet selector
S-FLOW mode
Off
Automatic mode
Left-hand front seat side air out-
let selector
Rear air conditioning operation
screen
Right-hand front seat side air
outlet selector
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
368
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Press to operate the speech
command system. (P. 353/“Nav-
igation System Owner’s Manual”)
Press .
The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are
automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting and humidity.
Press to switch to automatic air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recir-
culated air modes.
Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the
temperature.
Without rear air conditioning system
When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side
temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and passen-
ger seats can be adjusted separately.
With rear air conditioning system
When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s side
temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver’s, front pas-
senger’s and rear seats (P. 379) can be adjusted separately.
Air outlets and fan speed for the driver and passenger seats may be adjusted sep-
arately depending on the temperature setting.
Using the speech command system
Using the automatic air conditioning system
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
369
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
Without rear air conditioning system
To adjust the fan speed, select “” on to increase the fan speed
and “” to decrease the fan speed on the operation screen.
Press to turn the fan off.
To adjust the temperature setting, press “” on to increase the
temperature and “” to decrease the temperature.
When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s
side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted separately.
To change the air outlets,
select an air outlet switch on
the operation screen.
Adjusting the settings manually
1
2
3
370
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
With rear air conditioning system
To adjust the fan speed, select “” on to increase the fan speed
and “” to decrease the fan speed on the operation screen.
Press to turn the fan off.
To adjust the temperature setting, press “” on to increase the
temperature and “” to decrease the temperature.
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous
modes each time is selected.
When is selected (the indicator on is on) or the passenger’s
side temperature control button is pressed, the temperature for the driver’s,
front passenger’s and rear seats (P. 379) can be adjusted separately.
To change the air outlets,
select an air outlet switch on
the operation screen.
Left-hand front seat
Right-hand front seat
Different air outlets for the driver
and front passenger seats can be
chosen.
1
2
3
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
371
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
Press .
The dehumidification function oper-
ates and fan speed increases.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode
button to outside air mode if the recir-
culated air mode is used. (It may
switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side
windows early, turn the air flow and
temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press
again when the windshield is
defogged.
[
Upper body
*: In “AUTO” mode, air may flow to the
feet as well as to the body to prevent
your feet from getting sweaty.
Upper body and feet
Defogging the windshield
Air outlets and air flow
*
*
372
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Feet
*: When the warming function is operat-
ing, air flows to the upper body as well
to warm the upper body effectively.
Feet and windshield
Press .
The mode switches among (recirculated air mode), automatic and
(outside air mode) modes each time the button is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system
operates automatically.
*
*
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
373
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■Using the automatic mode
Select .
Select .
The air conditioning system will
operate, and air outlets and speed
will be set automatically.
Select to increase the temperature and to decrease the temper-
ature.
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Select .
Select (increase) or
(decrease) on the operation
screen.
The air conditioning system
switches between individual and
simultaneous modes each time
is selected.
Changing the rear seat settings (with rear air conditioning sys-
tem)
1
2
3
1
2
374
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Disabling the switches on the rear armrest.
Select .
Operates micro dust and pollen fil-
ter on/off.
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is
removed from the air and the air flows
to the upper part of the body.
Usually the system will turn off auto-
matically after approximately 1 to 3
minutes.
Operates S-FLOW mode on/off.
When the S-FLOW mode button is
pressed, the airflow changes as fol-
lows.
Without rear air conditioning system:
Air flows to the front seats only.
With rear air conditioning system: Air
flows to the front seats only, and if the
passenger seat is unoccupied, the set
temperature, outside humidity and
temperature inside the cabin are
assessed, and air flows to the driver
seat only.
Micro dust and pollen filter button
S-FLOW mode button
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
375
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■Front center outlets and front side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
■Rear seat outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Turn the knob to open or close
the vent.
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
1
2
1
2
376
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the
ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immedi-
ately after is pressed.
■Humidity sensor
■Fogging up of the windows
●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting
on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effec-
tively.
●If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.
●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■Outside/recirculated air mode
●When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/
recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in pre-
venting outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, set-
ting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
●Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the tem-
perature setting or the inside temperature.
A sensor, which detects humidity inside the
vehicle and the temperature of the wind-
shield, is provided to detect fog on the front
windscreen. Due to the sensor, when auto-
matic mode is set the air conditioning may
make the following controls:
●Changing the amount of air flow
●Changing the amount of air introduced from
outside when in outside air mode with the air
vents in the position
●Changing the settings of the air vents to
when the is set
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
377
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning sys-
tem is on
●In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning
system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce
fuel consumption.
●Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the power switch is
turned on.
●It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing .
■Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and auto-
matically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic
mode on will activate the dehumidification function.
■Micro dust and pollen filter
●In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the
following may occur:
• Outside air mode does not switch to (recirculated air) mode.
• The dehumidification function operates.
• The operation cancels after approximately 1 minute.
●In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .
●In extremely humid weather, the windows may fog up.
●The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.
■Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to priori-
tize fuel efficiency:
●Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling
capacity
●Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
●Adjust the fan speed
●Turn off Eco drive mode
■When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when is selected.
378
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Air conditioning odors
●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and
accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted
from the vents.
●To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode
prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immedi-
ately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.
■Air conditioning filter
P. 666
■Customization
Settings (e.g. exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed.
(Customizable features P. 807)
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differ-
ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.
■Humidity sensor
Follow these points to avoid damaging the sensor:
●Do not disassemble the sensor
●Do not spray the glass cleaner on the sensor or subject it to strong impacts
●Do not stick anything on the sensor
379
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
Rear air conditioning system
: If equipped
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Button lock display
Air outlet mode display
Temperature display
Temperature control
Air outlet selector
Off
Automatic mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
380
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Press .
The air conditioning system will operate, and air outlets and fan speed will be
adjusted automatically.
“AUTO” will be displayed on the control panel.
Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to decrease
the temperature.
Using automatic air conditioning system
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
381
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “” on to increase the temperature and “” to decrease
the temperature.
■Changing the air outlets
Press .
The air outlets change as follows each time is pressed.
Air flows as shown below according to the mode selected.
Upper body
Upper body and feet
Adjusting the settings manually
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
383
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
■Button lock function
■Rear control panel illumination off function
To prevent inadvertent operation, the buttons
on the rear armrest can be locked. Press
until you hear a beep to lock the but-
tons. Pressing again until you hear a
beep will release the lock.
The indicator appears on the display when the
buttons are locked.
Control panel illumination on the rear armrest
can be turned off. Press until you hear a
beep to turn the illumination off. Pressing
again until you hear a beep will turn the
illumination on.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the hybrid
system is off.
384
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear window and outside rear view mirror
defoggers
On/off
The defoggers will automatically turn
off after 15 to 60 minutes. The opera-
tion time changes according to the
ambient temperature and vehicle
speed.
■Operating conditions
The power switch must be in the ON mode.
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
CAUTION
■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn
you.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Turn the defoggers off when the hybrid system is off.
385
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
Windshield wiper de-icer
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. (P. 328)
Select “Climate” on the “Menu”
screen.
ON/OFF
Select to turn on the windshield
wiper de-icer. The windshield wiper
de-icer will automatically turn off after
approximately 15 minutes. Selecting
again also turns the de-icer off.
■Operating conditions
The power switch must be in the ON mode.
: If equipped
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield
and wiper blades.
1
2
3
CAUTION
■When the windshield wiper de-icer is on
Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front
pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.
386
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Audio system type
CD and DVD player with AM/FM radio
Vehicles with a navigation system: The audio functions can be displayed
and operated on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to the “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”.
Using the instrument panel
Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button to display the audio control
screen.
Using the Remote Touch
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, select “Radio” or
“Media” and select each tab to display the audio control screen.
388
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Press to operate the voice
command system. (P. 353“Nav-
igation System Owner’s Manual”)
Title Page
Using the radio P. 409
Using the CD/DVD player P. 433
Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs P. 435
Playing DVD video P. 441
CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information P. 453
Listening to Bluetooth® audio P. 465
Listening to a USB memory P. 475
Listening to an iPod P. 485
Optimal use of the audio/video system P. 495
Using the AUX port P. 497
Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 503
Using the voice command system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
389
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
■When using the Remote Touch screen
Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
■Ta b
Select or , located either side of the screen tabs, to display tabs from the pre-
vious or next page.
■About Dolby
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-
bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
CAUTION
■For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada
●Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
●Laser products
• USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PRO-
CEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
• THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL
INCREASE EYE HAZARD.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is
off.
■To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids on the audio system.
390
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Open source license
This product uses the following open source software.
●T-Kernel
This Product uses the Source Code of T-Kernel under T-License granted by the
T-Engine Forum (www.t-engine.org).
●C Library
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley
and its contributors. This product includes software developed by the University of
California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory.
Copyright © 1982, 1985, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994 The Regents of the University of
California. All rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1987, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1987, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1988 University of Utah.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
391
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by the Systems
Programming Group of the University of Utah Computer Science Department and
Ralph Campbell.
Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved. This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Arthur
David Olson of the National Cancer Institute.
Copyright © 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Chris Torek.
Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Berkeley Software
Design, Inc.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Ralph Campbell.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
392
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
© UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. All or some portions of this file are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This software was developed by the Computer Systems Engineering group at
Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory under DARPA contract BG 91-66 and contributed
to Berkeley. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software
developed by the University of California, Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory.
Copyright © 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Ralph Campbell. This
file is derived from the MIPS RISC Architecture book by Gerry Kane.
Copyright © 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1994 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by Andrew Hume of
AT&T Bell Laboratories.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
393
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
394
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment
Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
document or software without specific, written prior permission.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1990, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
395
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes software developed by the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its
contributors.
Copyright © 1996 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by J.T.
Conklin.
Copyright © 1997 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus
Klein.
Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1997,98 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by J.T.
Conklin.
396
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Copyright © 1997, 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code was contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus Klein.
Copyright © 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus
Klein.
Copyright © 1998, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus
J. Klein.
Copyright © 1999, 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Julian
Coleman.
Copyright © 2000 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Dieter
Baron and Thomas Klausner.
Copyright © 2000, 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by
Jun-ichiro itojun Hagino and by Klaus Klein.
Copyright © 2001 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to The NetBSD Foundation by Klaus
Klein.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
397
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes software developed by Christos Zoulas.
Copyright © 1997 Christos Zoulas. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
Christos Zoulas.
4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
398
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes software developed by Winning Strategies, Inc.
Copyright © 1994 Winning Strategies, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
Winning Strategies, Inc.
4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
399
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright ©1999 Citrus Project, All rights reserved.
400
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1995 Carnegie-Mellon University. All rights reserved. Author: Chris
G. Demetriou
Copyright © 1995, 1996 Carnegie-Mellon University. All rights reserved. Author:
Chris G. Demetriou
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation is
hereby granted, provided that both the copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in all copies of the software, derivative works or modified versions, and any
portions thereof, and that both notices appear in supporting documentation.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
401
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS ““AS
IS”” CONDITION. CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF
ANY KIND FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to Software Distribution
Coordinator or Software.Distribution@CS.CMU.EDU School of Computer
Science Carnegie Mellon University Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890 any improvements
or extensions that they make and grant Carnegie the rights to redistribute these
changes.
●TCP/IP, Socket Library
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley
and its contributors.
Copyright © 1980, 1983, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
All rights reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1987, 1989 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Copyright © 1983, 1989, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Copyright © 1985, 1988, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Copyright © 1985, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
Copyright © 1989, 1993, 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
402
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 2004 by Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. (““ISC””) Portions
Copyright © 1996-1999 by Internet Software Consortium. Permission to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby
granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND ISC DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL ISC BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment
Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
document or software without specific, written prior permission.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
403
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP.
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
This product includes software developed by WIDE Project and its contributors.
Portions Copyright © 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by
WIDE Project and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
404
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE PROJECT AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE PROJECT OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1988 Stephen Deering.
Copyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. [rescinded 22 July 1999]
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1982, 1986, 1988 Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
405
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the
above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that
any documentation and other materials related to such distribution and use
acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California,
Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ““AS IS”” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Rights, responsibilities and use of this software are controlled by the agreement
found in the ““LICENSE.H”” file distributed with this source code. ““LICENSE.H””
may not be removed from this distribution, modified, enhanced nor references to it
omitted.
Copyright 1983 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Copyright 1984 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Copyright 1984, 1985 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Copyright 1990 by NetPort Software
Copyright 1990-1993 by NetPort Software.
Copyright 1990-1994 by NetPort Software.
Copyright 1990-1996 by NetPort Software.
Copyright 1990-1997 by NetPort Software.
Copyright 1993 by NetPort Software
Copyright 1986 by Carnegie Mellon
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation
for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU
not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
without specific, written prior permission.
406
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
●OpenSSL
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic
software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software
written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written
permission. For written permission, please contact
openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may
“OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL
Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
407
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is
free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it
the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the
holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as
such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used
in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the
library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
408
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display
the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left
out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps
directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This
product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of
this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under
another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
411
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Seek tuning
Press and hold “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.
■Manual tuning
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob.
■Preset stations
Select the desired preset stations (1 - 6).
Change the page by using “” or “” on the screen.
Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.
Search for desired stations.
Select one of the left side screen
buttons (1-6) and hold it until a
beep is heard. There are 6 sets of
6 presets. There is a total of 36
presets.
Selecting a station (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
1
2
412
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Scanning all radio stations within range
Select “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
The radio will find the next station and stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or “HD
Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if “Analog” is selected, and then scan again.
(P. 414)
Select “SCAN” once again when the desired station is reached.
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■Receiving RBDS broadcasts
Select “Options” on the
screen.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data Systems)
1
2
1
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
413
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Select “< TYPE” or “TYPE >”
on the screen.
The program list changes as follows each time the switch is selected.
• Classical
•Country
• EasyLis (Easy Listening)
• Inform (Information)
•Jazz
•News
• Oldies
•Other
•Pop Music
• Religion
•Rock
•R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
•Sports
•Talk
• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio Settings” are set to analog.)
•Alert (Emergency Alert)
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.
Select “TYPE SEEK” on the screen.
The radio seeks for stations by the relevant program type.
If no relevant program can be found, “no type” appears on the screen.
■Traffic announcement
Select “Traffic” on the screen.
“TRAF SEEK” appears on the dis-
play, and the radio seeks a traffic
program station.
If no traffic program station is
found, “No Traffic” appears on the
display.
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
415
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Select the item to be set.
“All”: Select to receive both analog
and digital broadcasts.
“HD Only”: Select to receive only
digital broadcasts.
“Analog”: Select to receive only
analog broadcasts.
Select “Save”.
■Trademark owned
5
6
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity
Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and
the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of
iBiquity Digital Corp.
416
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio.
Your radio product has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital
broadcasts (where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it
already receives.
Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog broadcasts as
digital broadcasts provide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distor-
tion. For more information, and a guide to available radio stations and pro-
gramming, refer to www.hdradio.com.
HD Radio™ Technology
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
417
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Using HD Radio™ Technology
Press the “RADIO” button.
Select the “AM” or “FM” tab or
press the “RADIO” button
repeatedly to select the
desired tab.
An orange “HD)” logo indicator
will be displayed on the screen
when in digital.
The song title, artist name and
music genre will appear on the
screen when available by the radio
station.
Select “Options” to display this
screen.
When “Text” is selected, informa-
tion such as the artist name, song
title, album title and music genre of
the track being listened to are dis-
played on the text screen. To dis-
play messages from the station,
select “Additional Information”.
When “< TYPE” or “TYPE >” is
selected, a program type will be
searched. Once a program type
has been set, “TYPE SEEK” will
appear on the screen. (P. 412)
1
2
3
418
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
On the FM radio frequency most digital stations have “multiple” or sup-
plemental programs on one FM station.
■Multicast
Select “Multicast”.
Each time “Multicast” is selected,
the supplemental program
changes.
If “Multicast” is selected when
tuned to the last of the supplemen-
tal programs, the main program will
be returned to.
■Ta g
Select “Tag” to bookmark the
music information.
Open the console box, open the cover and connect an iPod using an
iPod cable. (P. 487)
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not turned on.
Once an iPod is connected, the music tag moves from the radio into the iPod.
When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the “tagged” information of the songs
which were tagged while listening to the radio can be viewed. Then a user may
decide to purchase the song or CD/Album which had been listened to on their
radio.
If tagging the music information fails, “Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will be
displayed on the screen. If this occurs, tag the information again.
Available HD Radio™ Technology
1
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
419
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
Press the “RADIO” button.
Select the “SAT” tab or press
the “RADIO” button repeat-
edly until the “SAT” tab is
selected to choose a satellite
broadcast channel.
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select the next or previous chan-
nel.
Turning the knob quickly allows rapid scrolling through the channel list.
■Presetting XM® Satellite Radio channels
Select the desired channel.
Select one of the left side
screen buttons (1-6) and hold it
until a beep is heard.
To change the preset channel to a
different one, follow the same pro-
cedure.
■Changing the channel category
Select either “< TYPE” or “TYPE
>” to go to the next or previous
category.
XM® Satellite Radio
1
2
3
1
2
420
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Seeking the channel within the current category
Press and hold “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button.
■Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
Scanning channels in the current category
Select “SCAN” on the screen.
“SCAN” appears on the screen.
Select “SCAN” once again when the desired channel is reached.
■Displaying the title and artist name
Select “Text” to display the song
title and artist name currently
being listening to.
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters
can be displayed. (Some informa-
tion will not be fully displayed.)
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
421
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
One of Apps’ features is the ability to listen to internet radio. In order to
use this service, an Apps compatible phone and the navigation system
need to be set. For details, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Man-
ual”.
Press the “RADIO” button.
Select the “Apps” tab or press the
“RADIO” button repeatedly until
the “Apps” tab is selected.
If a compatible phone is already regis-
tered, it will be connected automati-
cally.
If a compatible phone has not been
registered or the Bluetooth® connec-
tion cannot be completed correctly,
select “Connect” to register and/or
connect your phone. (P. 515)
When connection is complete, the
application screen can be displayed.
Select “View Application Screen” on the screen.
The internet radio application screen is displayed.
Perform operations according to the displayed application screen.
By pressing the “RADIO” button, the “Audio” screen can be returned to.
Press .
Press the button again to turn the system back on.
Internet radio broadcast (vehicles with the navigation system)
1
2
Silencing the sound
3
422
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■If you select
The display returns to the previous screen.
■When the 12-volt battery is disconnected
All preset stations are erased.
■Reception sensitivity
●Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely
affect the reception of XM® Satellite Radio.
●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio
reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the
antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■HD Radio™ Technology troubleshooting guide
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time align-
ment- a user may hear a
short period of program-
ming replayed or an
echo, stutter or skip.
The radio stations analog
and digital volume are not
properly aligned or the
station is in ballgame
mode.
None, radio broadcast
issue. A user can contact
the radio station.
Sound fades, blending in
and out.
Radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.
Reception issue, may
clear-up as the vehicle
continues to be driven.
Selecting “Analog” can
force radio in an analog
audio.
Audio mute condition
when an HD2/HD3 mul-
ticast channel had been
playing.
The radio does not have
access to digital signals at
the moment.
This is normal behavior,
wait until the digital signal
returns. If out of the cov-
erage area, seek a new
station.
Audio mute delay when
selecting an HD2/HD3
multicast channel preset.
The digital multicast con-
tent is not available until
HD Radio™ broadcast
can be decoded and
make the audio available.
This takes up to 7 sec-
onds.
This is normal behavior,
wait for the audio to
become available.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
423
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Text information does not
match the present song
audio.
Data service issue at the
radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be
notified. Complete the
form: www.ibiquity.com/
automotive/
report_radio_station_
experiences.
No text information
shown for the present
selected frequency.
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be
notified. Complete the
form: www.ibiquity.com/
automotive/
report_radio_station_
experiences.
Experience Cause Action
424
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■XM Radio Services — Descriptions (vehicles without a navigation system for
U.S.A.)
●Radio and Entertainment
XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and
premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to mil-
lions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to
XM on satellite radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More informa-
tion about XM is available online at www.siriusxm.com.
●Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying
Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
■XM Radio Services — Subscription Instructions (vehicles without a navigation sys-
tem for U.S.A.)
For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio), the following para-
graph shall be included.
Required XM Radio monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Sub-
scription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Sub-
scriptions are subject to the Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com.
XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States. © 2011 Sirius XM
Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their
respective owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscrip-
tion after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987
●Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem. If
“CH 000” is selected using the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8
alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID
code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying
the radio ID and the specific radio code.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
425
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■XM Radio Services — Legal Disclaimers and Warnings (vehicles without a naviga-
tion system for U.S.A.)
●Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may
apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. XM
service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
Explicit Language Notice — Channels with frequent explicit language are indi-
cated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for
XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate,
or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers
compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the
Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression
software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights includ-
ing patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices.
426
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■XM Radio Services — Descriptions (vehicles without a navigation system
for Canada)
●Radio and Entertainment
XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and
premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to mil-
lions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to
XM on satellite radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More informa-
tion about XM is available online at www.xmradio.ca.
●Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying
Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
■XM Radio Services — Subscription Instructions (vehicles without a navigation sys-
tem for Canada)
For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio), the following para-
graph shall be included.
Required XM Radio monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period. Sub-
scription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Sub-
scriptions are subject to the Customer Agreement available at www.xmradio.ca.
XM service only available in 10 Canadian provinces. © 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc.
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective
owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscrip-
tion after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:
Canadian Customers:
Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987
●Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem. If
“CH 000” is selected using the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8
alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID
code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying
the radio ID and the specific radio code.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
427
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■XM Radio Services — Legal Disclaimers and Warnings (vehicles without a naviga-
tion system for Canada)
Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees
may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to
change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available
at www.xmradio.ca. XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States
and Canada*.
*Canada — some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern lati-
tudes. This is beyond the control of XM Satellite Radio.
Explicit Language Notice — Channels with frequent explicit language are indi-
cated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for
XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;
Canadian Customers — Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-515-3987
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate,
or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers
compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the
Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression
software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights includ-
ing patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices.
428
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■XM Radio Services — Descriptions (vehicles with a navigation system)
●Radio and Entertainment
XM offers more than 170 satellite radio channels of commercial-free music and
premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites to mil-
lions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers listen to
XM on satellite radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More informa-
tion about XM is available online at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.)
or www.xmradio.ca (Canada)
●Infotainment and Data services
XM offers a variety of advanced Infotainment and data services.
■XM Radio Services — Subscription Instructions (vehicles with a navigation system)
For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio, and some Infotain-
ment & data services), the following paragraph shall be included.
Required XM Radio and some Infotainment & data services monthly subscriptions
sold separately after trial period. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and
programming subject to change. Subscriptions are subject to the Customer
Agreement available at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada)
XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. © 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All other marks, channel names and logos
are the property of their respective owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscrip-
tion after complimentary trial period; more information is available at:
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-515-3987
Canadian Customers:
Visit www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-515-3987
●Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a problem. If
“CH 000” is selected using the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob, the ID code, which is 8
alphanumeric characters, will be displayed. If another channel is selected, the ID
code will no longer be displayed. The channel (000) alternates between displaying
the radio ID and the specific radio code.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
429
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■XM Radio Services — Legal Disclaimers and Warnings (vehicles with a navigation
system)
Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees
may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to
change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available
at www.siriusxm.com. (U.S.A.) or www.xmradio.ca (Canada) XM service only
available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada*.
*Canada — some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern lati-
tudes. This is beyond the control of XM Satellite Radio.
Explicit Language Notice — Channels with frequent explicit language are indi-
cated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for
XM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying XM at;
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling 1-877-515-3987
Canadian Customers:
Visit www.xmradio.ca or calling 1-877-515-3987
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate,
or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers
compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM website, the
Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression
software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights includ-
ing patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
Note: this applies to XM receivers only and not XM Ready devices.
430
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987.
Ck Antenna
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the
XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding
antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
Ch Unauth
You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio. The
radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact XM® Satellite Radio for subscription informa-
tion. When a contract is canceled, you can choose “CH
000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. To listen to the
premium channel, contact XM® Satellite Radio.
No Signal
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait
until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger sig-
nal.
Loading The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait
until the unit has received the information.
Ch Off Air The channel you selected is not broadcasting any pro-
gramming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action is
required.
Ch Unavail
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for
about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous
channel or “CH 001”. If it does not change automatically,
select another channel.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
431
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■About internet radio (vehicles with the navigation system)
●Other applications can be activated while listening to internet radio.
●An iPhone cannot be connected via Bluetooth® and USB connection at the same
time. However, it is possible to recharge an iPhone while using Apps by connecting
via USB. The system uses the connection method that was used last. Therefore, if
connected via USB after Bluetooth® connection, it is necessary to reconnect the
iPhone via Bluetooth®.
●Services requiring a separate contract can also be used. For details, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.
●If internet radio has never been listened to by activating “Apps” from the “Informa-
tion” screen, the “Apps” tab will be dimmed.
432
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B dig-
ital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro-
vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
●Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Consult the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
●Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
■Certifications for XM® Satellite Radio
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Oper-
ation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est
autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de
l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
434
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Insert a disc into the disc slot.
Press and remove the disc.
To play or pause a track/file/chapter, press .
■Using the display
●Under extremely cold conditions, the screen may react slowly or operation sound
may become louder.
●If a disc is inserted with the label facing down, it cannot be played.
Inserting a disc
Ejecting a disc
Playing and pausing a track/file/chapter
435
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Playing an audio CD and MP3/WMA discs
Random playback
Repeat play
Pause
Select to play
Setting the sound (P. 495)
Selecting a track
Selecting a folder
Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has already been loaded in the disc
slot.
Select the “DISC” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.
Control icon screen
Audio CD mode MP3/WMA discs mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
436
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Selecting a track
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous track.
Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE/
SCROLL” knob to select the desired track number.
■Selecting a track from the track list
Select the track name on the screen to display the CD’s track list.
Select the desired track num-
ber.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 track groups.
“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or
“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to
scroll through the track list one by
one.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to quickly scroll up or down
the track list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.
■Fast forwarding or rewinding a track
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button.
Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a track (Audio CD)
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
437
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Selecting a folder
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous folder.
■Selecting a folder from the folder list
Select the folder name on the screen to display the following folder
list screen.
Select the desired folder num-
ber to display the folder’s file
list. From the file list, select the
desired file number.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 folder groups.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to quickly scroll up or down
the folder list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.
Selecting a folder (MP3/WMA discs)
1
2
438
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Selecting a file
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous file.
Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE/
SCROLL” knob to select the desired file number.
■Selecting a file from the file list
Select the file name on the screen to display the following file list
screen.
Select the desired file number.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 file groups.
“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or
“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to
scroll through the file list one by
one.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to quickly scroll up or down
the file list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.
■Fast forwarding or rewinding a file
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button.
Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a file (MP3/WMA discs)
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
439
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Audio CD
Select “RAND” on the screen.
“RAND” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RAND” again.
■MP3/WMA disc
●Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
random (1 folder random) folder random (1 disc random) off
●Playing all the files on a disc in random order
Select “RAND” repeatedly until “FLD.RAND” appears on the
screen.
To cancel, select “RAND” again.
When a file is skipped or the system is inoperative, select “RAND” to reset.
Random playback
440
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Audio CD
Select “RPT” on the screen.
“RPT” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RPT” again.
■MP3/WMA disc
●Repeating a file
Select “RPT” on the screen.
Each time is “RPT” selected, the mode changes as follows:
• When “RAND” is off
file repeat folder repeat off
• When “RAND” is on
file repeat off
●Repeating all of the files in a folder
Select “RPT” repeatedly until “FLD.RPT” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RPT” again.
■If you select
The display returns to the previous screen.
■Displaying the title and artist name (Audio CD)
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to
32 characters can be displayed.
■Error messages
P. 453
Repeating a track
441
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Playing DVD video
For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when
the vehicle is completely stopped with the power switch in ACCES-
SORY or ON mode and the parking brake applied. While driving in
DVD video mode, only the DVD’s audio can be heard.
When a DVD video disc is inserted while driving, the audio contents of
the main feature will automatically be played. However, some discs may
not be played from the main story.
Press the “MEDIA” button if a disc has already been loaded in the disc
slot.
Select the “DISC” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“DISC” tab is selected.
442
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Menu screen appears
Option screen appears (P. 443)
Display menu control key (P. 444)
Returns to the full screen (only when the vehicle is completely stopped
and the parking brake is applied)
Rewind
Stop
Pause
Select to play
Fast forward
Setting the sound (P. 495)
If is selected, while watching a DVD, the DVD controls will appear.
If appears on the screen when a control is selected the operation rele-
vant to the control is not permitted.
Control icon screen
Vehicles without a navigation
system
Vehicles with a navigation sys-
tem
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
443
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Select “Options” on “DVD” screen, the following screen appears.
Returns to the full screen (only when the vehicle is completely stopped
and the parking brake is applied)
Search by title/group number
Change audio language
Change angle
Display the predetermined scene and start playing from there
Change subtitle language
Change screen size
Display the image quality adjustment screen
Change initial setting
If appears on the screen when a control is selected the operation rele-
vant to the control is not permitted.
Select and hold or on the control icon screen.
DVD options screen
Vehicles without a navigation
system
Vehicles with a navigation sys-
tem
Fast forwarding/rewinding a disc
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
444
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Select “Menu” or “Top Menu” on the control icon screen.
Select if the menu control key does not appear on the menu screen.
Select the menu item using ,
, or and select
“Enter”.
: Returns to the previous screen
Note that specific items or the operating method differs from one DVD to
another. Refer to the manual that comes with the DVD disc. (The above image is
an example.)
■Searching by title
Select “Search” on the “DVD Options” screen.
Input the desired title number
and then select “OK”.
: Deletes the last input num-
ber
: Returns to the previous
screen
■Searching by chapter
Press “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button or turn the “TUNE/
SCROLL” knob.
Using the DVD menu
1
2
Searching for a desired screen
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
445
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Select “Subtitle” on the “DVD Options” screen.
Each time you select “Change”,
the next available language is
selected.
The languages available are restricted
to those available on the DVD disc.
“Hide”:Hides the subtitles
: Returns to the previous screen
Select “Audio” on the “DVD Options” screen.
Each time you select “Change”,
the next available language is
selected.
The languages available are restricted
to those available on the DVD disc.
: Returns to the previous screen
Select “Angle” on the “DVD Options” screen.
Each time you select “Change”,
the next available angle is
selected.
The angles available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
: Returns to the previous screen
Changing the subtitle language
1
2
Changing the audio language
1
2
Changing the angle (if the angle option is available)
1
2
446
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Select “Wide” on the “DVD Options” screen.
Select the desired display. After
setting, select “Save”.
Displays a 3 : 4 screen, with
either side in black
Widens the 3 : 4 screen hori-
zontally to fill the screen
Widens the 3 : 4 screen verti-
cally and horizontally, in the
same ratio, to fill the screen
: Returns to the previous
screen
Changing screen size
1
2
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
447
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Select “Display” on the “DVD Options” screen.
Select “<” or “>” to display the
desired item to be adjusted, and
then select “OK”.
The screen goes off when “Screen
Off” is selected. To turn the display
screen back on, select any button. The
selected screen appears.
Adjusting the screen
1
2
R G
Color Red Green
+ -
Tone Lighter Darker
Contrast Weaker Stronger
Brightness Darker Brighter
448
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Displaying “DVD Settings” screen
Select “DVD Settings” on the “DVD Options” screen.
Select the setting to be changed.
After you change the settings,
select “Save”.
“Default”: Restores default settings
: Returns to the previous
screen
■Setting audio language
Select “Audio Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen.
Select the desired language to be heard on the “Audio Language”
screen.
If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired
language code. (P. 450)
■Setting subtitle language
Select “Subtitle Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen.
Select the desired language to be read on the “Subtitle Language”
screen.
If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired
language code. (P. 450)
Initial DVD settings
1
2
1
2
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
449
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Setting menu language
Select “Menu Language” on the “DVD Settings” screen.
Select the desired language to be read on the “Menu Language”
screen.
If you cannot find the desired language, select “Other” and input the desired
language code. (P. 450)
■Setting angle mark
If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.
Select “Angle Mark” on the “DVD Settings” screen.
Select “On” or “Off”.
■Setting parental lock
Select “Parental Lock” on the “DVD Settings” screen.
Input the 4-digit personal code on the “Key Code” screen.
If you enter wrong numbers, select to delete the numbers.
Select a parental level (1-8) on the “Select Restriction Level” screen.
(P. 456)
■Setting the auto start
Discs that are inserted while the vehicle is in motion will automatically
start playing.
Select “Auto Start Playback” on the “DVD Settings” screen.
Select “On” or “Off”.
■Setting sound dynamic range
The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can
be adjusted.
Select “Sound Dynamic Range” on the “DVD Settings” screen.
Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
450
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Entering a language code
If you select “Other” on the “Audio Language” screen, “Subtitle Lan-
guage” screen or “Menu Language” screen you can select a language
by entering the 4-digit language code if that language is available.
Input the 4-digit language code
and then select “OK”.
: Deletes the last input digit
: Returns to the previous screen
●Language codes
Code Language Code Language Code Language
0514 English 0207 Bulgarian 0712 Galician
0618 French 0208 Bihari 0714 Guarani
0405 German 0209 Bislama 0721 Gujarati
0920 Italian 0214 Bengali,
Bangla 0801 Hausa
0519 Spanish 0215 Tibetan 0809 Hindi
2608 Chinese 0218 Breton 0818 Croatian
1412 Dutch 0301 Catalan 0821 Hungarian
1620 Portuguese 0315 Corsican 0825 Armenian
1922 Swedish 0319 Czech 0901 Interlingua
1821 Russian 0325 Welsh 0905 Interlingue
1115 Korean 0401 Danish 0911 Inupiak
0512 Greek 0426 Bhutani 0914 Indonesian
0101 Afar 0515 Esperanto 0919 Icelandic
0102 Abkhazian 0520 Estonian 0923 Hebrew
0106 Afrikaans 0521 Basque 1001 Japanese
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
451
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
0113 Amharic 0601 Persian 1009 Yiddish
0118 Arabic 0609 Finnish 1023 Javanese
0119 Assamese 0610 Fiji 1101 Georgian
0125 Aymara 0615 Faroese 1111 Kazakh
0126 Azerbaijani 0625 Frisian 1112 Greenlandic
0201 Bashkir 0701 Irish 1113 Cambodian
0205 Byelorussian 0704 Scottish-
Gaelic 1114 Kannada
1119 Kashmiri 1415 Norwegian 1914 Shona
1121 Kurdish 1503 Occitan 1915 Somali
1125 Kirghiz 1513 (Afan)
Oromo 1917 Albanian
1201 Latin 1518 Oriya 1918 Serbian
1214 Lingala 1601 Panjabi 1919 Siswati
1215 Laothian 1612 Polish 1920 Sesotho
1220 Lithuanian 1619 Pashto,
Pushto 1921 Sundanese
1222 Latvian,
Lettish 1721 Quechua 1923 Swahili
1307 Malagasy 1813 Rhaeto-
Romance 2001 Tam i l
1309 Maori 1814 Kirundi 2005 Tel ugu
1311 Macedonian 1815 Romanian 2007 Ta jik
1312 Malayalam 1823 Kinyarwanda 2008 Thai
1314 Mongolian 1901 Sanskrit 2009 Tigrinya
1315 Moldavian 1904 Sindhi 2011 Tur kme n
1318 Marathi 1907 Sango 2012 Tagalo g
1319 Malay 1908 Serbo-
Croatian 2014 Setswana
Code Language Code Language Code Language
452
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■When a rear passenger selects set up menu
Follow the directions on the warning screen that is displayed.
Under the same condition, the rear passenger can cancel the set up operation from
the front seat.
■Error messages
If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check if the region code printed on the DVD
matches the player’s region code.
If a different message is displayed: P. 453
1320 Maltese 1909 Sinhalese 2015 Tongan
1325 Burmese 1911 Slovak 2018 Turki s h
1401 Nauru 1912 Slovenian 2019 Tsonga
1405 Nepali 1913 Samoan 2020 Tatar
2023 Twi 2209 Vietnamese 2515 Yo r u b a
2111 Ukrainian 2215 Volapük 2621 Zulu
2118 Urdu 2315 Wolof
2126 Uzbek 2408 Xhosa
Code Language Code Language Code Language
453
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
CD/DVD player and DVD video disc information
Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the
problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
The error messages may differ from those shown below depending on the
language selected.
Error messages
Message Cause Correction
Procedures
No disc found. There is no disc in the
player. Insert a disc.
Check DISC
• The disc is dirty or
damaged.
• The disc is inserted
upside down.
• The disc is not play-
able with the player.
• Clean the disc.
• Insert the disc cor-
rectly.
• Confirm the disc is
playable with the
player.
DISC Error
• There is a malfunction
within the system.
• Operation is stopped
due to a high temper-
ature inside the player.
• Eject the disc.
• Eject the disc and
allow the player to
cool down.
No music files found.
This indicates that no
playable data is included
in the disc.
Eject the disc.
454
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
●The DVD player conforms to NTSC/PAL color TV formats. DVD
video discs conforming to another format such as SECAM cannot
be used.
●Region code: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating
the region in which you can use the DVD video disc. If the DVD
video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this DVD
player. If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this
player, “Region Code Error” appears on the screen. Even if the DVD
video disc does not have a region code, you may not be able to use it.
■Symbols shown on DVD video discs
DVD video discs
Symbol Meaning
NTSC/PAL Indicates NTSC/PAL format
Indicates the number of audio tracks
Indicates the number of language subtitles
Indicates the number of angles
Indicates the screen display ratios available
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates the disc’s region code
ALL: in all countries
Number: region code
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
455
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
Use only discs marked as shown above. The following products may not be playable
on your player:
●SACD
●dts CD
●Copy-protected CD
●DVD audio
●Video CD
●DVD-R
●DVD+R
●DVD-RW
●DVD+RW
●DVD-RAM
■CD/DVD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a prob-
lem is detected.
■If discs are left inside the CD/DVD player or in the ejected position for extended
periods
Discs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD/DVD player.
456
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■DVD video disc information
●DVD video discs
A DVD video disc is a Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have
adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technolo-
gies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate
encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed
depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is stored using
PCM and Dolby Digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi-
angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced
technology of DVD video.
●Viewer restrictions
This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of
the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc.
Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or
replaced with other scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
Level 2-7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.
●Multi-angle option
You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.
●Multi-language option
You can select the subtitle and audio languages.
●Region codes
The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video
disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the
disc on the DVD player. (P. 454)
●Audio
This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format
DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be played.
●Title and chapter
Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title
and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.
Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A title is comprised of one or more chapters.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
457
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Sound
Dolby Digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8, 32, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
458
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible if the CD-R or CD-RW is not
finalized. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is
scratched or marked with fingerprints.
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used:
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not
play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels (including the root)
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Discs containing multi-session recordings
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
459
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title,
artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title
and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they may be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at
least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending
on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the
file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In
some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possi-
ble at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
460
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■The Gracenote® media database
●Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related
content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
●CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One
or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents.
Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype,
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are either registered trademarks or trade-
marks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.
■Gracenote® End User License Agreement
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, Cal-
ifornia (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”)
enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-
related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote
Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Serv-
ers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
461
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these
restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical pur-
poses. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are.
For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the
Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS
IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regard-
ing the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote
reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data cat-
egories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not
obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any
time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT
WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY
LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.
copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote
462
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■DVD video precaution
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversa-
tions represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be star-
tled by louder sound effects or startled when you change to a different audio
source.
Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving
hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
463
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
NOTICE
■Discs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of discs, 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the player and/or disc insert/eject function.
●Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm)
●Low-quality or deformed discs
●Discs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
●Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off
464
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the
player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.
●Do not apply oil to the player.
●Store discs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
465
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Listening to Bluetooth® audio
The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy music played on a
portable player from the vehicle speaker via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable
of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable player
does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not
function.
Press the “MEDIA” button if a Bluetooth® audio player has already
been connected.
Select the “BT Audio” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until
the “BT Audio” tab is selected.
466
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Folder/album selection
Track selection
Displays folder/album list
Displays track list
Connection status
Connecting Bluetooth® audio
player
Setting the sound (P. 495)
Play/pause
Repeat play
Track selection/fast forward/
rewind
MEDIA button
Power
Volume
Random playback
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
468
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, you need to enter your portable
player into the system. Once registered, you can enjoy your music on the
vehicle’s audio system. (P. 566)
For the operation procedure for the portable player, consult your player’s
accompanying instruction manual.
■When “Bluetooth* Power” is turned on
When the portable player is on standby for the connection, it will be
automatically connected whenever the power switch is in either
ACCESSORY or ON mode.
■When “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off
Manually connect the portable player in accordance with the following
procedure.
Select “Connect”.
Select the desired portable
player.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Connecting Bluetooth® audio player
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
469
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
When the connection is com-
pleted, this screen is dis-
played. It is now possible to use
the portable player.
Select to play, select to
pause or press to play/pause.
Some titles may not be displayed
depending on the type of portable
player.
3
Playing Bluetooth® audio
470
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■On the audio top screen
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous folder/album.
■On the playlist screen
Select the album name on the
screen to display the playlist
screen.
Select the desired screen button.
If the folder name on the screen is selected, the track list screen is displayed.
Select the desired track name
on the screen.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 track/folder groups.
“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or
“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to
scroll through the track list one by
one.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to quickly scroll up or down
the track/folder list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.
Selecting a track/folder/album
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
471
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■On the audio top screen
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob or press “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired track number.
■On the track list screen
Select the track name on the screen to display the following track list
screen.
Select the desired track num-
ber.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 track groups.
“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or
“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to
scroll through the track list one by
one.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to quickly scroll up or down
the track list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.
■Fast forwarding and rewinding a track
Press and hold “<” or “>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to fast forward
or rewind.
Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a track
1
2
472
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Playing the tracks on the album in random order
Select “RAND” on the screen.
Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
album random all track random off
■Playing tracks from all the albums in random order
Select “RAND” repeatedly until “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RAND” again.
■Repeating a track
Select “RPT” on the screen.
Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
track repeat album repeat off
■Repeating an album
Select “RPT” repeatedly until “ALB.RPT” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RPT” again.
■If you select
The display returns to the previous screen.
■Connecting Bluetooth® audio player
●Selecting “Connect Portable Player” on the “Bluetooth*” screen also connects a
Bluetooth® audio player. (P. 566)
●When none of the selectable portable players have been registered, a screen con-
firming registration is displayed. The registration method is the same as phone reg-
istration. (P. 559)
●When the currently connected portable player is selected, a screen confirming the
selected player’s disconnection is displayed. (P. 559)
●If connection fails once, a changing connection method confirmation screen is dis-
played. If connection fails 2 or more times, a message will be displayed. When this
message is displayed, try again.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
Random playback
Repeat play
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
473
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■When using the Bluetooth® audio system
●In the following conditions, the system may not function.
• The portable player is turned off
• The portable player is not connected
• The portable player battery is low
●There may be a delay if phone connection is carried out during Bluetooth® audio
play.
●Depending on the type of portable player that is connected to the system, opera-
tion may differ slightly and certain functions may not be available.
■Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the instrument panel. If the portable player is behind the seat
or in the glove box or console box, or is touching or covered by metal objects, con-
nection status may deteriorate.
■Battery charge/signal status
This display may not correspond exactly with the portable player, and this system
does not have a charging function.
■About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
474
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Compatible models
Portable players must correspond to the following specifications:
●Bluetooth® specification
Ver. 1.1 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or higher)
●Profile
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
(Recommended: Ver. 1.4 or higher)
However, please note that some functions may be limited depending on the type of
portable player. Also, the different screen is displayed depending on which portable
player is connecting.
Please go to the website at http://www.lexus.com/ to find approved portable players
for this system.
■Certification
P. 512
■Reconnecting the portable player
If the portable player is disconnected with a poor reception when the power switch is
in ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the portable
player.
If you have switched off the portable player yourself, follow the instructions below to
reconnect:
●Select the portable player again
●Enter the portable player
■When transferring ownership of your vehicle
Be sure to remove the registered portable player from the system. (P. 561)
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not use the portable player or connect the Bluetooth® system.
NOTICE
■When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may
become hot, causing damage to the portable player.
475
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Listening to a USB memory
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the vehi-
cle speakers.
Press the “MEDIA” button if a USB memory has already been con-
nected. Select the “USB” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly
until the “USB” tab is selected.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
477
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Open the console box, open the
cover and connect a USB mem-
ory.
Turn on the power of the USB memory
if it is not turned on.
Press the “MEDIA” button.
■Play/pause
Select to play, select to pause or press to play/pause.
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to
select the next/previous folder/
album.
Connecting the USB memory
1
Playing a USB memory
2
Tag mode Folder mode
Selecting a folder/album
478
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Select the folder/album name on
the screen.
Select the desired tab and select
the desired folder, artist or album.
Character screen buttons, “ABC”,
“DEF” etc., allow a direct jump to list
entries that begin with the same letter
as the character button.
Each time the same character screen
button is selected, the list starting with
the subsequent character is displayed.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 folder/artist/album groups.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to quickly scroll up or down the folder/
artist/album list.
, : If appears to the right of an
item name, the complete name is too
long for the screen. Select to scroll
to the end of the name. Select to
move to the beginning of the name.
Selecting a folder, artist or album
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
479
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Selecting one file/track at a time
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous file/track.
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob or press “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired file/track.
■Selecting a file/track from the list
Select the file/track name on the screen to display the following file/
track list screen.
Select the desired file/track
number.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 file/track groups.
“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or
“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to
scroll through the file/track list one
by one.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to quickly scroll up or down
the file/track list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.
■Fast forwarding or rewinding a file/track
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button.
Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a file/track
1
2
480
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Playing files/tracks from a particular folder in random order
Select “RAND” on the screen.
Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
random (1 folder/album random) folder/album random (all folders/
albums random) off
■Playing the all folders/albums from a USB memory in random order
Select “RAND” repeatedly until “FLD.RAND”/“ALB.RAND” appears
on the screen.
To cancel, select “RAND” again.
■Repeating a file/track
Select “RPT” on the screen.
Each time “RPT” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
●When “RAND” is off
file/track repeat folder/album repeat off
●When “RAND” is on
file/track repeat off
■Repeating a folder/album
Select “RPT” repeatedly until “FLD.RPT”/“ALB.RPT” appears on the
screen.
To cancel, select “RPT” again.
Available except when random playback is selected
Random playback
Repeat play
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
481
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■If you select
The display returns to the previous screen.
■USB memory functions
●When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in the first folder. If
the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been
changed), the USB memory will resume playing from the same point it was last
used.
●Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again
may resolve some malfunctions.
■ When using a USB memory
You may be unable to use the instrument panel power outlet if the USB memory is
connected to the USB port at the same time.
■Error messages for USB memory
“USB Error”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“No music files found.”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the
USB memory.
■USB memory
●Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback.
●Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play
correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 3000 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
482
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
●MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to the
media/formats on which the files are recorded.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, VBR)
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the
extension .mp3 or .wma.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title, art-
ist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title
and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
483
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
●MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the USB
memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or
WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend
that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any
unnecessary folders.
• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to USB
memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the first folder. If
the same device is removed and reinserted (and the contents have not been
changed), the USB device will resume play from the same point in which it was
last used.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be skipped (not played).
●Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of at
least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and
WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the
file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In
some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
484
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not connect an USB memory or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the USB memory or its terminal
●Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside of the vehicle
may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory while it
is connected.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
485
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Listening to an iPod
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle speak-
ers.
Press the “MEDIA” button if an iPod has already been connected.
Select the “iPod” tab or press the “MEDIA” button repeatedly until the
“iPod” tab is selected.
488
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
When the track currently being played has cover art data, it can be dis-
played.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch and select “Setup”
on the “Menu” screen.
Select “Audio” on the “Setup” screen.
Select “iPod Settings”.
Select “Display Cover Art”
Select “On” or “Off”.
After iPod setting has been changed, select “OK”.
Cover art display settings
1
2
3
4
5
6
490
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Selecting one track at a time
Select “<” or “>” on the screen to select the next/previous track.
Turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob or press “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button to select the desired track.
■Selecting a track from the list
Select the track name on the screen to display the following track list
screen.
Select the desired track num-
ber.
, : Select to move the list up or
down by 5 track groups.
“PRST•TRACK” button: Press “<” or
“>” on the “PRST•TRACK” button to
scroll through the track list one by
one.
“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn the
knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to quickly scroll up or down
the track list.
, : If appears to the right of
an item name, the complete name
is too long for the screen. Select
to scroll to the end of the name.
Select to move to the beginning
of the name.
■Fast forwarding or rewinding a track
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold “<” or “>” on the
“PRST•TRACK” button.
Selecting, fast forwarding or rewinding a track
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
491
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Playing tracks in random order
Select “RAND” on the screen.
Each time “RAND” is selected, the mode changes as follows:
track shuffle album shuffle off
■Playing the albums in random order
Select “RAND” repeatedly until “ALB.RAND” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RAND” again.
Select “RPT” on the screen.
“RPT” appears on the screen.
To cancel, select “RPT” again.
■If you select
The display returns to the previous screen.
■About iPod
●“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
●Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with
safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with
iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
●iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Random playback
Repeat play
492
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■iPod cover art
●Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed.
This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (P. 488)
●It may take time to display iPod cover art, and the iPod may not be operated while
the cover art display is in process.
●Only iPod cover art that is saved in JPEG format can be displayed.
■iPod functions
●When the iPod connected to the system includes iPod video, the system can only
output the sound by selecting “Video” on the “iPod” screen.
●Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard.
●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the
iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not
be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as opposed to a sys-
tem specification), disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once again may
resolve the problem.
■When using an iPod
You maybe unable to use the instrument panel power outlet if the iPod is connected
to the USB port at the same time.
■Battery charge
When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its
battery.
■Error messages for iPod
“iPod Error”:
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“No music files found.”:
This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“Please check the iPod firmware version.”:
This indicates that the software version is not compatible. Perform the iPod firmware
updates and try again.
“iPod authorization failed.”:
This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod. Please check your iPod.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
493
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
■Compatible models
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices
can be used with this system.
■Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
494
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■While driving
Do not connect an iPod or operate the controls.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the iPod or its terminal
●Do not leave the iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is con-
nected.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port.
495
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Optimal use of the audio/video system
Select to adjust the sound
settings.
■“Sound” tab
Select “-” or “+” to adjust
the treble, mid or bass.
Select “Front” or “Rear” to
adjust the front/rear audio
balance.
Select “L” or “R” to adjust
the left/right audio bal-
ance.
■“DSP” tab
Automatic Sound Levelizer
(ASL) on/off
Surround on/off
After sound setting has been changed, select “OK”.
1
2
3
4 5
6
7
1
2
496
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■The sound quality level is adjusted individually
The treble, mid and bass levels can be adjusted for the each audio mode separately.
■About Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the vehicle
speed, wind noise or other noise.
497
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Using the AUX port
Open the console box, open the
cover and connect the portable
audio device.
Press the “MEDIA” button.
Select the “AUX” tab on the screen or press the “MEDIA” button
repeatedly to change to AUX mode.
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other adjustments
must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
499
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Press to turn the front audio system on.
Pressing the button again turns the system off.
Press to change the audio source. The audio source as follows
each time the button is pressed. If no discs are inserted in the player, or if
the external device is not connected, that mode will be skipped.
FM SAT Apps DVD player iPod or USB memory
Bluetooth® audio player AUX AM
Press “” on to increase the volume and “” to decrease the vol-
ume.
Press and hold the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Turning the power on/off
Changing the audio source
Adjusting the volume
500
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Select a radio station
Press to select a frequency band.
Press “” or “” on to seek the frequency.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold until you hear a beep.
■Select a preset station
Press to select a frequency band.
Press “” or “” on to select a preset station.
■Audio CD
Press to select the DVD player.
Press “” or “” on to select a track.
■Bluetooth® audio player
Press to select the Bluetooth® audio player.
Press “” or “” on to select an folder.
Press “” or “” on to select a file.
■iPod
Press to select the iPod.
Press “” or “” on to select a file.
Selecting a radio station
Selecting a track
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
501
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Press to select the DVD player.
Press “” or “” on to select a chapter.
■MP3 disc or WMA disc
Press to select the DVD player.
Press “” or “” on to select a folder.
Press “” or “” on to select a file.
■USB memory
Press to select the USB memory.
Press “” or “” on to select a folder.
Press “” or “” on to select a file.
Selecting a chapter (DVD video mode)
Selecting a file
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
502
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
■Fast forwarding or rewinding a chapter or file
Press and hold “” or “” on .
■Button lock function
To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 383)
■Rear control panel illumination off function
Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (P. 383)
■When “ERROR”, “WAIT” or “NO MUSIC” is shown on the display
Refer to the following and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not recti-
fied, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the disc or inside the player. The disc
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT”: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Eject the
disc and allow the player to cool down.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that an MP3/WMA file is not included in the disc.
503
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Radio mode: Selects a radio sta-
tion
Audio CD mode:
Selects a track
MP3/WMA disc mode:
Selects a file and
folder
DVD mode: Selects a chapter
Bluetooth® audio mode:
Selects a track and
album
iPod mode: Selects a track
USB memory mode:
Selects a file and
folder
Volume
Turns the power on, selects audio
source
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steer-
ing wheel.
1
2
3
504
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-3. Using the audio system
Press when the audio system is turned off.
Press the to select an audio mode.
Each press changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to
use.
Press to increase the volume and to decrease the volume.
Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Press and hold .
To cancel, press and hold again.
Press to select the radio mode.
Press or to select.
Press to select the radio mode.
Press and hold the or switch until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press either switch.
Tu r n i ng o n t h e p owe r
Changing the audio source
Adjusting the volume
Silencing a sound or pause the current operation
Selecting the preset station/channel (radio)
Seeking a radio station/channel
1
2
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
505
5-3. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
Press to select the audio CD, MP3/WMA disc, DVD, Blue-
tooth® audio, iPod, or USB memory mode.
Press or to select.
To return to the beginning of the current track, file or chapter, press the
switch once quickly.
Press to select Bluetooth® audio or USB memory mode.
Press and hold or until a beep is heard to select.
Press to select the MP3/WMA disc or USB memory mode.
Press and hold or until a beep is heard to select.
Selecting a track/file or chapter
Selecting an album
Selecting a folder
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
1
2
1
2
1
2
506
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free system (for cellular phone)
The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cellular
phone without touching it.
This system supports Bluetooth® cellular phones. Bluetooth® is a wire-
less data system that allows a cellular phone to wirelessly connect to
the hands-free system and outgoing/incoming calls.
The illustrations of the hands-free system screens shown here may
slightly vary depending on the type of the system.
Vehicles with a navigation system: The hands-free system function can
be displayed and operated on the “Side Display”. For details, refer to
the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
507
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
Off hook switch
• Sending
• Receiving
• “Phone” screen display
On hook switch
• End call
• Refuse call
You can use the microphone when
talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to can
be heard from the front speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you must register your Bluetooth® phone in
the system. (P. 515)
Telephone switch
1
2
Microphone
508
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Adjusting the volume
Press to increase the vol-
ume and to decrease the
volume.
Hold the switch in that position to con-
tinue increasing or decreasing the vol-
ume.
Back switch
Press .
To return to the previous screen.
Steering switch
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
509
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
You can check indicators such as signal strength and battery charge on
the “Phone” screen.
Connection status
Battery charge
Call area
Signal strength
Status display
1
2
3
4
Indicators Conditions
Connection status Good
No
connection
Battery charge Full Empty
Call area “Rm”: Roaming area
Signal strength Excellent Poor
510
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■When using the hands-free system
●The audio system is muted when making a call.
●If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.
●If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.
●Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.
●In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:
• When driving on unpaved roads
• When driving at high speeds
• If a window is open
• If the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone
• If the air conditioning is set to high
• There is an effect from the network of the cellular phone
■Conditions under which the system will not operate
●If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth®
●If the cellular phone is turned off
●If you are outside service range
●If the cellular phone is not connected
●If the cellular phone’s battery is low
●When the cellular phone is not connected, “No connect” is displayed.
■Bluetooth® antenna
The antenna is built into the instrument panel. If the cellular phone is behind the seat
or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status
may deteriorate.
■Battery charge/Signal status
●This display may not correspond exactly with the cellular phone itself.
●When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inaccessible by
radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.
■When using Bluetooth® audio and hands-free system at the same time
The following problems may occur.
●The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.
●Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
511
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■About the phonebook in this system
The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is con-
necting, you cannot read the registered data.
●Phonebook data
●Call history date
●Speed dial date
●Image data
●Messages
●Quick reply messages
●All phone settings
When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.
■When you release your car
Be sure to initialize your data. (P. 3 47)
■About Bluetooth®
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
512
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Compatible models
This system supports the following service.
●Bluetooth® Specification Ver. 1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1+EDR or
higher)
●Profiles
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5 or higher)
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
• MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher
• SPP (Serial Port Profile) Ver. 1.1 or higher*
*: This profile is necessary when using Apps. For details, refer to the “Navigation
System Owner’s Manual”
If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth®
phone, and take OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP service individually.
If the connected Bluetooth® phone version is older than recommended or incom-
patible, this function may not be used.
Please go to http://www.lexus.com/ to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this
system.
■Certification
FCC ID: AJDK041
IC: 775E-K041
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-
tion est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectri-
que subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionne-
ment.
For vehicles sold in Canada:
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation est
autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage préjudiciable.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
513
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
CAUTION
■FCC WARNING
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But
it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least
7.9 in. (20 cm) or more away from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements énon-
cées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les radioélec-
triques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d’exposition dans le Supplément C à
OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC.
Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme sans
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit
être installé et utilisé en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif
rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des extrémités: mains, poignets, pieds et chev-
illes).
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
514
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
CAUTION
For vehicles sold in Canada
Tout changement ou toute modification de la construction non approuvé expres-
sément par l’abonné responsable de la conformité risque d’annuler l’autorité de
l’utilisateur d’exploiter l’équipement.
Cet émetteur ne doit pas être co-implanté ou actionné en même temps qu’aucune
autre antenne ou émetteur.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using
an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by
Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the
antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radi-
ated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio
peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou inférieur)
approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques
de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le
type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équiva-
lente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité nécessaire à l’établissement d’une commu-
nication satisfaisante.
■Caution while driving
Do not use the cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth® system.
NOTICE
■When leaving the vehicle
Do not leave your cellular phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may
become hot, causing damage to the phone.
515
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
Using a Bluetooth® phone
Device name
Bluetooth® connection status
Character deletion
Make a call
To display the screen shown above, press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Phone” or press on the steering wheel.
You can register up to 5 phones in the system.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Yes”.
If 5 Bluetooth® devices have
already been registered, a regis-
tered device needs to be deleted.
(P. 519)
1
2
3
4
Registering a Bluetooth® phone
1
2
516
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Input the passcode displayed
on the screen into your phone.
For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your
cellular phone.
Depending on the type of
Bluetooth® phone being con-
nected, it may be necessary to per-
form additional steps on the phone.
A passcode is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compati-
ble Bluetooth® phones. Depend-
ing on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, a mes-
sage confirming registration may
be displayed on the Bluetooth®
phone’s screen. Respond and oper-
ate the Bluetooth® phone accord-
ing to the confirmation message.
If you want to cancel it, select “Can-
cel”.
If a completion message is dis-
played, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
517
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
There are two connection methods available — automatic and manual.
■Automatic
When you register your phone,
auto connection will be activated.
Always set it to this mode and
leave the Bluetooth® phone on
the place where connection can
be established.
When the power switch is turned
to ACCESSORY or ON mode,
the system will search for a
nearby cellular phone you have
registered. The system will con-
nect with the phone that was last
connected, if it is nearby.
When “Display Phone Status” is
set to “On”, the connection status
is displayed. (P. 569)
Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps
on the phone.
Bluetooth® phone connection
518
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Manual
When the auto connection has failed or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned
off, you must connect Bluetooth® manually.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Connect Phone”.
Select the screen button cor-
responding to the desired
phone connection.
When the cellular phone’s device
name has not been able to be
obtained, “Device 1” to “Device 5”
will be displayed in the order the
phones were registered.
This screen is displayed.
If a completion message is dis-
played, connection is complete.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
519
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■Reconnecting to the Bluetooth® phone
If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the power switch in
ACCESSORY or ON mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.
If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, it must
be connected manually, or the phone must be re-selected or re-entered.
■Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
●Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
●It may take time to connect.
■Connecting the phone while another Bluetooth® device is connected
When another Bluetooth® device is currently connected, a confirmation message
will be displayed. To disconnect the Bluetooth® device, select “Yes”.
■Connecting the phone while 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered
When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered, a registered device
needs to be deleted. Select “Yes” to delete one or more.
Select the device to be deleted, then select “Remove”, and “Yes”.
■If the Bluetooth® phone has a Bluetooth® audio function
When the Bluetooth® phone to be registered has a Bluetooth® audio function, this
audio function will be registered automatically at the same time and confirmation
message may be displayed. If this screen is displayed, select “Yes” to connect the
audio function or select “No” to cancel the connection.
520
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Once the Bluetooth® phone is registered, you can make a call using the
following procedure:
■Dialing
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Input the phone number.
To delete the inputted phone num-
ber, select .
Select or press on the steering wheel.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be nec-
essary to perform additional steps on the phone.
■Dialing from the phonebook
You can dial a number from the phonebook data imported from your
cellular phone. The system has one phonebook for each phone. Up to
1000 entries may be stored in each phonebook. (P. 537)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data to
call from the list.
Making a call
1
2
3
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
521
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
Choose the number and then
select or press on
the steering wheel.
■When the phonebook is empty
If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the phone-
book cannot be transferred.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
PBAP compatible models
Select “Yes”.
PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible models
Select “Transfer”.
4
1
2
3
3
522
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Transfer the phonebook data
to the system using the Blue-
tooth® phone.
This screen appears while transfer-
ring. To cancel this function, select
“Cancel”.
Depending on the type of cellular
phone, OBEX authentication may
be required when transferring
phonebook data. Enter “1234” into
the Bluetooth® phone.
When the data transfer from a
PBAP incompatible but OPP
compatible model is complete,
“Done” will appear on the
screen. Select “Done”.
■Calling using speed dial
You can make a call using numbers registered from the phonebook.
(P. 537)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired tab and
choose the desired number to
make a call.
4
5
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
523
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■Dialing from history
You can call using the call history which has the 4 functions below.
“All”: All the numbers below which were memorized
“Missed”: Calls which you missed
“Incoming”: Calls which you received
“Outgoing”: Numbers which you called
You can call using the 25 most recently called numbers shown by “All”
tab while driving.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired tab and
choose the desired data from
the list.
Select or press on
the steering wheel.
1
2
3
4
524
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Calling using voice recognition
You can call by giving a voice command. (P. 353)
Press .
The “Call <name> <type>” and “Dial <number>” operating procedures are
explained here. Other operating procedures are also similar.
●Calling by name
You can call by giving a name registered in the phonebook.
(P. 537)
Press .
Following the system guid-
ance, wait for the beep and
then after saying “Call” say the
desired name, or the name and
type of phone.
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say “Dial”.
(You can also call by pressing on the steering wheel.)
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
525
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
●Calling by dial number
You can call by giving a phone number
Press .
Following the system guid-
ance, wait for the beep and
then after saying “Dial” say the
phone number.
Following the system guidance, wait for the beep and then say “Dial”.
(You can also call by pressing on the steering wheel.)
■Calling using SMS/MMS message
You can call using the SMS (Short Message Service)/MMS (Multime-
dia Messaging Service) message sender’s phone number.
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Messages”.
When “Message Transfer” is set to
“Off”, a confirmation screen will be
displayed. Select “Yes”.
Select the “SMS/MMS” tab and then select the desired received
message from the list.
The tab display may vary depending on the type of cellular phone.
Select or press on the steering wheel.
■Calling using POI (vehicles with the navigation system)
You can make a call using a Point Of Interest.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
526
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Call history list
●If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone book,
the name is displayed in the call history.
●If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in
the call history.
●Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system.
■When driving
The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phonebook”, and “Dialing from history”
(except for call using the 25 most recently called numbers shown by “All” tab) are
unavailable.
■When calling by registered name in the phonebook
●When “Call <name> <type>” on the “Shortcut Menu” screen is dimmed, the phone-
book’s voice command recognition cannot be used. Check the Bluetooth® con-
nection and if the contacts have been transferred to the system.
●Short or abbreviated names in the phonebook may not be recognized. Change
names in the phonebook to full names.
●Sometimes a voice recognition result confirmation screen will be displayed. After
confirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.
●When the system recognizes multiple names from the phonebook, a name candi-
date list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired name is not displayed on the
top of the screen, say the number of the name from the candidate list (number 1 and
number 2) to select a name from the candidate list.
●When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the phonebook, a candi-
date list will be displayed. If the desired phone number is not displayed on the top of
the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candidate list
(number 1 and number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
527
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■When calling by phone number
●Say the phone number one digit at a time. For example, if the phone number is
2345678, say “two three four five six seven eight”.
●The system can recognize the following types of phone numbers:
• 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
• 7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers)
• 10 digit numbers (Area code + Local phone number)
• 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code + Local phone number)
●As the system cannot recognize additional numbers, say the complete number
without stopping.
●When the system recognizes multiple phone numbers, a phone number candidate
list will be displayed on the screen. If the desired phone number is not displayed on
the top of the screen, say the number of the desired phone number from the candi-
date list (number 1 and number 2) to select a phone number from the candidate list
■International calls
To dial a phone number that is not a 3, 7, 10 or 11 digit number, for example an inter-
national number, use “International Call”.
Press on the steering wheel to display the “Shortcut Menu” screen and say-
ing “Main menu” or select “Main Menu”.
Say “Use a phone”.
Say “International call”.
Up to 24 digits can be recognized when using the international call function. The
number can also be divided into multiple groups and recognized.
You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the cellular phone in
use.
■Calling by using the latest call history item
Press on the steering wheel to display the “Phone” screen.
Press on the steering wheel to display the “Call History” screen.
Press on the steering wheel to select the most recent number in the history.
Select or press on the steering wheel.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
528
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■To cancel voice recognition
●Press and hold .
●Press on the steering wheel.
●Select “Cancel”.
■When using voice recognition
Use correct commands and speak clearly, otherwise the system may not correctly
recognize the command. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to rec-
ognize the desired command.
When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a
sound.
Select or press on the
steering wheel.
■To refuse a call
Select or press on the steering wheel.
■To adjust the incoming call volume
Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume switch
on the steering wheel.
■International calls
Received international calls may not be displayed correctly depending on the cellu-
lar phone in use.
Receiving a call
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
529
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.
■To adjust the incoming call volume
Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume switch
on the steering wheel.
■To prevent the other party from hearing your voice
Select “Mute”.
Speaking on the phone
530
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Inputting tones
When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank,
you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phonebook.
Select “0-9” on the “Call” screen.
Input the number.
If repeated tone symbols* are
stored in the phonebook, “Send”
and “Clear” are displayed on the
right side of the screen.
*: Repeated tone symbols are sym-
bols or numbers displayed as p or
w, that come after the phone num-
ber.
(e.g. 056133w0123p#1✽)
Confirm the number displayed on the screen, and select “Send”.
If you select “Clear”, this function will end.
■To transfer a call
Select “Handset Mode” to change from hands-free call to cellular
phone call. Select “Handsfree Mode” to change from cellular phone
call to hands-free call.
■To hang up
Select or press on the steering wheel.
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
531
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■Call waiting
When a connected call is interrupted by the third party, the incoming
call message will be displayed.
●To talk with the other party: Select or press on the steer-
ing wheel.
●To refuse the call: Select or press on the steering wheel.
Everytime you select or press on the steering wheel after a
call is interrupted, you will be switched to the other party.
If your cellular phone is not accepted in HFP Ver. 1.5, this function can-
not be used.
■Transferring calls
●It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to a cellular phone while driving.
●If you transfer from a cellular phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be
displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.
●Transfer method and operation may vary according to the cellular phone used.
●For operation of the cellular phone in use, see the phone’s manual.
■Repeated tone symbols
When the “p” pause tone is used, after waiting 2 seconds the tone data up until the
next pause tone will be automatically sent. When the “w” pause tone is used, the tone
data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after user operation.
■While driving
Key input is unavailable.
■Voice recognition during a call
“Send Tones” can be operated by voice recognition. (P. 353)
■Interrupt call operation
Interrupt call operation may differ from depending on your phone company and the
cellular phone.
532
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Received messages can be forwarded from the connected Bluetooth®
phone, enabling checking and replying (Quick reply).
■Checking a message
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Messages” on the “Phone” screen.
Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be nec-
essary to perform additional steps on the phone.
When “Message Transfer” is set to “Off”, a confirmation screen will be dis-
played. Select “Yes”.
Select the desired message to
check.
The text of the message is not dis-
played while driving.
Selecting “Previous” or “Next” dis-
plays the previous or next message.
Select “Play” to start reading out of the message. Select “Stop” to
stop the function.
■To adjust the message reading out volume
Select “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume switch
on the steering wheel.
■Replying a message (Quick reply)
Select “Reply” on the desired
message screen.
Using a Bluetooth® phone message
1
2
3
4
1
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
533
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
Select the desired message.
Select “Send”.
While the message is being sent, a
sending message screen is dis-
played.
■To check the message
●Messages are displayed in the appropriate connected Bluetooth® phone’s regis-
tered mail address folder. Select the tab of the desired folder to be displayed.
●Only received messages on the connected Bluetooth® phone can be displayed.
●When the received message is an e-mail and “Update Message Read Status on
Phone” is set to “On”, “Mark as Unread” or “Mark as Read” can be selected. Select
“Mark as Unread” to mark mails that have been read on the Bluetooth® phone as
unread. Conversely, select “Mark as Read” to mark mails that have not been read
on the Bluetooth® phone as read. (P. 551)
■Calling using SMS/MMS message
You can call using the SMS (Short Message Service)/MMS (Multimedia Messaging
Service) message sender’s phone number. (P. 525)
■If the message delivery failed
If message delivery has failed, a notification will be displayed on the screen.
Select “Retry” to attempt to send the message again or select “Cancel” to cancel.
■Editing a quick reply message
You can edit the “Quick Reply Messages”. (P. 553)
■New message notification
If “New Message Pop-up” and “New Message Voice Notification” are set to “On”, a
notification appears on the screen and a voice notification will be heard when a new
message arrives, select “Read” to check the message, also to check the message
later, select “Ignore”. When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to “On”, the mes-
sage will be automatically read out. (P. 551)
2
534
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting the hands-free system (for cellular phone)
Phone sound settings
Phonebook settings
Message settings
Phone display settings
To display the screen shown above, press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”, and select “Phone” on the “Setup”
screen.
You can set the hands-free system to your desired settings.
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
535
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■Setting the volume
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 534)
Select “Phone Sound Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Choose the volume setting
switch.
“Call Volume”: changes the
speaker volume
“Ring Tone Volume”: changes the
ring tone volume
Select “-” or “+” to lower or
raise the volume, and then
select “OK”.
When you complete all settings, select “Save”.
Phone sound settings
1
2
3
4
5
536
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Setting the ring tone
Display the “Phone Settings” screen. (P. 534)
Select “Phone Sound Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Select “Ring Tone” on the “Phone Sound Settings” screen.
Select the screen button cor-
responding to the desired ring
tone.
Ring tones can be heard by select-
ing the screen buttons, and then
“OK”.
When you complete setting, select “Save”.
■Adaptive volume control
When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the system automatically raises the
volume.
■To return to the default phone sound settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
1
2
3
4
5
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
537
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
The phonebook manages a maximum of 5 phonebooks in total. The data
for 1000 contacts (up to 3 numbers per contact) can be registered in
each phonebook.
Setting the phonebook
Setting the speed dials
Deleting the call history
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”,
and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
Select “Phonebook” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
■Setting the phonebook
●Transferring a phone number
You can transfer the phone numbers in your Bluetooth® phone to the
system. Operation methods differ between PBAP compatible and
PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones. If your
cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the phonebook
cannot be transferred.
Phonebook settings
1
2
3
1
2
538
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “Transfer Contacts”.
Select “Update Contacts”.
Transfer the phonebook data
to the system using the
Bluetooth® phone.
This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the cellular phone
model.
Depending on the type of cellular
phone, OBEX authentication may
be required when transferring
phonebook data. Enter “1234” into
the Bluetooth® phone.
If you wish to cancel the transfer
before it finishes, select “Cancel”.
1
2
3
4
5
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
539
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
PBAP compatible models automatic data transfer setting
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “Transfer Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
Select the item to be set.
“Automatically Download Con-
tacts”: Transfer the phonebook
from a connected cellular phone.
“Automatically Download Call His-
tory”: transfer the call history from a
connected cellular phone.
Select “On”, and then “Save”.
For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “Transfer Contacts”.
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
540
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Select “Replace Contacts” or
“Add Contacts”.
In the case that the phonebook
contains phonebook data, this
screen is displayed.
Transfer the phonebook data
to the system using the
Bluetooth® phone.
Depending on the type of cellular
phone, OBEX authentication may
be required when transferring
phonebook data. Enter “1234” into
the Bluetooth® phone.
If you wish to cancel the transfer
before it finishes, select “Cancel”.
If “Add Contacts” is selected and
there is an interruption during the
transfer of data, the phonebook
data transferred until then will be
stored in the system. Please note,
this is not the case when “Cancel” is
selected.
When the transfer is complete, “Done” will appear on the screen.
Select “Done”.
4
5
6
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
541
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
●Registering the phonebook data
You can register the phonebook data. Up to 3 numbers per person can
be registered. New phonebook data cannot be added for PBAP com-
patible Bluetooth® phones.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “New Contact” on the “Contacts” screen.
Input the name, and select
“OK”.
Input the phone number, and
select “OK”.
If you want to use the tone signal
after the phone number, input the
tone signal too.
Select the desired phone type.
When two or less numbers in total are registered to this contact, this
screen is displayed. When you want to add a number to this contact,
select “Yes”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
542
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
●Editing the phonebook data
You can register the phone number separately. Phonebooks cannot be
edited for PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “Edit Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
Choose the data to edit.
Select the desired name or
number.
Edit the name or number. After editing, select “Save”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
543
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
●Deleting the phonebook data
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “Delete Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, select “Select All”.
Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If every-
thing is correct, select “Yes”.
1
2
3
4
5
544
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Phonebook data
Phonebook data is managed for every registered phone. When another phone is
connecting, you cannot read the registered data.
When selling or disposing of the vehicle, delete all your data on the system.
For PBAP compatible phones, delete the phonebook data after setting “Automati-
cally Download Contacts” to “Off”. (P. 539)
■Setting the phonebook in a different way (To display the “Contacts” screen)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
Select “Manage Contacts” on the “Contacts” screen.
■When another Bluetooth® device is connected during transferring a phonebook
●For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones
If another Bluetooth® device is connected when transferring phonebook data,
depending on the phone, the connected Bluetooth® device may need to be dis-
connected.
●For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones
When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation message will be
displayed. If you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
545
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■Transferring the phone number data in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Transfer” on the “Contacts” screen.
The “Transfer Contacts” screen is displayed. The following operations are per-
formed in the same manner as when they are performed from the “Setup” screen.
■Editing the phonebook data in a different way
●From “Contact” screen
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.
Select “Edit” on the “Contact” screen.
Follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data” from step . (P. 542)
●From “Call History” screen
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Select “Add to Contacts” or “Update Contact” on the “Call History” screen.
If you select “Add to Contacts”, follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data” from
step . (P. 542)
If you select “Update Contact”, follow the steps “Editing the phonebook data”
from step . (P. 542)
■Deleting the phonebook data in a different way (PBAP incompatible but OPP
compatible models)
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.
Select “Delete” on the “Contact” screen.
A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, select “Yes”.
■When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted.
The phonebook data will be deleted at the same time.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6 5
1
2
3
4
5
5
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
546
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Registering the speed dial
You can register the desired phone number from the phonebook. Up to
18 numbers per phone can be registered.
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “New”.
Choose the data to register.
Setting the speed dials
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
547
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
Select the desired phone num-
ber.
Select the switch you want to
register the number in.
If you select a switch you registered before, a confirmation message
will be displayed. If you want to replace it, select “Yes”.
■Deleting the speed dial
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Select “Delete” on the “Speed Dials” screen.
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, select “Select
All”.
Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If every-
thing is correct, select “Yes”.
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
548
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Setting the speed dials in a different way
●To display the “Speed Dials” screen
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Options” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
●To display the “Contacts” screen
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Options” on the “Contacts” screen.
Select “Manage Speed Dials” on the “Contacts” screen.
■Registering the speed dial in a different way
●From “Speed Dial” screen
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Speed Dials” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “(add new)” on the “Speed Dial” screen.
Select “Yes” to set new speed dial.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Select the desired phone number.
Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial” from step . (P. 546)
●From “Contact” screen
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Contacts” on the “Phone” screen.
Choose the desired data from the list.
Select “Options” on the “Contact” screen.
Select “Set Speed Dial” on the “Contact” screen.
Select the desired phone number.
Follow the steps “Registering the speed dial” from step . (P. 546)
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 6
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
549
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
The call history can be deleted. For PBAP compatible phones, delete the
call history after setting “Automatically Download Call History” to “Off”.
(P. 539)
Display the “Phonebook Settings” screen. (P. 537)
Select “Delete Call History” on the “Phonebook Settings” screen.
Choose the desired history to
delete.
Choose the data to delete.
You can select multiple data and
delete them at the same time.
To delete all data, select “Select
All”.
Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If every-
thing is correct, select “Yes”.
Deleting call history
1
2
3
4
5
550
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Deleting call history in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Delete” on the “Call History” screen.
Follow the steps “Deleting call history” from step . (P. 549)
■Deleting after call history has been displayed
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Call History” on the “Phone” screen.
Select the desired history to delete.
Select “Delete”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,
select “Yes”.
1
2
3
4 4
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
551
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
You can change the message settings.
Message forwarding from cellular phone on/off
New message notification display on/off
New message voice notification on/off
Changing new message notification volume
Changing new message voice notification tone
Automatic message read out function on/off
Changing a message read out volume
Cellular phone’s message read and unread status update function on/
off
Editing “Edit Quick Reply Messages”
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”,
and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
Select “Messaging Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Message settings
Page 1 Page 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
552
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Changing the new message notification volume
Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (P. 551)
Select “New Message Notification Volume” on the “Messaging Set-
tings” screen.
Select “-” or “+” to lower or
raise the volume, and then
“OK”.
When you complete setting, select “Save”.
■Changing the new message notification tone
Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (P. 551)
Select “New Message Notification Tone” on the “Messaging Set-
tings” screen.
Select the desired new mes-
sage notification tone.
New message notification tones
can be heard by selecting the
screen buttons, and then “OK”.
When you complete setting, select “Save”.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
553
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■Changing the message read out volume
Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (P. 551)
Select “Message Readout Volume” on the “Messaging Settings”
screen.
Select “-” or “+” to lower or
raise the volume, and then
“OK”.
When you complete setting, select “Save”.
■Editing the quick reply messages
Quick reply messages can be edited. 15 messages have already been
stored.
Display the “Messaging Settings” screen. (P. 551)
Select “Edit Quick Reply Messages” on the “Messaging Settings”
screen.
Select the screen button cor-
responding to the desired
message.
Edit the message. After editing, select “OK” and then “Save”.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
554
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■To display the “Message settings” screen in a different way
Display the “Phone” screen. (P. 515)
Select “Messages” on the “Phone” screen.
Select “Options” on the “Messages” screen.
■Editing the quick reply messages in a different way
Display the desired message on “Message” screen. (P. 532)
Select “Reply” on the desired message screen.
Select “Edit” on the “Quick Reply Messages”.
Select the screen button corresponding to the desired message.
When you complete editing, select “OK” and then on the “Edit Quick Reply
Message” screen.
■Adaptive volume control
When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the system automatically raises the
volume.
■To return to the default message settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
555
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
Depending on the phone, this function may not be available even if the
phone is PBAP compatible.
Changing the incoming call display mode
Changing the display phonebook transfer status on/off*
Changing the display call history transfer status on/off*
Changing the contact image during incoming call on/off*
Changing the rotate contact image*
*: For PBAP compatible models
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”,
and select “Phone” on the “Setup” screen.
Select “Phone Display Settings” on the “Phone Settings” screen.
Phone display settings
Vehicles without a navigation
system
Vehicles with a navigation sys-
tem
1
2
3
4
15
1
2
556
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Changing the incoming call display mode
You can select the method of the incoming call display.
Display the “Phone Display Settings” screen. (P. 555)
Select “Incoming Call Display Mode” on the “Phone Display Set-
tings” screen.
Vehicles without a navigation system
Select “Full Screen” or “Drop
Down”, and select “Save”.
“Full Screen”: The hands-free
screen is displayed when a call is
received, and you can operate the
system from that screen.
“Drop Down”: A message is dis-
played at the top of the screen, and
you can only operate the system
with the steering switches.
Vehicles with a navigation system
Select “Main Screen” or “Side
Screen”, and select “Save”.
“Main Screen”: The hands-free
screen is displayed when a call is
received, and you can operate the
system from that screen.
“Side Screen”: A message is dis-
played at the side screen, and you
can only operate the system with
the steering switches.
1
2
3
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
557
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■Changing the rotating contact images
For PBAP compatible models, when “Contact Image for Incoming
Calls” is set to “On”, images stored together with phone numbers in the
cellular phone’s phonebook will be transferred and displayed during
the incoming call. The orientation of the image can be set.
Display the “Phone Display Settings” screen. (P. 555)
Select “Rotate Contact Images” on the “Phone Display Settings”
screen.
Choose the desired orientation of the image to be displayed, and
then “Save”.
■To return to the default detailed phone settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
1
2
3
558
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting the Bluetooth®
Registered Devices
Connect Phone
Connect Portable Player
Detailed Bluetooth® settings
To display the screen shown above, press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select “Setup”, select “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”
screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
You can confirm and change the Bluetooth® settings.
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
559
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■Registering a Bluetooth® devices
Bluetooth® devices compatible with phones (HFP) and portable play-
ers (AVP) can be registered simultaneously. Phones (HFP) and porta-
ble players (AVP) (maximum of 5) can be registered.
Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.
Select “Add New” to register a
Bluetooth® device to the sys-
tem.
When 5 Bluetooth® devices have
already been registered, a regis-
tered device needs to be deleted.
Select “Yes” to delete one or more.
Select the device to be deleted,
then select “Remove”, and then
“Yes”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
Registered devices
1
2
3
560
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Input the passcode displayed
on the screen into the
Bluetooth® device.
A passcode is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compati-
ble Bluetooth® devices. Depend-
ing on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, a mes-
sage confirming registration may
be displayed on the Bluetooth®
phone’s screen. Respond and oper-
ate the Bluetooth® phone accord-
ing to the confirmation message.
For the operation of the
Bluetooth® device, see the manual
that comes with it.
If you want to cancel it, select “Can-
cel”.
If a completion message is dis-
played, registration is complete.
If an error message is displayed,
follow the guidance on the screen
to try again.
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
561
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■Removing a Bluetooth® device
Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.
Select “Remove” on the “Registered Devices” screen.
Choose the desired device.
You can select multiple device and
delete them at the same time.
To remove all devices, select
“Select All”.
Select “Remove”. A confirmation message will be displayed. If every-
thing is correct, select “Yes”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■Editing a Bluetooth® device
You can see the information of the Bluetooth® device on the system or
edit.
●Changing a device name
Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.
Select “Details”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
563
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
●Setting portable player connection method
Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)
Select “Registered Devices” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.
Select “Details” on the “Registered Devices” screen.
Select the device to be edited.
Select “Connect Portable
Player from”.
Select the desired connection
method, and select “OK”.
“Vehicle”: Select to connect the
audio system to the portable player.
“Portable Player”: Select to con-
nect the portable player to the
audio system.
Depending on the portable player,
the “Vehicle” or “Portable Player”
connection method may be best.
As such, refer to the manual that
comes with the portable player.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
1
2
3
4
5
6
564
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Editing the “Device Name”
If you change a device name, the name registered in your cellular phone is not
changed.
■About “Device Address”
The address peculiar to the system. It cannot be changed. If you have registered two
Bluetooth® phones with the same device name and you cannot distinguish one from
the other, refer to this address.
■“My Phone Number”:
The phone number of the Bluetooth® phone is displayed on the screen. Depending
on the type of phone, the phone number may not be displayed.
■“Profiles”:
The compatibility profile of the Bluetooth® device is displayed on the screen.
■“Connect Portable Player from”:
There are 2 portable player connection settings available; “Vehicle” and “Portable
Player”.
■When you delete a Bluetooth® phone
The phonebook data will be deleted at the same time.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
565
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
If multiple Bluetooth® phones are registered, follow the procedure below
to select the Bluetooth® phone to be used. You can only use one phone at
a time.
Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)
Select “Connect Phone” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.
Choose the phone to be con-
nected.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connect the phone.
If a completion message is dis-
played, connection is complete.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■When another Bluetooth® device is connected during registering or selecting a
phone
●When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation message will be
displayed. If you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.
●The currently connected Bluetooth® phone’s screen button will have a Bluetooth®
mark displayed on it. If the currently connected Bluetooth® phone’s screen button
is selected, the Bluetooth® phone can be disconnected. Select “Yes” to disconnect.
■Connecting the phone while Bluetooth® audio is playing
Bluetooth® audio will stop temporarily.
Selecting a Bluetooth® phone
1
2
3
566
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
If multiple portable players are registered, follow the procedure below to
select the portable player phone to be used. You can only use one porta-
ble player at a time.
Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)
Select “Connect Portable Player” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.
Choose the portable player to
be used.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed
when you connect the portable
player.
If a completion message is dis-
played, connection is complete.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■When another Bluetooth® device is connected during registering or selecting a
portable player
●When another Bluetooth® device is connected, a confirmation message will be
displayed. If you want to disconnect it, select “Yes”.
●The currently connected portable player’s screen button will have a Bluetooth®
mark displayed on it. If the currently connected portable player’s screen button is
selected, the portable player can be disconnected. Select “Yes” to disconnect.
Selecting a portable player
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
567
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
You can confirm and change the Bluetooth® settings.
Changing the device connection status
Changing the name of the connected device.
Changing the passcode that you registered your Bluetooth® device in
the system
The address peculiar to the system
You cannot change this address. If the same device name is displayed on the
screen of your device, refer to it.
The compatibility profile of the Bluetooth® device
To display the screen above, follow the steps below.
Display the “Bluetooth*” screen. (P. 558)
Select “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” on the “Bluetooth*” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
Detailed Bluetooth settings
Page 1 Page 2
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
568
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Changing Bluetooth* power
The Bluetooth* device is automatically connected when you turn the
power switch to ACCESSORY or ON mode. You can change
between “On” or “Off”.
Display the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 567)
Select “Bluetooth* Power” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings”
screen.
Select “On” or “Off”, and then
“Save”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■Editing the device name
Display the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 567)
Select “Device Name” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Input the device name, and select “OK”.
Select “Save” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
569
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
5
Interior features
■Editing the passcode
Display the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 567)
Select “Passcode” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Input a passcode, and select
“OK”.
Select “Save” on the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
■Bluetooth® device connection status display settings
When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On” and the power switch is in ACCES-
SORY or ON mode, the Bluetooth® phone and portable player’s con-
nection status can be displayed.
(P. 568)
Display the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen. (P. 567)
Select “Display Phone Status” or “Display Portable Player Status” on
the “Detailed Bluetooth* Settings” screen.
Select “On”, and then “Save”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
570
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■While driving
You cannot change the state of “Bluetooth* Power” from “On” to “Off” while driving,
but it can be changed from “Off” to “On”.
■To return to the default Bluetooth® settings
Select “Default”, and then “Yes”.
If the state of “Bluetooth* Power” is changed from “Off” to “On”, Bluetooth® con-
nection will begin.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
571
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-5. Using the interior lights
5
Interior features
Interior lights list
When the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum and the tail
lights are on, the inside door handle lights, the ornament lights and the footwell
lights will turn off. (P. 91)
Outer foot lights
Shift lever light
Interior light (P. 572)
Front personal lights
(P. 572)
Inside door handle lights
Rear personal lights (P. 572)
Ornament lights
Door courtesy lights
Power window switch lights
Footwell lights
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
572
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-5. Using the interior lights
Turns the light on/off
The rear personal lights are also
turned on/off by the interior light
operation. However, if the interior light
is turned off after being turned on
while the rear personal lights are
turned on, the rear personal lights will
not turn off simultaneously.
Turns the door position on
■Front
Turns the light on/off
■Rear
Turns the light on/off
If the lights are turned on by interior
light operation, the lights cannot
turn off by pressing the switch.
Interior light
1
2
Personal lights
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
573
5-5. Using the interior lights
5
Interior features
■Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to power switch mode, the presence
of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors
are opened/closed.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
If the interior lights remain on when the power switch is turned off, the lights will go
off automatically after 20 minutes.
■Customization
Setting (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
575
5-6. Using the storage features
5
Interior features
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause
the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with
other stored items.
●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored
items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire
hazard.
■When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use
Keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to
an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.
576
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-6. Using the storage features
Open (press the button)
Unlock with the mechanical key
Lock with the mechanical key
■Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
■Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (P. 142)
■Removing the insert
The insert inside the glove box can be removed.
■The glove box door
An SRS knee airbag for the front passenger’s seat is built into the glove box door.
(P. 38)
Glove box
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
577
5-6. Using the storage features
5
Interior features
Using with half-open
Grip the knob to release the lock,
and slide the armrest as far back.
Using with fully open
Grip the knob to release the lock,
and lift the armrest to open.
■Tray in the console box
■Console box light
The console box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
Console box
1
2
The tray slides forward/backward and can be
removed.
CAUTION
When using the console box with half-open, do not apply too much load on the
armrest. Doing so may damage the armrest and may cause you to injure yourself.
578
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-6. Using the storage features
■Front
To open, press down and release
the cup holder lid.
■Rear
To open, pull down the armrest
and press in and release the rear
cup holder on the armrest.
■Removing the separate tray (front cup holder)
■When stowing the cup holders (rear cup holder)
Stow the cup holder with the armrest down. The cup holder cannot be stowed if the
armrest is not down.
Cup holders
The cup holder insert may be removed for
cleaning.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
579
5-6. Using the storage features
5
Interior features
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holders
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the rear cup holder
Stow the cup holder before stowing the armrest.
580
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-6. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
Type A Type B
Press in the button. Pull up the lever to release the lock
and lift the lid.
Type C (if equipped)
Open the lid.
CAUTION
■Using the auxiliary boxes (type C)
Do not use the auxiliary box as an ashtray.
Doing so may cause a fire.
582
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-6. Using the storage features
Pull the strap upwards to lift up the
luggage mat.
Loosen the belt
Tighten the belt
Luggage mat
Warning reflector storage belt
1
2
CAUTION
■When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their stowed positions.
NOTICE
■Luggage hook weight capacity
Do not hang any object heavier than 11 lb. (5 kg) on the luggage hook.
583
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
Sun visors and vanity mirrors
To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side posi-
tion, flip down, unhook, and swing
it to the side.
To use the side extender, place
the visor in the side position, then
slide it backward.
Slide the cover to open.
The light turns on when the cover is
opened.
Sun visors
1
2
3
Vanity m irrors
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the hybrid system is off.
585
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
Ashtrays
Open the ashtray lid.
To remove the ashtray, pull the ashtray
lid upwards.
: If equipped
CAUTION
■When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an
accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open ashtray or ash
flying out.
■To prevent fire
●Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
●Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
586
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
Power outlets
■Front
Open the lid.
■Rear (if equipped)
Open the lid.
Open the lid.
The power outlets can be used for the following components:
12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A.
120 V AC (if equipped): Accessories that use less than 100 W.
12 V
120 V AC (if equipped for rear only)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
587
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
■The power outlets can be used when
12 V: The power switch is in ACCESSORY or ON mode.
120 V AC: The power switch is in ON mode.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlets
Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets are not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlets may cause a short circuit.
■To prevent the fuse from being blown
12 V:
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
120 V AC:
Do not use a 120 V AC appliance that requires more than 100W. If a 120 V AC
appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit will cut
the power supply.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not use the power outlets longer than necessary when the hybrid system is off.
■Appliances that may not operate properly (120 V AC)
The following 120 V AC appliances may not operate properly even if their power
consumption is under 100 W:
●Appliances with high initial peak wattage
●Measuring devices that process precise data
●Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
588
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
Heated steering wheel
Turns the heater on/off
The indicator light comes on when the
heater is operating.
■Operating condition
The power switch is in ON mode.
■Timer
The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.
■If the indicator light flashes
Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the button
again. If the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occurring. Turn the
heated steering wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
: If equipped
The heated steering wheel heats the side grips of the steering wheel.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
589
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
CAUTION
■Burns
Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes
in contact with the steering wheel when the heated steering wheel is on:
●Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
●Persons with sensitive skin
●Persons who are fatigued
●Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold
remedies, etc.)
NOTICE
■To prevent the 12-volt battery from being discharged
Turn the switch off when the hybrid system is off.
590
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters/seat ventilators
■Front seats
Turns the seat heater on
Hi
Mid
Lo
Off
The indicator light (yellow) on the
switch and the level indicator lights
(green) come on.
■Rear seats (if equipped)
Turns the seat heater on
Hi
Mid
Lo
Off
The level indicator lights (yellow)
come on.
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good air-
flow by blowing air from the seats.
Seat heaters
1
2
13
4
1
2
1
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
591
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
Blows air from the seat
Hi
Mid
Lo
Off
The indicator light (green) on the
switch and the level indicator lights
(green) come on.
■The seat heaters/seat ventilators can be used when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■The seat heater timer control
The seat heater automatically switches from Hi Mid Lo Off. The switching
timing differs depending on the temperature inside the cabin etc. when the seat
heater was operated.
■Automatic operation of the seat heater during Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating operations and fan speed of the air conditioning
system to enhance fuel efficiency. If the driving mode select switch is switched to Eco
drive mode in cold temperatures, the seat heater may be automatically operated to
assist heating performance.
■Button lock function (vehicles with rear control panel)
To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 383)
■Rear control panel illumination off function (vehicles with rear control panel)
Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (P. 383)
Seat ventilators (front seats only)
1
2
13
4
592
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■Burns
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
●Do not use seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or
overheating.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the seat heaters/seat ventilators
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters/seat ventilators off when the hybrid system is off.
594
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
Rear sunshade/rear door sunshades
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the button
shown below.
■From the front seats
Pull up the lever to release the
lock.
Slide the armrest.
Raise/lower
■From the rear seats (if equipped)
Raise/lower
: If equipped
Rear sunshade
1
2
1
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
595
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
Pull the tab of the rear door sun-
shade and hook the shade on using
the anchors.
To retract the rear door sunshade,
unhook the shade and retract it slowly.
■The rear sunshade can be used when
The power switch is in ON mode.
■Operating the rear sunshade after the hybrid system is turned off
The rear sunshade can be operated for approximately 1 minute even after the power
switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
■Reverse operation feature
To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade automatically lowers when the
shift lever is shifted to R.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
●The button is pressed again.*
●Shift the shift lever into P.
●The shift lever is shifted out of R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h).
If the hybrid system is off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the
reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the hybrid system is
turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the
sunshade again, press the button.
*: Occasionally, the reverse function may not be carried out after the switch has
been pressed. Repeat the above operation to operate the function.
Rear door sunshades
596
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
■Button lock function (vehicles with rear control panel)
To prevent inadvertent operation, some buttons on the rear armrest can be locked.
(P. 383)
■Rear control panel illumination off function (vehicles with rear control panel)
Control panel illumination on the rear armrest can be turned off. (P. 383)
■Customization
Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates can be changed.
(Customizable features: P. 807)
CAUTION
■When the rear sunshade is being operated
Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.
They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
Do not operate the rear sunshade when the hybrid system is off.
■To ensure normal operation of the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades
Observe the following precautions.
●Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components of the rear sun-
shade.
●Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
●Do not attach items to the rear sunshade and rear door sunshades.
●Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
●Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.
597
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
Coat hooks
The coat hooks are provided with
the rear assist grips.
CAUTION
■Items that cannot be hung on the coat hook
Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death
or serious injury.
598
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
Assist grips
An assist grip installed on the ceiling
can be used to support your body
while sitting on the seat.
CAUTION
■Assist grip
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your
seat.
Doing so could damage the assist grip, or could cause you to injure yourself by fall-
ing over.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.
599
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
Utility hook
To use the utility hook, push it on.
: If equipped
CAUTION
■When not in use
Keep the utility hook stowed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■Utility hook weight capacity
Do not hang any object heavier than 4.4 lb. (2 kg) on the utility hook.
The utility hook may get damaged or the object hooked on the utility hook may fall
down while driving.
600
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener (HomeLink® Universal Transceiver) is manufac-
tured under license from HomeLink®.
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Indicator light
Buttons
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems,
and other devices.
Programming the HomeLink® (for U.S.A. owners)
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
601
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
■Programming HomeLink®
Point the remote control trans-
mitter for the device 1 to 3 in.
(25 to 75 mm) from the
HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator
light in view while programming.
Press and hold one of the
HomeLink® buttons and the
transmitter button. When the
HomeLink® indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapid
flash, you can release both but-
tons.
If the HomeLink® indicator light
comes on but does not flash, or
flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and
remains lit, the HomeLink® button
is already programmed. Use the
other buttons or follow the “Repro-
gramming a HomeLink® button”
instructions. (P. 604)
1
2
602
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
Test the HomeLink® operation
by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button.
If a HomeLink® button has been
programmed for a garage door,
check to see if the garage door
opens and closes. If the garage
door does not operate, see if your
garage transmitter is of the rolling
code type. Press and hold the pro-
grammed HomeLink® button. The
remote control transmitter is of the
rolling code type if the HomeLink®
indicator light flashes rapidly for
2 seconds and then remains lit. If
your transmitter is the rolling code
type, proceed to the heading “Pro-
gramming a rolling code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the
remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■Programming a rolling code system (for U.S.A. owners)
If your device is rolling code equipped, follow the steps under the head-
ing “Programming HomeLink®” before proceeding with the steps
listed below.
Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary
by brand of garage door opener motor.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the
location of the training button.
Press the training button.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate step below.
3
4
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
603
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
Press and hold the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink® button for
2 seconds and release it. Repeat this step once again. The garage
door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door
does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and
release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the
HomeLink® signal and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for
any of the remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a
devices in the Canadian market
Place the remote control transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away
from the HomeLink® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink® indicator light in view while programming.
Press and hold the selected HomeLink® button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the remote control transmitter
for 2 seconds each until step is completed.
When the HomeLink® indicator light starts to flash rapidly, release
the buttons.
Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed
button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the
remaining HomeLink® buttons.
■Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks and lighting, contact your Lexus dealer for assistance.
■Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink® buttons cannot be erased but can be repro-
grammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Reprogramming a
HomeLink® button” instructions.
3
4
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
604
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator light
should come on.
The HomeLink® compatible transceiver in your vehicle continues to send a sig-
nal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. After 20 seconds, the
HomeLink® indicator light will start flashing slowly. Keep pressing the
HomeLink® button and press and hold the transmitter button until the
HomeLink® indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid flash. Release
the buttons.
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons
for 10 seconds until the indicator
light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink® memory.
Operating HomeLink®
Reprogramming a HomeLink® button
Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three programs)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
605
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
■Before programming
●Install a new battery in the remote control transmitter.
●The battery side of the remote control transmitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLink® button.
■Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NZLOBIHL4
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
■When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
606
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are
out of danger to prevent potential harm.
■Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
607
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
Safety Connect
“SOS” button
LED light indicators
Microphone
: If equipped
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses
Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technol-
ogy to provide safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Con-
nect is supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which
operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telemat-
ics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by
the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy
of which is available at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect ser-
vice is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
System components
1
2
3
608
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:
●Automatic Collision Notification*
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service
providers. (P. 610)
*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
●Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (P. 611)
●Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (P. 611)
●Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (P. 611)
After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement
and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your
Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the
“SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details.
Services
Subscription
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
609
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
■Safety Connect Services Information
●Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during
Safety Connect.
●Safety Connect is available beginning Fall 2009 on select Lexus models. Contact
with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device
being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite sig-
nal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive
emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by
subscription term selected.
●Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Loca-
tion will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada,
and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except
Hawaii) and in Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the
United States in countries other than Canada.
●Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications
Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indi-
cate your language of choice when enrolling.
■When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
610
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
When the power switch is turned to ON mode, the red indicator light
comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light
comes on, indicating that the service is active.
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage con-
ditions:
●Green indicator light on = Active service
●Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process
●Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
●No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active
■Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the
system is designed to automatically call the response center. The
responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak
with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occu-
pants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the
call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services pro-
vider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to
the location.
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
Safety Connect services
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
611
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
■Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities
to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police
report, call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS
(1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to ini-
tiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehi-
cle, Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain
circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Fur-
ther information is available at Lexus.com.
■Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to
reach the Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will
determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch
the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that
you are not experiencing an emergency.
■Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included
warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect
response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such
as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside
Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect
Terms and Conditions, which are available at Lexus.com.
612
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
5-7. Other interior features
Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.
■Exposure to radio frequency signals
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power
radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio fre-
quency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless
phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previ-
ously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
●ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
●NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measure-
ment) Report 86 [1986]
●ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Pro-
tection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evalua-
tions of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers,
and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and
industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI
Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in
addition to those standards.
Safety information for Safety Connect
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
613
5-7. Other interior features
5
Interior features
■Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect
FCC ID: O9EGTM1
FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
615
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6
Maintenance and care
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................. 616
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior..................620
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements...623
General maintenance..............626
Emission inspection
and maintenance (I/M)
programs ................................... 630
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions................................. 631
Hood...............................................634
Positioning a floor jack.............635
Engine compartment ............... 637
12-volt battery.............................. 647
Tires................................................... 651
Tire inflation pressure .................661
Wheels ...........................................664
Air conditioning filter ...............666
Electronic key battery..............668
Checking and replacing
fuses.............................................. 670
Headlight aim..............................685
Light bulbs.....................................687
616
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body,
wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly
with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is
cool.
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the
vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm
your vehicle’s paint.
■High pressure car washes
●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the win-
dows.
●Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed
properly.
■When using a car wash
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range,
the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correc-
tion procedures to wash the vehicle:
●Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the
vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
●Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system
with push-button start. (P. 127)
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition:
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
617
6-1. Maintenance and care
6
Maintenance and care
■Aluminum wheels
●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
●Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for
long distance in the hot weather.
●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■Front side windows water-repellent coating (if equipped)
●The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coat-
ing.
• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period.
Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the win-
dows.
• Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up.
●When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating can
be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.
618
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause
the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■When cleaning the windshield
●When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is
touched by hand
●When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
●If something bumps against the windshield
●If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the
raindrop sensor
■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes
Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes until they have cooled
sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes can cause burns.
Set the wipers to the intermittent windshield
wipers. (P. 221)
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may
operate unexpectedly in the following situa-
tions, and may result in hands being caught
or other serious injuries and cause damage
to the wiper blades.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
619
6-1. Maintenance and care
6
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (alu-
minum wheels etc.)
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint
surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with
low humidity when storing the wheels.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■When using an automatic car wash
Set the wipers to the intermittent windshield wipers. (P. 221)
If AUTO mode is selected, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be
damaged.
620
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a
cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all
remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining mois-
ture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or
soft cloth.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and
wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and
keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Cleaning the leather areas
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
621
6-1. Maintenance and care
6
Maintenance and care
■Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to main-
tain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty sur-
faces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
■When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc.
If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet
could be damaged.
CAUTION
■Water in the vehicle
●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle, such as on the floor, in the hybrid bat-
tery (traction battery) air vents, and in the trunk.
Doing so may cause the hybrid battery, electrical components, etc. to malfunc-
tion or catch fire.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 40)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function prop-
erly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the
windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
622
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
●Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-
rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline
or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior
part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
●Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the
floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with LKA [Lane-Keeping
Assist])
Be careful not to touch the camera sensor (P. 251).
If the camera is accidentally scratched or hit, LKA may not operate properly or
may cause a malfunction.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to
the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with
lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes
running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
623
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-2. Maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Maintenance requirements
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be
done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and
Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty cov-
erage.
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty
Booklet”.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Lexus recommends performing the following mainte-
nance:
General maintenance
Scheduled maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance
624
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-2. Maintenance
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure perfor-
mance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop
other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
■Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance sched-
ule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedure described below:
Switch the display to the trip meter “A” (P. 91) when the hybrid system is operat-
ing.
Turn the power switch off.
While pressing the “ODO TRIP” button (P. 91), turn the power switch to the
ON mode (do not start the hybrid system because otherwise the reset mode will
be canceled).
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
●Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest
service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on
your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been per-
formed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle
is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
The message shown in the illustration will
appear on the display.
Continue to press and hold the button until
the trip meter displays “000000”.
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
625
6-2. Maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible
death or serious injury.
■Handling of the 12-volt battery
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
●12-volt battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after
handling. (P. 647)
626
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-
formed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any prob-
lem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer
or qualified service shop for advice.
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Brake fluid Is the brake fluid at the correct level?
(P. 645)
Engine/power control unit coolant Is the engine/power control unit coolant
at the correct level? (P. 642)
Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct level?
(P. 639)
Exhaust system There should not be any fumes or
strange sounds.
Radiator/condenser The radiator and condenser should be
free from foreign objects. (P. 644)
Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid?
(P. 646)
Luggage compartment
Items Check points
12-volt battery Check the connections. (P. 647)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
627
6-2. Maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Vehicle interi or
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal
• The accelerator pedal should move
smoothly (without uneven pedal
effort or catching).
Hybrid transmission “Park” mechanism
• When parked on a slope and the shift
lever is in P, is the vehicle securely
stopped?
Brake pedal
• Does the brake pedal move
smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropri-
ate clearance from the floor?
(P. 789)
• Does the brake pedal have the cor-
rect amount of free play?
(P. 789)
Brakes
• The vehicle should not pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel
spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too
close to the floor when the brakes are
applied.
628
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-2. Maintenance
Head restraints •Do the head restraints move
smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Do the indicators and buzzers func-
tion properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Are the headlights aimed correctly?
(P. 685)
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• When parked on a slope and the
parking brake is on, is the vehicle
securely stopped?
Seat belts
• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be dam-
aged.
Seats • Do the seat controls operate prop-
erly?
Steering wheel
• Does the steering wheel rotate
smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the
correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange
sounds coming from the steering
wheel.
Items Check points
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
629
6-2. Maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Vehicle ext e rior
Items Check points
Doors/trunk • Do the doors/trunk operate
smoothly?
Engine hood • Does the engine hood lock system
work properly?
Fluid leaks
• There should not be any signs of fluid
leakage after the vehicle has been
parked.
Tires
• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or
excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated accord-
ing to the maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.
CAUTION
■If the hybrid system is operating
Turn the hybrid system off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-
forming maintenance checks.
630
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the
emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may
need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
●When the 12-volt battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be
completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary mal-
function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is
driven 40 or more times.
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the
operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:
When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several
driving trips
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
631
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedure as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
12-volt battery condition (P. 647)
•Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 645)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
brake fluid
•Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
Engine/power control unit
coolant level (P. 642)
•“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or
a similar high quality ethylene glycol-
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
nitrite and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technol-
ogy
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
Engine oil level (P. 639)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
•Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding engine
oil)
632
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuses (P. 670) • Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Headlight aim (P. 685) • Phillips-head screwdriver
Light bulbs (P. 687)
• Bulb with same number and wattage
rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
•Flathead screwdriver
•Wrench
Radiator and condenser (P. 644)
Tire inflation pressure (P. 661) • Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (P. 646)
• Water or washer fluid containing anti-
freeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water or
washer fluid)
Items Parts and tools
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
633
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move sud-
denly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious
injury, observe the following precautions.
■When working on the engine compartment
●Make sure that the “POWER ON” on the multi-information display and the
“READY” indicator are both off.
●Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, power control unit, radiator, exhaust manifold,
etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine
compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flam-
mable.
■When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Be sure the power switch is off.
With the power switch in ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically
start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.
(P. 644)
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from get-
ting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to
dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
634
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1
2
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
636
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death
or serious injury:
●When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the
jack.
●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
●Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is supported
only by the floor jack.
●Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level surface.
●Do not start the hybrid system while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
●Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift the
shift lever to P.
●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehi-
cle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
●When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
637
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment
■12-volt battery
P. 647
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 639)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 642)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 640)
Power control unit coolant res-
ervoir (P. 642)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 645)
Fuse box (P. 670)
Washer fluid tank (P. 646)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (P. 644)
Radiator (P. 644)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
638
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Removing the engine compartment cover
Right-hand side
Center
■Installing the clips
Push up center portion
Insert
Press
Engine compartment cover
1
2
3
NOTICE
■Checking the engine compartment cover after installation
Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
639
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and
turning off the hybrid system, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the bottom of the engine.
Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
Low
Full
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
6
640
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as that already in
the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
■Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situa-
tions, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in
between oil maintenance intervals.
●When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after
replacing the engine
●If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
●When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while
accelerating or decelerating frequently
●When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through
heavy traffic
Engine oil selection P. 785
Oil quantity
(Low Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Items Clean funnel
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
641
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information con-
cerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
642
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the hybrid system is cold.
■Engine coolant reservoir
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (P. 774)
■Power control unit coolant reservoir
Reservoir cap
“FULL” line
“LOW” line
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (P. 774)
Coolant
1
2
3
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
643
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized
water. (Minimum temperature: -31F [-35C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized
water. (Minimum temperature: -44F [-42C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
■If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps,
drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in
the cooling system.
CAUTION
■When the hybrid system is hot
Do not remove the engine/power control unit coolant reservoir caps or the radia-
tor cap.(P. 777)
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
644
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Radiator and condenser
CAUTION
■When the hybrid system is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious inju-
ries, such as burns.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
645
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
■Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
Use only newly opened brake fluid.
Brake fluid
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted sur-
faces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out
or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.
646
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
Washer fluid
CAUTION
■When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the hybrid system is hot or operating as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
647
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
12-volt battery
The 12-volt battery is located on the
left-hand side of luggage compart-
ment.
Pull the strap upwards to lift up the
12-volt battery cover.
Make sure that the 12-volt battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
Location
Removing the 12-volt battery cover
Exterior
1
2
648
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Before recharging
When recharging, the 12-volt battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:
●If recharging with the 12-volt battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the 12-volt battery.
■After recharging/reconnecting the 12-volt battery
●The hybrid system may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the sys-
tem.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Open and close any of the doors.
Restart the hybrid system.
●Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not
be possible immediately after reconnecting the 12-volt battery. If this happens, use
the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
●Start the hybrid system with the power switch in ACCESSORY mode. The hybrid
system may not start with the power switch turned off. However, the hybrid system
will operate normally from the second attempt.
●The power switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the 12-volt battery is recon-
nected, the vehicle will return the power switch mode to the status it was in before
the 12-volt battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the power switch
before disconnect the 12-volt battery. Take extra care when connecting the 12-volt
battery if the power switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at all methods above, contact
your Lexus dealer.
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
649
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the 12-volt battery
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may pro-
duce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the 12-
volt battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the 12-volt battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the 12-volt battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the 12-volt battery.
●Keep children away from the 12-volt battery.
■Where to safely charge the 12-volt battery
Always charge the 12-volt battery in an open area. Do not charge the 12-volt bat-
tery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■How to recharge the 12-volt battery
Observe the following precautions when recharging the 12-volt battery. Failure to
do so may damage the 12-volt battery and cause death or serious injury.
●Slow charge: Recharge at a current of 5 A or less and make sure that the
recharging period does not exceed a total of 12 hours.
●Quick charge: Recharge at a current of 15 A or less and make sure that the
recharging period does not exceed 60 minutes.
650
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medi-
cal attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical atten-
tion immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention imme-
diately.
■When replacing the 12-volt battery
Use a 12-volt battery designed for this vehicle. Failure to do so may cause gas
(hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.
For replacement of the 12-volt battery, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■When recharging the 12-volt battery
Never recharge the 12-volt battery while the hybrid system is operating. Also, be
sure all accessories are turned off.
651
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indicators is
shown by the “TWI” or “” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and pres-
sure if not rotated.
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.
Checking tires
1
2
3
652
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend tire
life, Lexus recommends that tire rota-
tion is carried out at the same interval
as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure
warning system after tire rotation.
Tire rotation
Front
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
653
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pres-
sure before serious problems arise.
Vehicles without the tire inflation pressure display function
If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a warning light. (P. 715)
Vehicles with the tire inflation pressure display function
●If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is
warned by a screen display and a warning light. (P. 740)
●The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be
displayed on the multi-information display. (P. 97)
◆Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer
and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pres-
sure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus
dealer. (P. 655)
◆Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
●When rotating the tires.
●When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing
traveling speed or load weight.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
Tire pressure warning system
654
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the power switch off.
Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 790)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pres-
sure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure
level.
Turn the power switch to ON mode.
Press and hold the tire pres-
sure warning reset switch until
the tire pressure warning light
blinks slowly 3 times.
Wait for a few minutes with the power switch in ON mode and then
turn the power switch off.
1
2
3
4
5
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
655
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
◆Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code
registered by your Lexus dealer.
■When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric,
and bulges indicating internal damage
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or loca-
tion of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the
tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 min-
utes, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute and stays on to indicate a sys-
tem malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has sel-
dom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
■When rotating the tires (vehicles with the tire inflation pressure display function)
Make sure that the power switch is off. If the tires are rotated while the power switch
is in ON mode, the tire position information will not be updated.
If this accidentally occurs, either turn the power switch to off and then to ON mode,
or initialize the system after checking that the tire pressure is properly adjusted.
656
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Low profile tires (except 225/50R17 tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be
reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use
snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed
appropriate for road and weather conditions.
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, which-
ever is greater.
■Tire types
●Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction perfor-
mance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or
icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is
recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
●All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be ade-
quate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season
tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow
tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and han-
dling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
●Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity
as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equip-
ment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install stud-
ded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow
tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 319)
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
mentioned on the sidewall of the tire.
(P. 795)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
657
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
■Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly
●In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
• If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
• Tire chains etc. are equipped.
• Lock nuts are equipped.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.
●Performance may be affected in the following situations.
• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-
less communication device
Vehicles with the tire inflation pressure display function: If tire position information
is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be
corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions.
●When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could
be extended.
●When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the
warning may not function.
■The initialization operation
●Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation
pressure adjustment.
●If you have accidentally turned the power switch off during initialization, it is not
necessary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically
when the power switch has been turned to ON mode for the next time.
●If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust
the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct
initialization again.
658
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■When initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the
settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning
light does not blink 3 times.
●After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks
for 1 minute then stays on after driving for 20 minutes.
■Tire pressure warning system certification
MODEL/FCC IDs:
Transmitter: PAXPMVC010
Initiator: HYQ22AAA
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
659
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous
handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or seri-
ous injury.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices (vehicles with the tire
inflation pressure display function)
●Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
●People with implanted pacemakers or car-
diac defibrillators should not come within
17.7 in. (450 mm) of the tire pressure warn-
ing system initiators. The radio waves may
affect the operation of such devices.
660
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters
and tire valve caps
●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
●Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed,
water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning
valves could be bound.
●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those speci-
fied. The cap may become stuck.
■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus
dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace
the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 653)
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushion-
ing ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■Low profile tires (except 225/50R17 tires)
Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when sus-
taining impact from the road surface. Therefore, pay attention to the following:
●Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may
be damaged more severely.
●Avoid potholes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so
may lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
662
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the
pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjust-
ment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
Put the tire valve cap back on.
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
Inspection and adjustment procedure
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
663
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressure that
is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and handling.
●Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation pres-
sure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leak-
age, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace them as soon as
possible.
664
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are
equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and
inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Lexus does not recommend using the following:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
●Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your
aluminum wheels.
●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel
nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
●Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or
rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of han-
dling control.
Wheel selection
Aluminum wheel precautions
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
665
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 653)
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-
genuine wheels.
666
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
Turn the power switch off.
Open the glove box. Lift up the
side with the stay, disconnect the
stay tabs and remove the parti-
tion by pulling horizontally.
Press the tabs and remove the fil-
ter cover.
Press the tabs and remove the fil-
ter case.
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
667
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Remove the air conditioning filter
from the filter case and replace it
with a new one.
The “UP” marks shown on the filter
and the filter case should be pointing
up.
■Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance sched-
ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
5
NOTICE
■When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
668
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
●Flathead screwdriver
●Small flathead screwdriver
●Lithium battery CR2032
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” termi-
nal facing up.
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Replacing the battery
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
669
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■Use a CR2032 lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops
or camera stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
●The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
●The operational range will be reduced.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they
can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
670
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
Turn the power switch off.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings” for
details about which fuse to check. (P. 674)
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Remove the engine compart-
ment cover (P. 638) and
remove all of the clips.
Push the tabs on either side to
detach the lock and lift the lid off
while pulling the lock plate.
When installing the lid, check that
the lock plate and the tabs on either
side are connected correctly.
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
1
2
3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
673
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Check if the fuse is blown.
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact your Lexus dealer.
5
1
2
Type A Type B
Type C Type D
674
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Engine compartment
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1IGN 10 Starting system
2INJ 10 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system
3EFI NO.2 10 Air intake system, exhaust system
4IG2 MAIN 20 IGN, GAUGE, INJ, AIR BAG, IG2 NO.1,
LH-IG2
5EFI MAIN 25 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system, EFI NO.2
6A/F 15 Air flow sensor
7EDU 20 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system
8F/PMP 25 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system
9H-LP RH-LO 20 Right-hand headlight (low beam)*
10 H-LP LH-LO 20 Left-hand headlight (low beam)*
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
675
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
11 ABS MAIN 2 10 Brake system
12 ABS MAIN 1 10 Brake system
13 IGCT NO.1 30 IGCT NO.2, IGCT NO.3, IGCT NO.4,
IGCT NO.5
14 ECU-B 7.5 Smart access system with push-button start
15 INV W/P 10 Hybrid system
16 ETCS 10 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system
17 EPS-B 10 Electric power steering system
18 D/C CUT 30 DOME, MPX-B
19 HORN 10 Horn
20 ODS 5Occupant classification system
21 TV 7.5 Remote Touch screen
22 P/I-B NO.2 80 IG2 MAIN, EFI MAIN, EDU, F/PMP, A/F
23 ABS NO.2 30 ECB
24 P/I-B NO.1 50 H-LP HI RH, H-LP HI LH, DRL
25 H-LP LO 30 H-LP LO RH, H-LP LO LH
26 LH J/B-B 40 Left-hand junction block
27 RH J/B-B 40 Right-hand junction block
28 VGRS 40 No circuit
29 OIL PMP 60 Oil pump
30 IGCT NO.5 7.5 Power management system, shift position
sensor
31 WIP-S 7.5 Windshield wipers, driver support system
32 WASH-S 5Windshield washer, driver support system
33 COMB SW 5Windshield wipers
Fuse Ampere Circuit
676
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
34 DOME 7.5
Personal lights, ornament lights, trunk light,
footwell lights, door courtesy lights, vanity
lights, rear door inside handle illuminations,
power trunk opener and closer
35 MPX-B 10
Body ECU, smart access system with push-
button start, electric tilt and telescopic steer-
ing column, power seats, head-up display,
front door ECU, gauges and meters, steer-
ing sensor, yaw rate and G sensor, overhead
module, RR CTRL SW, power trunk opener
and closer, clock, CAN gateway ECU
36 IGCT NO.4 10 Power control unit
37 IGCT NO.3 7.5 Hybrid battery (traction battery), DC/DC
converter
38 IGCT NO.2 5Hybrid system
39 IG2 NO.1 5DCM, CAN gateway ECU
40 GAUGE 5Gauges and meters
41 DC/DC 150 RH-J/B DC/DC, P/I DC/DC
42 P/I DC/DC 100 RR S/SHADE, DEFOG, FOG, TAIL,
PANEL
43 RH J/B DC/DC 80 Right-hand junction block
44 LH J/B DC/DC 50 Left-hand junction block
45 H-LP CLN 30 Headlight cleaner
46 FAN NO.2 40 Electric cooling fans
47 LUG J/B DC/DC 80 Luggage compartment junction block
48 FAN NO.1 80 Electric cooling fans
49 PTC NO.1 50 PTC heater
50 PTC NO.2 50 PTC heater
51 HTR 50 Air conditioning system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
677
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
*: Low beam and high beam are the same bulb. (vehicles with discharge headlights)
52 ABS NO.1 30 ECB
53 ECU-B NO.2 7.5 No circuit
54 DEICER 25 Windshield wiper de-icer
55 ABS MAIN 3 10 Brake system
56 FILTER 10 Condenser
57 A/C W/P 7.5 Air conditioning system
58 SPARE 10 Spare fuse
59 SPARE 30 Spare fuse
60 SPARE 20 Spare fuse
Fuse Ampere Circuit
678
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1STOP 7.5 Stop lights, high mounted stoplight
2P/W-B 5Power window master switch
3P/SEAT1 F/L 30 Power seats
4D/L NO.1 25 Power door lock system
5NV-IR 10 Lexus night view
6FL S/HTR 10 Seat heaters/ventilators
7 WIPER 30 Windshield wipers
8WIPER-IG 5Windshield wipers
9LH-IG 10
Seat belts, body ECU, AFS, overhead mod-
ule, raindrop sensor, inside rear view mirror,
lane camera sensor (LKA), head-up display,
shift lock system, intuitive parking assist, front
left-hand door ECU, driver monitor system,
Remote Touch screen, electric tilt and tele-
scopic steering column, power seats, moon
roof, windshield wiper de-icer, intuitive park-
ing assist switch, PTC heater, headlight
cleaner
10 LH ECU-IG 10
VDIM, ECB, D-SW MODULE (Blind Spot
Monitor, heated steering wheel), driver sup-
port system, AFS, EPB, air conditioning sys-
tem
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
679
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
11 DOOR FL 30 Outside rear view mirror defoggers, power
window (front left-hand)
12 CAPACITOR
(HV) 10 Capacitor
13 STRG LOCK 15 Steering lock system
14 D/L NO.2 25 Power door lock system
15 DOOR RL 30 Power window (rear left-hand)
16 HAZ 15 Turn signal lights, emergency flashers
17 LH-IG2 10
Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system, stop lights,
smart access system with push-button start,
steering lock system, brake system, power
management system
18 LH J/B-B 7.5 Body ECU
19 S/ROOF 20 Moon roof
20 P/SEAT2 F/L 25 Power seats
21 TI & TE 20 Electric tilt and telescopic steering column
22 A/C 7.5 Air conditioning system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
680
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Passenger’s side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1P/SEAT1 F/R 30 Power seats
2FR P/OUTLET 15 Power outlet (front)
3RR P/OUTLET 15 Power outlet (rear)
4P/SEAT2 F/R 25 Power seats
5AVS 20 AVS
6STRG HTR 15 Heated steering wheel
7WASH 20 Windshield washer
8RH ECU-IG 10
Navigation system, pre-collision seat belts,
air conditioning system, ECB, Lexus night
view, yaw rate and G sensor
9RH-IG 10
Tension reducer, seat heater/ventilator
switches, front right-hand door ECU, CAN
gateway ECU, tire pressure warning system,
power seats
10 DOOR FR 30
Front right-hand door control system (out-
side rear view mirror defoggers, power win-
dow)
11 DOOR RR 30 Power window (rear right-hand)
12 RAD NO.2 30 Audio system
13 AM2 7.5 Power management system
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
681
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
14 MULTIMEDIA 10 Navigation system, Remote Touch
15 RAD NO.1 30 Audio system
16 AIR BAG 10 SRS airbag system, occupant classification
system
17 OBD 7.5 On-board diagnosis system
18 ACC 7.5
Body ECU, head-up display, RR CTRL, navi-
gation system, hybrid transmission, Remote
Touch, DCM, Remote Touch screen, clock
Fuse Ampere Circuit
682
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Trunk
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1PSB 30 Pre-collision seat belts
2PTL 25 Power trunk opener and closer
3RR J/B-B 10 Smart access system with push-button start
4RR S/HTR 20 Seat heaters (rear)
5FR S/HTR 10 Seat heaters/ventilators (front)
6RR FOG 10 No circuit
7DC/DC-S (HV) 7.5 DC/DC converter
8BATT FAN (HV) 20 Hybrid battery (traction battery) cooling fan
system
9SECURITY 7.5 SECURITY
10 ECU-B NO.3 7.5 Parking brake
11 TRK OPN 7.5 Power trunk opener and closer
12 DCM (HV) 7.5 DCM
13 AC INV (HV) 20 Power outlet (120V AC)
14 RR-IG1 5Radar sensor, Blind Spot Monitor
15 RR ECU-IG 10
Power trunk opener and closer, parking
brake, tension reducer (rear left-hand), RR
CTRL SW, tire pressure warning system
16 EPS-IG 5Electric power steering system
17 BACK UP 7.5 Back-up lights
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
683
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■The upper part of the 12-volt battery*
*: When one or more of the fuses in this unit are blown, the unit needs to be
replaced as a whole.
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1EPB 30 Parking brake
2LUG-J/B BATT 40 Luggage compartment junction block
3EPS 80 Electric power steering
4ARS 80 No circuit
5MAIN 220 Engine compartment junction block
684
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need
replacement. (P. 687)
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
■When replacing light bulbs
Lexus recommends that you use genuine Lexus products designed for this vehicle.
Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent overload, non-
genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unusable.
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
685
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Headlight aim
Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gasoline and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Sit in the driver’s seat.
Bounce the vehicle several times.
Vertical movement adjusting bolts
Discharge headlights LED headlights
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
Before checking the headlight aim
1
2
1
2
3
4
686
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, turn bolt A in either direction.
Remember the turning direction and the number of turns.
Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step
.
If the headlight cannot be adjusted using this procedure, take the vehicle to your
Lexus dealer to adjust the headlight aim.
Adjusting the headlight aim
1
Discharge headlights LED headlights
2
1
Discharge headlights LED headlights
687
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (P. 791)
P. 638
■Front
Vehicles with discharge headlights
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replace-
ment seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Lexus dealer.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Removing the engine compartment covers
Bulb locations
Front turn signal light
Fog light (if equipped)
1
2
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
689
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■Fog lights (if equipped)
To allow enough working
space, turn the steering wheel
to the opposite side of the bulb
to be replaced.
Remove the 2 fender liner
clips.
Turn the steering wheel to the left
when replacing the right side light
bulb, and turn the steering wheel to
the right when replacing the left
side light bulb.
To take out the clips, turn the head
of the clip to unlock, then remove
by pulling.
While holding the clamp open,
pull and remove the tabs and
open the fender liner.
Unplug the connector while
pressing the lock release.
Replacing light bulbs
1
2
3
690
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Set the new light bulb.
Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb
with the mounting, and insert. Turn
it clockwise to set.
Set the connector.
After installing the connector,
shake the bulb base gently to check
that it is not loose, turn the fog lights
on once and visually confirm that
no light is leaking through the
mounting.
Reinstall the fender liner and
install the clips.
Insert the clips and turn to lock.
4
5
6
7
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
691
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■Front turn signal lights (vehicles with discharge headlights)
For the left side only: To allow
enough working space, turn
the steering wheel all the way
to the right, then remove the
bolts and take off the cover.
Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.
1
2
Right side Left side
694
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
After installing the bulb base, secure the cord with the clips and if replacing the
left side bulb, make sure to install the bolt for the washer fluid filler opening in
its original position.
4
Right side Left side
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
695
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■Rear turn signal lights
Open the trunk lid and remove
the cover.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the
steps listed.
After installing the bulb base,
secure the cord with the clips and
install the cover in its original posi-
tion.
1
2
3
4
696
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Back-up lights
Open the trunk lid.
For the left side (vehicles with
power trunk opener and closer
only): Pry out each side of the
trunk closer switch in turn by
inserting a screwdriver into the
base.
To prevent damage, cover the tip of
the screwdriver with a rag.
Remove the clips on whichever
side you are replacing and
open the cover of the trunk lid.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
When installing, reverse the steps listed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
697
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
■Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your
Lexus dealer.
●Headlights
●Parking lights and daytime running lights
●Front side marker lights
●Side turn signal lights
●Stop/tail lights
●Tail lights
●Rear side marker lights
●High mounted stoplight
●License plate lights
●Outer foot lights
■Discharge headlights (if equipped)
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may go
out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.
■LED Lights
The lights other than the discharge headlights (if equipped), fog lights (if equipped),
front turn signal lights, rear turn signal lights, back-up lights and outer foot lights each
consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Tempo-
rary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
●Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
■When replacing light bulbs
P. 684
698
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning
off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
●Vehicles with discharge headlights: While
the headlights are turned on, and for a short
time after they have been turned off, metal
components at the rear of the headlight
assembly will be extremely hot. To prevent
burns, do not touch these metal compo-
nents until you are certain they have cooled
down.
Metal components
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
699
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Discharge headlights (if equipped)
●Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing the discharge headlights (including
light bulbs).
●Do not touch the discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when the headlights
are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result in
death or serious injury by electric shock.
●Do not attempt to take apart or repair the headlight bulbs, connectors, power
supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and death or serious injury.
■To prevent damage or fire
●Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
●Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
701
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...................702
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency....703
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed................................ 704
If you think
something is wrong................. 710
If a warning light turns on or
a warning buzzer sounds........711
If a warning message
is displayed ..................................721
If you have a flat tire....................749
If the hybrid system
will not start.................................762
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P......................764
If the parking brake cannot
be released.................................765
If the electronic key does not
operate properly......................767
If the 12-volt battery
is discharged............................. 770
If your vehicle overheats..........774
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ............................................. 778
702
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
Press the switch.
All the turn signals will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch once
again.
■Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the hybrid system is not
operating (while the “READY” indicator is not illuminated), the 12-volt battery may
discharge.
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehi-
cle has to be stopped in the road to a breakdown, etc.
703
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
7-1. Essential information
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to
slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the hybrid system.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.
To stop the hybrid system, press
and hold the power switch for 2
consecutive seconds or more, or
press it briefly 3 times or more in
succession.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehi-
cle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
1
2
3
4
3
Press and hold for 2 seconds or more
or press briefly 3 times or more
4
CAUTION
■If the hybrid system has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal
harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as
possible before turning off the hybrid system.
5
704
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
●The hybrid system is operating but the vehicle will not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If a tow truck is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency
towing eyelet. This should only be
attempted on hard surfaced roads
for short distances at under 18 mph
(30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles,
steering and brakes must be in good
condition.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provin-
cial and local laws.
Before towing
Emergency towing
705
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Take out the towing eyelet (P. 750)
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag
between the screwdriver and the vehi-
cle body as shown in the illustration.
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut
wrench.
Installing towing eyelet
1
2
3
4
706 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to
prevent body damage.
Towing with a sling-type truck
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the rear
wheels.
Turn the power switch to ACCES-
SORY mode so that the steering
wheel is unlocked.
707
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
If your Lexus is transported by a flat
bed truck, it should be tied down at
the locations shown in the illustra-
tion.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
Using a flat bed truck
708 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Before emergency towing
Release the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY (hybrid system off) or ON (hybrid system
operating) mode.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■Caution while towing
●Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the
surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
●If the hybrid system is off, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
■Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.
1
2
3
709
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing using a
wheel-lift type truck
Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.
■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
●Do not tow the vehicle from the rear with the power switch off. The steering lock
mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
●When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance for
towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.
■To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
710
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you think something is wrong
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher
than normal.
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the hybrid system
●Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the
floor
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
711
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer
sounds
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes
on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does
not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this
continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may
be dangerous.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
•Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the electronically controlled brake system
712 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The hybrid system;
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic hybrid transmission control system
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•The ABS; or
• The brake assist system
Electric power steering system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system
713
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
Pre-collision system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
The warning light will operate as follows, even when the system
is not malfunctioning:
• The light will flash quickly when the system is operating.
(P. 296)
• The light will turn on when the pre-collision system is dis-
abled. (P. 297)
• The light will flash when the system cannot temporarily be
used. (P. 735)
Slip indicator
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system; or
•The TRAC system
The light will flash when the VSC or the TRC system is operat-
ing.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
“A F S O F F ” i n d i c a t o r
Indicates a malfunction in the adaptive front-lighting system
(Flashes)
Brake hold operated indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)
(Flashes)
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system
Warning light Warning light/Details
714 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light goes off.
Brake system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronically controlled brake system;
• The regenerative braking system; or
• The parking brake system
Follow the correction procedures.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)*1
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed
Check that all the doors and
the trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates remaining fuel is
approximately 2.6 gal. (10.0
L, 2.2 Imp.gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Seat belt reminder light (warn-
ing buzzer)*2
Warns the driver and/or front
passenger to fasten their seat
belts
Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is
occupied, the front passen-
ger’s seat belt also needs to
be fastened to make the
warning light (warning
buzzer) off.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
P. 721
715
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
P. 728
*2: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is
not fastened. Once the power switch is turned to ON mode, the buzzer sounds
for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer
sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds, the buzzer will
sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the
buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his
or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a
speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 30 seconds,
the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still
unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such
as
• Natural causes (P. 717)
• Flat tire (P. 749)
Adjust the tire inflation pressure
to the specified level.
The light will turn off after a
few minutes. In case the light
does not turn off even if the
tire inflation pressure is
adjusted, have the system
checked by your Lexus
dealer.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure
warning system
Have the system checked by
your Lexus dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
716 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors,
side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors
(rear), driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger
occupant classification system, “AIR BAG ON” indicator light, “AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assem-
blies, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (P. 40)
■Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer
If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sen-
sor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a
passenger is not sitting in the seat.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
●Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
■Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the 12-volt battery charge becomes insufficient of the voltage temporarily
drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warn-
ing buzzer may sound.
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch will not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
717
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
■The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural
air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case,
adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though
the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire.
■Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly
P. 657
■If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1 minute when
the power switch is turned to ON mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio
sound.
718 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
■If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may
fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and
operate using more force than usual.
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause a loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure immediately.
●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If a tire is flat, change
it with the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.
●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could
lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
719
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
CAUTION
■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
sure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
720 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction tell-
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■Precaution when installing a different tire
When differently constructed tires or tires of different makers, models or tread pat-
terns are installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
721
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
Master warning light
The master warning light also comes
on or flashes in order to indicate that a
message is currently being displayed
on the multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning light comes on again after the following actions have
been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and
perform the following actions:
1
2
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may
be dangerous.
Warning message Details
Indicates the following:
• The brake fluid level is low; or,
• The brake system is malfunctioning.
A buzzer also sounds.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
722 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display. The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to
the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The regenerative brake system;
• The electronically controlled brake system; or
• The electric parking brake
A buzzer also sounds.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
Warning message Details
Warning message Details
Indicates abnormal engine oil pressure
The warning light may come on if the engine oil
pressure is too low.
Indicates a malfunction in the hybrid system
723
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display. Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may
lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Warning message Details
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is flashing.
Indicates a malfunction in the dynamic radar cruise
control system (if equipped) or the cruise control sys-
tem
Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the
system, and then press the button again to reacti-
vate the system.
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
724 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Indicates a malfunction in the LKA (Lane-Keeping
Assist)
Indicates a malfunction in the LED headlight system
Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight lev-
eling system
Indicates a malfunction in the adaptive front-lighting
system
Warning message Details
(If equipped)
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
725
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system;
or,
• The seat belt pretensioner system
Indicates a malfunction in:
•The ABS; or,
• The brake assist system
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
Depress the brake pedal.
Warning message Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
(Flashes)
728 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-informa-
tion display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected
problem, check that the warning message goes off.
Follow the correction procedures.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that one or
more of the doors is not
fully closed
The system also indi-
cates which doors are
not fully closed.
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph (5
km/h), flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
door(s) are not yet
fully closed.
Make sure that all the
doors are closed.
Indicates that the hood is
not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph (5
km/h), flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
hood is not yet fully
closed.
Close the hood.
729
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Indicates that the trunk is
not fully closed
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph (5
km/h), flashes
and a buzzer sounds
to indicate that the
trunk is not yet fully
closed.
Close the trunk.
Indicates that the win-
dows are not fully closed
(with the power switch
off, and the driver’s door
open)
Close all the windows.
Indicates that the moon
roof is not fully closed
(with the power switch
off, and the driver’s door
open)
Close the moon roof.
Indicates that the win-
dows and the moon roof
are not fully closed (with
the power switch off, and
the driver’s door open)
Close all the windows
and the moon roof.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
730 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Indicates that the parking
brake is still engaged
If the vehicle reaches a
speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h),
flashes and a buzzer
sounds to indicate that
the parking brake is
still engaged.
Release the parking
brake.
Indicates that the parking
brake system has over-
heated
Wait until the system
cools down.
Indicates that the brake
hold system is not hold
the vehicle when the
vehicle is on a steep
incline
Use the brake hold sys-
tem when it becomes
available.
Indicates that the brake
hold system is unable to
cancel the brake hold
function
Depress the brake pedal.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(Flashes)
(U.S.A.)
(Flashes)
(Canada)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
731
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Indicates that the brake
hold system is not avail-
able
The reason the brake
hold system is not avail-
able may be displayed.
• Close the driver’s door.
• Fasten the driver’s seat
belt.
• Close the trunk and
hood.
Indicates that the brake
hold system is not avail-
able
The reason the brake
hold system is not avail-
able may be displayed.
•Depress the brake
pedal.
• Close the driver’s door.
• Fasten the driver’s seat
belt.
Indicates that the parking
brake is set automatically
while the brake hold sys-
tem is holding the brakes
Release the parking
brake.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(Flashes)
732 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Indicates that the hybrid
battery (traction battery)
is low
When stopping the vehi-
cle for a long period of
time, shift the shift lever to
P. The battery cannot be
charged with the shift
lever in N.
Indicates that the hybrid
battery (traction battery)
power has dropped
because a long period of
time has elapsed after
shifting the shift lever to
N
Restart the hybrid system
when starting the vehicle.
Indicates that the gaso-
line engine cannot oper-
ate or the shift lever is in
N for a long time
Stop the vehicle and shift
the shift lever to P.
Indicates that the accel-
erator pedal is depressed
while the shift position is
in N
Release the accelerator
pedal and shift the shift
lever to D or R.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
733
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
*: For the EV drive mode operating conditions: P. 196
Indicates that the EV
drive mode is not avail-
able*
The reason the EV
drive mode is not avail-
able (the vehicle is
idling, battery charge is
low, speed is higher
than the EV drive
mode operating speed
range, accelerator
pedal is depressed too
much) may be dis-
played.
Use the EV drive mode
when it becomes avail-
able.
Indicates that the EV
drive mode has been
automatically canceled*
The reason the EV
drive mode is not avail-
able (the battery
charge is low, speed is
higher than the EV
drive mode operating
speed range, accelera-
tor pedal is depressed
too much) may be dis-
played.
Drive the vehicle for a
while.
Indicates that engine oil
level is low
Check the level of engine
oil, and add if necessary.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
734 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that intuitive
parking assist sensor is
dirty or covered with ice
Clean the sensor.
Indicates that the radar
sensor is dirty or covered
with ice
Clean the sensor.
Indicates that the radar
cruise control system is
unable to judge vehicle-
to-vehicle distance
•Turn off the snow
mode.
• If the windshield wip-
ers are on, turn them
off or set them to a
mode other than
AUTO or high speed
wiper operation.
Indicates that your vehi-
cle is nearing the vehicle
ahead (in vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance mode)
At the same time,
will appear on the
head-up display (the
image flashes).
Slow the vehicle by
applying the brakes.
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
735
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Indicates that there is a
high possibility of a frontal
collision, or that the pre-
collision braking function
is operating
At the same time,
will appear
on the head-up dis-
play too (the image
flashes).
Slow the vehicle by
applying the brakes.
Indicates that the LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist) is
suspended
•The camera sensor
temperature is higher
than the operation tem-
perature range.
•The power steering
system operation is
restricted.
Restart the LKA after
driving for a while.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
736 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Alerts the driver that the
vehicle is out of the lanes
(while the LKA [Lane-
Keeping Assist] system is
operating)
The warning buzzer
sounds continuously.
The lane markings and/
or the steering wheel
marking flash.
At the same time,
will appear
on the head-up dis-
play (part of the image
flashes).
Check around the vehi-
cle and back to inside of
the lane markings.
Indicates that the LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist)
system detects no-
handed driving (while the
lane keeping assist func-
tion is operating)
The warning buzzer
sounds twice.
Grip the steering wheel
firmly.
Indicates that the Blind
Spot Monitor sensors or
the surrounding area on
the bumper is dirty or
covered with ice
Clean the sensor and its
surrounding area on the
bumper.
Indicates that the hybrid
system has overheated
This message may be
displayed when driving
under severe operating
conditions. (For exam-
ple, when driving up a
long steep hill.)
Stop and check.
(P. 774)
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
737
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Indicates that the hybrid
system output is limited
because the engine oil is
overheated
Drive the vehicle at a safe
speed until the warning
message disappears.
Indicates that the vehicle
is unable to drive over 65
mph (110 km/h) until the
transmission warms up
Wait until the transmis-
sion warms up.
Indicates that remaining
fuel is approximately 2.6
gal. (10.0 L, 2.2 Imp.gal.)
or less
Refuel the vehicle.
Indicates that the power
switch is turned off or
turned to ACCESSORY
mode and the driver’s
door is opened while the
lights are turned on
Turn t he lig hts o f f.
Indicates that the driver’s
door was opened with the
shift position in any posi-
tion other than P
Shift the shift position to P.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
738 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Warning message in radar cruise mode (if equipped)
In the following cases, the warning message may not be displayed even if vehicle-to-
vehicle distance decreases:
●When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the
vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
●Immediately after cruise control speed is set
●At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
■The LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) lane departure warning function
In the following cases, the warning message will not be displayed even if a lane line is
crossed.
●When the vehicle speed deviates from the operating range of the LKA system
functions
●When the lane lines cannot be recognized
●When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to cause the vehicle to
change lanes
739
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
A warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking
the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the
warning message goes off.
Follow the correction procedures.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that the brake
hold system is not hold
the vehicle when the
vehicle is on a slippery
road
Use the brake hold sys-
tem when it becomes
available.
Indicates that the washer
fluid level is low Add washer fluid.
Indicates that all mainte-
nance according to the
driven distance on the
maintenance schedule*
should be performed
soon. If necessary, perform
maintenance.
Comes on approxi-
mately 4500 miles
(7200 km) after the
maintenance data has
been reset.
(U.S.A. only)
740 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that all mainte-
nance is required to cor-
respond to the driven
distance on the mainte-
nance schedule*.Perform the necessary
maintenance. Please
reset the maintenance
data after the mainte-
nance is performed
(P. 624)
Comes on approxi-
mately 5000 miles
(8000 km) after the
maintenance data has
been reset.
(The indicator will not
work properly unless the
maintenance data has
been reset.)
Indicates that the tire
inflation pressure is low
Check the tire inflation
pressure, and adjust to
the appropriate level.
Indicates a malfunction in
the tire pressure warning
system
Stop the vehicle in a safe
place and turn the power
switch off then on again.
If the tire pressure
warning indicator
flashes for 1 minute
then illuminates, there
is a malfunction in the
system. Have the vehi-
cle inspected at your
Lexus dealer.
(U.S.A. only)
(If equipped)
(If equipped)
741
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that the tire
position information can-
not be recognized
Drive for a short while
and check if the display
updates.
If the radio wave condi-
tions improve, the dis-
play may return to
normal. If the tire pres-
sure is still not dis-
played after driving for
several minutes, stop
the vehicle in a safe
place, turn the power
switch off then on
again, and start driving.
If the tire pressure is still
not displayed even
after repeating this sev-
eral times, have the
vehicle inspected at
your Lexus dealer.
Indicates that the pre-col-
lision system is not cur-
rently functional because
the grille cover or the
sensor is dirty
This message also
appears when the pre-
collision system is not
functional due to over-
heating.
Check the grille cover
and the sensor and clean
them if they are dirty.
In case of overheating,
the system will become
functional once the sys-
tem cools down.
(If equipped)
(Flashes)
(If equipped)
742 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning message and light go off.
Have the malfunction repaired immediately.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once
The electronic key
is not detected
when an attempt is
made to start the
hybrid system.
Start the
hybrid sys-
tem with the
electronic
key present.
Once 3
times
The electronic key
was carried out-
side the vehicle and
a door other than
the driver’s door
was opened and
closed while the
power switch was in
a mode other than
off.
Bring the
electronic
key back
into the
vehicle.
The driver’s door
was opened and
closed while the
electronic key was
not in the vehicle,
the shift lever was in
P and the power
switch was not
turned off.
Turn t h e
power
switch off or
bring the
electronic
key back
into the
vehicle.
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
743
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once Con-
tinuous
An attempt was
made to exit the
vehicle with the
electronic key and
lock the doors with-
out first turning the
power switch off
when the shift lever
was in P.
Turn t h e
power
switch off
and lock the
doors again.
9
times
An attempt was
made to drive when
the regular key was
not inside the vehi-
cle.
Confirm
that the
electronic
key is inside
the vehicle.
Con-
tinuous
The driver’s door
was opened when
the shift lever was
not in P and the
power switch was
not turned off.
Shift the
shift lever to
P.
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
744 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Con-
tinuous
Con-
tinuous
The driver’s door
was opened and
closed while the
electronic key was
not in the vehicle,
the shift lever was
not in P and the
power switch was
not turned off.
• Shift the
shift lever
to P.
•Bring the
elec-
tronic key
back into
the vehi-
cle.
Con-
tinuous
An attempt was
made to lock the
doors using the
smart access sys-
tem with push-but-
ton start while the
electronic key was
still inside the vehi-
cle.
Retrieve the
electronic
key from the
vehicle and
lock the
doors again.
Once Con-
tinuous
An attempt was
made to lock either
front door by open-
ing a door and put-
ting the inside lock
button into the lock
position, then clos-
ing the door with
the electronic key
still inside the vehi-
cle.
Retrieve the
electronic
key from the
vehicle and
lock the
doors again.
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
745
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once
•When the doors
were unlocked
with the mechan-
ical key and then
the power switch
was pressed, the
electronic key
could not be
detected in the
vehicle.
• The electronic
key could not be
detected in the
vehicle even after
the power switch
was pressed two
consecutive
times.
Touch the
electronic
key to the
power
switch while
depressing
the brake
pedal.
Once
An attempt was
made to start the
hybrid system with
the shift lever in an
incorrect position.
Shift the
shift lever to
P and start
the hybrid
system.
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
746 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Power was turned
off due to the auto-
matic power off
function.
Next time
when start-
ing the
hybrid sys-
tem,
increase the
engine
speed
slightly and
maintain
that level for
approxi-
mately 5
minutes to
recharge
the 12-volt
battery.
Once The electronic key
has a low battery.
Replace the
electronic
key battery.
(P. 668)
747
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once
The driver’s door
was opened and
closed with the
power switch
turned off and then
the power switch
was put in ACCES-
SORY mode twice
without the hybrid
system being
started.
Press the
power
switch while
depressing
the brake
pedal.
During an hybrid
system starting pro-
cedure in the event
that the electronic
key was not func-
tioning properly
(P. 768), the
power switch was
touched with the
electronic key.
Press the
power
switch
within 10
seconds of
the buzzer
sounding.
Once
The steering lock
could not be
released within 3
seconds of the
power switch being
pressed.
Press the
power
switch while
depressing
the brake
pedal and
moving the
steering
wheel left
and right.
Once
The power switch
has been turned off
with the shift lever
in a position other
than P or N.
Shift the
shift lever to
P.
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
(Flashes)
748 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio
sound.
Once
After the power
switch has been
turned off with the
shift lever in a posi-
tion other than P,
the shift lever has
been shifted to P.
Turn t h e
power
switch off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
(Flashes)
749
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to P.
●Stop the hybrid system.
●Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 702)
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare tire provided.
For details about tires: P. 651
CAUTION
■If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair, which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
751
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
CAUTION
■Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack,
leading to death or serious injury.
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
●Put the jack properly in its jack point.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the
jack.
●Do not start the hybrid system or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported
by the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
●When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If
there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.
753
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Remove the center luggage mat. (P. 582)
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
Taking out the spare tire
1
2
CAUTION
■When storing the spare tire
Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the spare tire and the
body of the vehicle.
754 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Chock the tires.
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located
under the rocker panel. They indicate
the jack point positions.
Replacing a flat tire
1
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
2
3
755
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the ground,
place the tire so that the wheel design
faces up to avoid scratching the wheel
surface.
4
5
756 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
■Replacing a flat tire
●Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the
vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes
will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts
while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the
tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading
to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m,
10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed
for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt
holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
757
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel con-
tact surface, the wheel nuts may
loosen while the vehicle is in motion,
causing the tire to come off.
Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with a steel wheel, tighten
the wheel nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with an aluminum wheel,
turn the wheel nuts until the
washers come into contact with
the disc wheel.
Installing the spare tire
1
2
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
Washer
Disc wheel
759
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
■The compact spare tire
●The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on
the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily, and only in an emergency.
●Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.
(P. 790)
■When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be indicated by the tire
pressure warning system. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire
pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.
■When the compact spare tire is equipped
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires.
■If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on one of the front wheels of the vehicle. Perform the
following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires:
Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehicle.
Fit tire chains to the rear tires.
1
2
3
760 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
CAUTION
■When using the compact spare tire
●Remember that the compact spare tire provided is specifically designed for use
with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
●Do not use more than one compact spare tires simultaneously.
●Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting opera-
tions that cause sudden engine braking.
■When the compact spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
• ABS & Brake assist
•VSC
•TRAC
•Cruise control
• Dynamic radar cruise control
(if equipped)
•PCS (if equipped)
•EPS
• AFS (if equipped)
•AVS
• LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
(if equipped)
• Rear view monitor system
•Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
• Navigation system (if equipped)
761
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
CAUTION
■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire
is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to
observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
■After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their stor-
age location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or sudden
braking.
NOTICE
■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving perfor-
mance.
■When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
762
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the hybrid system will not start
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●The electronic key may not be functioning properly. (P. 768)
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
●There may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. (P. 79)
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
●The hybrid system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem
such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However,
depending on the type of malfunction, an interim measure is available
to start the hybrid system. (P. 763)
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 770)
●The 12-volt battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
Reasons for the hybrid system not starting vary depending on the situa-
tion. Check the following and perform the appropriate procedure:
The hybrid system will not start even though the correct starting
procedure is being followed. (P. 18 9)
The interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not
sound or sounds at a low volume.
763
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
●One or both of the 12-volt battery terminals may be disconnected.
●The 12-volt battery may be discharged. (P. 770)
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair proce-
dures are unknown.
When the hybrid system does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the hybrid system if the power switch is func-
tioning normally:
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Press and hold the power switch for about 15 seconds while depressing
the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the hybrid system can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
The interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does
not sound.
Emergency start function
1
2
3
4
764
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
Set the parking brake.
Turn the power switch to ACCESSORY mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent tool.
To prevent damage to the cover, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.
Press the shift lock override but-
ton.
The shift lever can be shifted while the
button is pressed.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal,
there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent
accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure
that the shift lever can be shifted:
1
2
3
4
5
765
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the parking brake cannot be released
●Shift the shift lever to P.
●Turn the power switch off.
●Check that the parking brake indicator is off.
●Chock the tires.
Take out the parking brake
release tool and the screwdriver
from the trunk. (P. 750)
Fit the parking brake release tool into
the screwdriver handle.
Take out the spare tire. (P. 749)
In the event that the 12-volt battery is discharged or switch operation
does not release the parking brake, the parking brake can be released
manually using the procedure below. This procedure should be per-
formed only if necessary, such as in an emergency.
If the switch cannot be operated even when the 12-volt battery is nor-
mal, the parking brake system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Before releasing the parking brake manually
Releasing the parking brake manually
1
2
766 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Remove the plug.
Insert the tool and press it down
firmly while turning it counter-
clockwise until it stops.
■Manual operation of the parking brake
The parking brake cannot be set manually.
3
4
CAUTION
■When releasing the parking brake manually
●Shift the shift lever to P, turn the power switch off and chock the tires. Failure to do
so may cause the vehicle to move, resulting in an accident.
●Turn the power switch off and check that the parking brake indicator is off. Failure
to do so may cause the system to operate and turn the inserted parking brake
release tool, resulting in an injury.
767
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
■Doors
Use the mechanical key
(P. 118) in order to perform the
following operations:
Locks all the doors
Closes the windows and moon
roof* (turn and hold)
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the key
once again within 5 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Opens the windows and moon
roof* (turn and hold)
*: This setting must be customized at
your Lexus dealer.
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is inter-
rupted (P. 128) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and
wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and
trunk can be opened and the hybrid system can be started by following
the procedure below.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key
linked functions
1
2
3
4
768 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clock-
wise to open.
Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the power
switch.
The power switch will turn to ON
mode.
When the smart access system with
push-button start is deactivated in
customization setting, the power
switch will turn to ACCESSORY
mode.
Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is shown on the
multi-information display.
Press the power switch.
In the event that the hybrid system still cannot be started, contact your
Lexus dealer.
Starting the hybrid system
1
2
3
4
769
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
■Stopping the hybrid system
Shift the shift lever to P and press the power switch as you normally do when stop-
ping the hybrid system.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the elec-
tronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (P. 668)
■Changing power switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the power switch in step above.
The hybrid system does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is
pressed.(P. 190)
■When the electronic key does not work properly
●Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deac-
tivated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.
(Customizable features P. 807)
●Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (P. 127)
3
770
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the 12-volt battery is discharged
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a
12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps
below.
Open the trunk lid and remove
the 12-volt battery cover.
In the event that the trunk opener can-
not be used, use the mechanical key to
open the trunk. (P. 767)
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on your vehicle
The following procedures may be used to start the hybrid system if the
12-volt battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.
1
2
1
2
3
4
771
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the 12-volt battery of your vehicle.
Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the power switch
off.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the hybrid
system of your vehicle by turning the power switch to ON mode.
Make sure the “READY” indicator comes on. If the indicator does not
come on, contact your Lexus dealer.
Once the hybrid system has started, remove the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the hybrid system starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
■Starting the hybrid system when the 12-volt battery is discharged
The hybrid system cannot be started by push-starting.
■To prevent 12-volt battery discharge
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the hybrid system is off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■Charging the 12-volt battery
The electricity stored in the 12-volt battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain elec-
trical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the 12-volt battery may dis-
charge, and the hybrid system may be unable to start. (The 12-volt battery recharges
automatically while the hybrid system is operating.)
3
4
5
6
7
772 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■When recharging or replacing the 12-volt battery
●Make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing the 12-volt
battery to prevent the doors from being locked with the key left inside the vehicle
when the alarm operates.
●In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access
system with push-button start when the 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the wire-
less remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
●The hybrid system may not start on the first attempt after the 12-volt battery has
recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
●The power switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the 12-volt battery is
reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the 12-volt battery
was discharged. Before disconnecting the 12-volt battery, turn the power switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the power switch was in before the 12-volt battery dis-
charged, be especially careful when reconnecting the 12-volt battery.
CAUTION
■Avoiding 12-volt battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the 12-volt battery:
●Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is
not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
●Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to
come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as
brackets or unpainted metal.
●Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with
each other.
●Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the 12-
volt battery.
773
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
CAUTION
■12-volt battery precautions
The 12-volt battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precau-
tions when handling the 12-volt battery:
●When working with the 12-volt battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any 12-volt battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, cloth-
ing or the vehicle body.
●Do not lean over the 12-volt battery.
●In the event that 12-volt battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the 12-volt battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the 12-volt battery.
■After recharging the 12-volt battery
Have the 12-volt battery inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the 12-volt battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the 12-volt battery
to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.
■When replacing the 12-volt battery
P. 650
774
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
●The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red
zone:
The engine may be overheating.
●“Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display:
The power control unit may be overheating.
■If the needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red
zone
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning sys-
tem.
Check to see if steam is coming out from the engine area.
If you see steam:
Stop the hybrid system. Carefully lift the hood after the steam sub-
sides and then restart the hybrid system.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.
Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the engine coolant temperature gauge begins to fall and
then stop the hybrid system.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Lexus dealer.
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating:
Correction procedures
1
2
3
775
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
After the hybrid system has
cooled down sufficiently,
check the engine coolant level
and inspect the cooling sys-
tem for leaks.
If the engine compartment cover
needs to be removed: P. 638
Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is unavail-
able. (P. 787)
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
■If “Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information dis-
play
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning sys-
tem.
Leave the hybrid system operating and carefully lift the hood.
Check if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the “Hybrid System Overheat” message disappears and
then stop the hybrid system.
If the message does not disappear, call your Lexus dealer.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the hybrid system immediately and call your Lexus dealer.
4
5
1
2
3
776 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
After the hybrid system has
cooled down, check the power
control unit coolant level and
inspect the cooling system for
leaks.
If the engine compartment cover
needs to be removed: P. 638
Add power control unit cool-
ant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if power control unit coolant
is unavailable. (P. 787)
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
■Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating:
●The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is
experienced.
●“Hybrid System Overheat” is shown on the multi-information display.
●Steam comes out from under the hood.
4
5
777
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
CAUTION
■When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the
steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the fans, etc. while the hybrid system is oper-
ating.
●For vehicles with a hybrid system, there are times when the gasoline engine auto-
matically starts to run or the cooling fans suddenly start to operate. Do not touch
or approach the rotating parts of the belt or fans. Doing so may lead to fingers,
clothes or tools getting caught, resulting in injury.
NOTICE
■When adding engine/power control unit coolant
Add coolant slowly after the hybrid system has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot hybrid system too quickly can cause damage to the hybrid
system.
■To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
●Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
●Do not use commercially available coolant additives.
●Do not loosen the radiator cap or the cool-
ant reservoir caps while the hybrid system
and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.
778
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Stop the hybrid system. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to
P.
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to
help provide traction.
Restart the hybrid system.
Shift the shift lever to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while
exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
■When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
Press to turn off TRAC.
1
2
3
4
5
779
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
7
When trouble arises
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surround-
ing area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may
also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme cau-
tion.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than
necessary.
●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehi-
cle may require towing to be freed.
781
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8
Vehicle specifications
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)................... 782
Fuel information.......................... 792
Tire information........................... 795
8-2. Customization
Customizable features............807
8-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize..........................818
782
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
*: Unladen vehicle
Dimensions and weight
Overall length 190.7 in. (4845 mm)
Overall width 72.4 in. (1840 mm)
Overall height*57.3 in. (1455 mm)
Wheelbase 112.2 in. (2850 mm)
Tread*Front 62.0 in. (1575 mm)
Rear 62.6 in. (1590 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage) 825 lb. (370 kg)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
783
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
■Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in
the engine compartment.
This number is also on the Certifi-
cation Label.
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped
on the engine block as shown.
Vehicle identification
784
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
Engine
Model 3.5 L 6-cylinder (2GR-FXE)
Type 6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.70 3.27 in. (94.0 83.0 mm)
Displacement 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Valve clearance
(engine cold) Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type Premium unleaded gasoline only
Octane Rating 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 17.5 gal. (66.3 L, 14.6 Imp.gal.)
Electric motor (traction motor)
Type Permanent magnet synchronous motor
Maximum output 147 kW
Maximum torque 275 N•m (28.0 kgf•m, 202.8 ft•lbf)
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
Type Nickel-Metal hydride battery
Voltage 7.2 V/module
Capacity 6.5 Ah (3HR)
Quantity 40 modules
Overall voltage 288 V
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
785
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the
engine oil. Warm up the engine and turn off the hybrid system, wait more than 5
minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus
approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the fol-
lowing grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
Drain and refill (Reference*)
With filter
Without filter
6.7 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 Imp.qt.)
6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 Imp.qt.)
786
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one
with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at
high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubri-
cant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certifica-
tion Mark is added to some oil
containers to help you select the
oil you should use.
Outside temperature
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
787
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
Cooling system
Capacity
Gasoline
engine 9.9 qt. (9.4 L, 8.3 Imp.qt.)
Power
control unit 3.3 qt. (3.1 L, 2.7 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-
silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make DENSO FK20HBR8
Gap 0.031 in. (0.8 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
788
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
Electrical system
12-volt battery
Open voltage at 68F
(20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the hybrid sys-
tem and all lights are turned off.)
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge
15 A max.
5 A max.
Hybrid transmission
Fluid capacity*6.01 qt. (5.69 L, 5.01 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■Hybrid transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterio-
ration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration,
and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
789
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of
matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer
for further details.
*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112.4 lbf (500 N,
51.0 kgf) while the hybrid system is operating.
When performing the brake pedal inspection, also be sure to check that the
brake system warning light is not illuminated when the hybrid system is operating
(If the brake system warning light is illuminated, refer to P. 711).
Differential
Oil capacity 1.43 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp.qt.)
Oil type and viscosity Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT
75W-85 GL-5 or equivalent
Brakes
Pedal clearance*4.5 in. (115 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04 — 0.08 in. (1.0 — 2.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
Steering
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
790
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
Type A
Type B
Compact spare tire
Tires and wheels
Tire size 225/50R17 94W
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front tire
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear tire
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size 235/45R18 94Y, P235/45R18 94V
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front tire
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear tire
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 18 8J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size T155/70D17 110M, T145/70D18 107M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 4T (T155/70D17), 18 4T (T145/70D18)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
791
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
Light bulbs
Light Bulbs Bulb No. WType
Exterior
Discharge headlights*35 A
Fog lights*55 B
Front turn signal lights 7444NA 28/8 C
Rear turn signal lights W21W 21 D
Back-up lights W16W 16 D
Outer foot lights W5W 5 D
Interior
Door courtesy lights 5 D
Vanity lights 8 D
Trun k lig h t 3.8 C
A: D4S discharge bulbs
B: H11 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
*: If equipped
792
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
Fuel information
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which
is expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels.
In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine
performance. If 91 octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number
91). Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may
result in engine knocking and significantly reduced performance. Per-
sistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected
by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
793
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
■Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid
the build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep
clean intake systems.
■Recommendation of the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates
such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle perfor-
mance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
●If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than
87.
●Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-
pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing
MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this hap-
pens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Lexus dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or
driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
●Use only gasoline containing a maximum of
10% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that
could contain more than 10% ethanol,
including from any pump labeled E15, E30,
E50, E85 (which are only some examples
of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline con-
taining more than 10% ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
794
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■Notice on fuel quality
●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be dam-
aged.
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic convert-
ers causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level
previously stated will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot start-
ing, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
796
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
Tire size (P. 798)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 797)
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 651)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form
the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-
ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type
tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 802)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 802)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Summer tires or all season tires (P. 656)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer
tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”
molded on its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
797
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire
conforms to applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
798
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index
(2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Tire size
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
800
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Depart-
ment of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehi-
cles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this
information.
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight
ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
801
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated
and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
802
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pres-
sure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a man-
ufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of hybrid transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equip-
ment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants speci-
fied in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
Production options weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
803
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (dis-
tributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
Tire related term Meaning
804
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
Intended outboard side-
wall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Tire related term Meaning
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
805
8-1. Specifications
8
Vehicle specifications
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipur-
pose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fab-
ric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on
at least one sidewall
Tire related term Meaning
806
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-1. Specifications
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various
designated seating capacities
Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tread ri b A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tread se p arat i on Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
Tire related term Meaning
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 22 in front
5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second seat,
1 in third seat, 1 in fourth
seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second seat,
2 in third seat, 1 in fourth
seat
807
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
Customizable features
■Changing by using the Remote Touch
Vehicles without a navigation system
“Vehicle Settings” screen displayed on the Remote Touch screen.
(P. 336)
Select “Vehicle Customiza-
tion” on the “Vehicle Settings”
screen.
“Vehicle Customization” screen
will appear.
Choose a category displayed on the screen to display the settings.
Select the setting to be changed. Change each setting.
For items that can be enabled/disabled, and for items with an operating time
that can be changed, select “On” or “Off”, or select the desired operating time.
For items with sensor sensitivity that can be changed, select “+” or “-” to
choose the desired level, then select “OK”.
A message indicating that the settings are being saved will appear.
Do not perform any other operations while this message is dis-
played.
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to your preferences. These preferences can be changed by
using the “DISP” button, by using the Remote Touch, or at your Lexus
dealer.
Customizing vehicle features
1
2
3
4
5
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
809
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch
Settings that can be changed using the “DISP” button
Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
Customizable features
1
2
3
Item Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized setting
Multi-infor-
mation
display
(P. 94)
“Language”*1“English” (French) — O —
(Spanish)
“Units”*1“miles
(MPG)”
“km
(km/L)” — O —
“km
(L/100km)”
“ECO lamp”
“ON
(Self-light-
ing)”
“OFF”
— O —
“ON
(Always)”
“Drive monitor” “Outside”
“Fuel
consump-
tion” — O —
“Cruising
range”
“Tachometer Settings”
“ON
(Self-
changing)”
“HV Meter
(Always)” — O —
“Tachometer
(Always)”
“Lamp brightness” “Standard” “Bright” — O —
“SPORT lamp” “ON” “OFF” — O —
1 2 3
810
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-2. Customization
Multi-infor-
mation
display
(P. 94)
“EV driving Indicator” “ON” “OFF” — O —
“Default settings” “OFF” “ON” — O —
Door lock
(P. 137,
767)
“Unlock on Second Key
Turn”
(Allows all doors to be
unlocked by turning the
mechanical key twice in
the driver’s door)
On
(Driver’s
door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps)
Off
(All doors
unlocked in
one step)
O — O
“Auto Lock by Speed”
(All doors are automati-
cally locked when vehicle
speed is approximately 12
mph [20 km/h] or higher)
Off On O — O
“Auto Lock by Shift from P”
(All doors are automati-
cally locked when shifting
the shift lever to position
other than P)
On Off O — O
“A u t o Un l o c k b y S h if t t o P ”
(All doors are automati-
cally unlocked when shift-
ing the shift lever to P)
On Off O — O
“Auto Unlock by Driver
Door”
(All doors are automati-
cally unlocked when
driver’s door is opened)
Off On O — O
Item Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized setting
1 2 3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
811
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
Smart
access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 121)
and
wireless
remote
control
(P. 13 4)
“Lock/Unlock Feedback-
Tone”
(Adjust the volume of
buzzer sounds)
5
Off
O — O
1 to 7
“Lock/Unlock Feedback-
Lights”
(Enable/disable the opera-
tion of the emergency
flashers when the vehicle is
locked or unlocked)
On Off O — O
“A u t o Re l o c k Ti me r ”
(Adjust the time elapsed
before the automatic door
lock function is activated if
a door is not opened after
being unlocked)
60
seconds
Off
O — O
30
seconds
120
seconds
Open door reminder
buzzer (When locking the
vehicle)
On Off — — O
Smart
access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 121)
“Access System with Elec.
Key”
(Smart access system with
push-button start can be
disabled)
On Off O — O
“Select Doors to Unlock”
(The doors that are
unlocked using the smart
access system with push-
button start can be
selected)
Driver’s
door
All the
doors O — O
Number of consecutive
door lock operations 2 times As many as
desired — — O
Item Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized setting
1 2 3
812
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-2. Customization
Wireless
remote
control
(P. 13 4)
Wireless remote control On Off — — O
“Remote 2-Press Unlock”
(Allows all doors to be
unlocked by pressing
on the electronic
key twice)
On
(Driver’s
door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps)
Off
(All doors
unlocked in
one step)
O — O
Trunk unlocking operation Press and
hold (short)
One short
press
— — O
Push twice
Press and
hold (long)
Off
Alarm (panic mode) On Off — — O
Front seats
(P. 148)
“Driver’s Seat Easy Exit”
(Driver’s seat movement
when exiting the vehicle)
Standard Off O — O
Partial
Selecting the door linking
driving position memory
with door unlock operation
Driver’s
door All doors — — O
Power
windows
(P. 164)
and moon
roof
(P. 167)
Mechanical key linked
operation Off On — — O
Wireless remote control
linked operation Off
On
(Open
only)
— — O
Buzzer sounds if operated
using wireless remote con-
trol
On Off — — O
Item Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized setting
1 2 3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
813
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
Turn s i gna l
lever
(P. 205)
The number of times the
turn signal lights flash auto-
matically when the turn sig-
nal lever is moved to the
first position during a lane
change
(After flashing the turn sig-
nal lights when turning left
or right while this function
is off and the turn signal
lever is moved to the first
position in direction of the
flashing light, the turn sig-
nal lights can be selected
to be flashing or off.)
3
5
— — O
7
Off
(the turn
signal lights
keep flash-
ing if the
turn signal
lever is
moved to
the first
position in
direction of
flashing
light)
Off
(the turn
signal lights
will be off if
the turn
signal lever
is moved to
the first
position in
direction of
flashing
light)
Item Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized setting
1 2 3
814
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-2. Customization
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 213)
“Headlamps-On Sensitiv-
ity”
(Adjust the sensitivity of the
ambient light sensor)
Standard -2 to 2 O — O
“Headlamps Auto-Off
Timer ”
(Adjust the time elapsed
before the headlights auto-
matically turn off)
30
seconds
Off
O — O
60
seconds
90
seconds
Welcome light illumination
control On Off — — O
Lights
(P. 213)
“Daytime Running Lights”
(Daytime running lights
can be disabled)*3On Off O — O
Intuitive
parking
assist*2
(P. 261)
“Detection (Front)”
(Detection distance of the
front center sensor)
Far Near O — O
“Detection (Rear)”
(Detection distance of the
rear center sensor)
Far Near O — O
“Alert Volume”
(Alert volume can be
adjusted)
31 to 5 O — O
“Display”
(when intuitive parking
assist is operating)
All sensors
displayed Display off O — O
Automatic
air condition-
ing system
(P. 364)
“A u t o A/C M o de ”
(A/C Auto switch opera-
tion)
On Off O — O
“Smog Sensor Sensitivity”
(Exhaust gas sensor sensi-
tivity)
Standard -3 to 3 O — O
Item Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized setting
1 2 3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
815
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
Illumination
(P. 571)
Interior lights illumination
control On Off — — O
“Interior Lights Off Timer”
(Time elapsed before the
interior lights turn off)
15
seconds
7. 5
seconds O — O
30
seconds
Operation after the power
switch is turned off On Off — — O
Operation when the doors
are unlocked On Off — — O
Operation when you
approach the vehicle with
the electronic key on your
person
On Off — — O
Footwell lighting On Off — — O
Outer foot lights On Off — — O
“Exterior Lights Off Timer”
(Time elapsed before the
outer foot lights turn off)
15
seconds
Off
O — O
7. 5
seconds
30
seconds
Item Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized setting
1 2 3
816
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-2. Customization
*1: The default setting varies according to countries.
*2:If equipped
*3: U.S.A. only
Illumination
(P. 571)
Enable/disable operation
of the outer foot lights
when you approach the
vehicle with the electronic
key on your person
On Off — — O
Enable/disable operation
of the outer foot lights
when the doors are
unlocked with the power
door lock switch
On Off — — O
Rear
sunshade
(P. 594)
Reverse operation On Off — — O
Time elapsed before the
reverse operation feature
activates
0.7
seconds
0 second
— — O
0.9
seconds
1.2
seconds
Item Function Default
setting
Custom-
ized setting
1 2 3
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
817
8-2. Customization
8
Vehicle specifications
■Vehicle customization
●When the “Auto Lock by Speed” and “Auto Lock by Shift from P” are both on, the
door lock operates as follows.
• When shifting the shift lever to any position other than P, all the doors will be
locked.
• If the vehicle is started with all the doors locked, the “Auto Lock by Speed” would
not operate.
• If the vehicle is started with any door unlocked, the “Auto Lock by Speed” will
operate.
●When the smart access system with push-button start is off, the “Select Doors to
Unlock” cannot be customized.
●When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the “Auto Relock
Timer” activates, the signals will be generated in accordance with the “Lock/
Unlock Feedback-Tone” and the “Lock/Unlock Feedback-Lights” settings.
■When customizing using the Remote Touch
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P.
Also, to prevent 12-volt battery discharge, leave the hybrid system operating while
customizing the features.
CAUTION
■During customization
As the hybrid system needs to be operating during customization, ensure that the
vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a
garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and
enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■During customization
To prevent 12-volt battery discharge, ensure that the hybrid system is operating
while customizing features.
818
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
8-3. Items to initialize
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
after such cases as the 12-volt battery being reconnected, or mainte-
nance being performed on the vehicle:
Item When to initialize Reference
Maintenance data • After the maintenance is per-
formed P. 624
Tire pressure warning system
• When rotating the tires
• When changing the tire infla-
tion pressure by changing trav-
eling speed or load weight, etc.
P. 654
819
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
9
For owners
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners.....................................820
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French)............................................... 821
SRS airbag instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).............................................823
820
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov
;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
821
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
9
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
●Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière
jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre
entièrement l’épaule; elle ne doit
cependant pas toucher le cou ni
glisser de l’épaule.
●Placez la ceinture abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les hanches.
●Réglez la position du dossier.
Tenez-vous assis bien au fond du
siège, le dos droit.
●Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
Pour les enfants ou les personnes de
taille inférieure à la moyenne, faites
glisser le guide de la ceinture de
sécurité vers l’avant, de sorte que la
ceinture épaulière ne repose pas
près du cou de cette personne.
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité
Guide des ceintures de sécurité (sièges latéraux arrière)
822
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
■Ceintures de sécurité
Avec un chiffon ou une éponge, nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon doux et de
l’eau tiède. Vérifiez aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer
qu’elles ne présentent pas d’usure excessive, d’effilochage ou de cou-
pures.
Entretien et soin
ATTENTION
■Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité
Vérifiez périodiquement le système de ceintures de sécurité. Assurez-vous qu’il
n’y a pas de coupures, d’effilochures ni de pièces desserrées. N’utilisez pas une
ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Les ceintures
de sécurité endommagées ne peuvent pas protéger les occupants contre les
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
823
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
9
For owners
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in
French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in
English.
824
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
◆Coussins gonflables SRS avant
Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/Coussin gonflable SRS du pas-
sager avant
Peuvent protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager
avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs
Coussins gonflables SRS de protection des genoux
Peuvent aider à protéger le conducteur et le passager avant
Un coussin gonflable SRS de protection des genoux pour le siège du passager
avant est intégré dans la porte de la boîte à gants.
◆Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant
Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux arrière
Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges latéraux
arrière
Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau
Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des
sièges latéraux
1
2
3
4
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
825
9
For owners
Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS
Système de classification de
l’occupant du siège du passager
avant (ECU et capteurs)
Capteurs de choc latéral
(portières avant)
Coussins gonflables de protec-
tion des genoux
Coussin gonflable du passager
avant
Coussins gonflables en rideau
Voyants “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR
BAG OFF”
Dispositifs de tension et limit-
eurs de force des ceintures de
sécurité
Capteurs de choc latéral
(avant)
Coussins gonflables latéraux
avant
Lampe témoin SRS
Coussin gonflable du conduc-
teur
Coussins gonflables latéraux
arrière
Capteurs de choc latéral
(arrière)
Capteur de position de siège du
conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de cein-
ture de sécurité du conducteur
Module de capteur de coussin
gonflable
Contacteur de boucle de cein-
ture de sécurité du passager
avant
Capteurs de choc avant
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
826
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS dont
la conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules à moteur
américains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin gonflable
(ECU) contrôle le déploiement des coussins gonflables en fonction des
informations obtenues des capteurs et d’autres éléments affichés dans le
diagramme des composants du système ci-dessus. Ces informations
comprennent des données relatives à la gravité de l’impact et aux passag-
ers. Au moment du déploiement des coussins gonflables, une réaction
chimique se produit dans les gonfleurs et les coussins gonflables se remp-
lissent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique pour limiter le mouvement des
occupants.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
827
9
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
Observez les précautions suivantes en ce qui concerne les coussins gonflables
SRS.
Les négliger pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
●Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de
sécurité de la manière appropriée.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires qui doivent être
utilisés de concert avec les ceintures de sécurité.
●Le coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur se déploie avec une force considérable
et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le
conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. La National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), aux États-Unis, donne les recommandations
suivantes :
La zone à risque d’un coussin gonflable côté conducteur couvre 2 à 3 in. (50 à
75 mm) de la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable. Pour assurer une
marge de sécurité suffisante, restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable.
Cette distance est mesurée depuis le centre du volant jusqu’à votre sternum. Si
vous vous tenez à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre posi-
tion de conduite de plusieurs manières :
• Reculez votre siège à la position maximale vous permettant d’atteindre
encore aisément les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Même si les véhicules sont conçus différemment, la plupart des conducteurs
peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même si le siège se
trouve complètement vers l’avant, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier
du siège vers l’arrière. Si la visibilité avant est moindre après avoir incliné le
dossier du siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et non glissant pour être assis plus
haut ou relevez le siège si cette option est disponible sur votre véhicule.
• Si votre volant est réglable en hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous per-
met d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers la tête et
vers le cou.
Le siège doit être réglé de la manière recommandée ci-dessus par la NHTSA,
tout en gardant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, et la vue sur les commandes
du tableau de bord.
828
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
ATTENTION
■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
●
Le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une force
considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notam-
ment lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège
du passager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le
dossier doit être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.
●
Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis ou mal attachés. Un bébé ou un enfant
trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement retenu à
l’aide d’un dispositif de retenue pour enfants. Lexus recommande vivement de
placer et d’attacher correctement tous les bébés et tous les enfants sur les sièges
arrière du véhicule à l’aide de dispositifs de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont
plus sécuritaires pour les bébés et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.
●
N’installez jamais un dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route sur le
siège du passager avant, même si le voyant “AIR BAG OFF” est allumée.
En cas d’accident, la force et la vitesse de déploiement du coussin gonflable du pas-
sager avant sont telles qu’elles pourraient infliger à l’enfant des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, si le dispositif de retenue pour enfants du type dos à la route était installé sur
le siège du passager avant.
●Si la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité a été
reliée à la boucle des ceintures de sécurité
des sièges avant sans avoir été attachée à la
plaque de blocage des ceintures de sécu-
rité, les coussins gonflables SRS avant con-
sidéreront que le conducteur et le passager
avant portent tout de même leur ceinture
même si elles ne sont pas attachées. Les
coussins gonflables SRS avant peuvent
alors ne pas s’activer correctement lors
d’une collision, ce qui représente un risque
de blessures graves, voire mortelles. Bou-
clez toujours votre ceinture de sécurité lor-
sque vous utilisez la rallonge.
●Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et
ne vous appuyez pas sur le tableau de bord.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
829
9
For owners
ATTENTION
■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
●Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir face au
coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant ni
s’asseoir sur les genoux d’un passager
avant.
●Ne laissez pas les occupants du siège avant
tenir des objets sur leurs genoux.
●Ne vous appuyez pas sur la portière ou sur
le brancard de pavillon, ni sur les montants
avant, latéraux ou arrière.
●Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face à la
portière sur le siège du passager ni sortir la
tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.
●Ne fixez et n’appuyez rien sur des zones
telles que la planche de bord, le tampon de
volant, la partie inférieure du tableau de
bord et la porte de la boîte à gants.
Ces objets peuvent se transformer en pro-
jectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables SRS
du conducteur, du passager avant ou de
protection des genoux se déploient.
●Ne fixez rien sur les portières, le pare-brise,
les glaces latérales, les montants avant ou
arrière, le brancard de pavillon et la poi-
gnée de maintien.
830
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
ATTENTION
■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
●N’accrochez pas de cintres ni d’objets rigides sur les crochets porte-vêtements.
Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et vous occasionner des
blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables
SRS en rideau.
●Si un recouvrement de vinyle est placé sur la zone de déploiement du coussin
SRS de protection des genoux, veillez à le retirer.
●N’utilisez pas d’accessoires recouvrant les parties du siège où les coussins gon-
flables SRS latéraux se déploient, car ceux-ci pourraient nuire au déploiement de
ces coussins. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables
latéraux de se déployer correctement, rendre le système inopérant ou provoquer
accidentellement le déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux, occasionnant
des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
●Ne frappez pas et n’appliquez pas une pression importante à l’emplacement des
composants de coussins gonflables SRS.
Vous risquez de provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables
SRS.
●Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement
après leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds.
●Si vous avez de la difficulté à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gon-
flables SRS, ouvrez une portière ou une glace pour laisser entrer l’air, ou quittez
le véhicule si vous pouvez le faire en toute sécurité. Dès que possible, nettoyez
tous les résidus afin d’éviter les irritations cutanées.
●Si les emplacements de stockage des coussins gonflables SRS, notamment le
tampon de volant, la porte de la boîte à gants et les garnitures des montants avant
et arrière, sont endommagés ou fissurés, faites-les remplacer par votre conces-
sionnaire Lexus.
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
831
9
For owners
ATTENTION
■Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables
SRS
Ne mettez pas le véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez aucune des modifications suiva-
ntes sans d’abord consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables
SRS pourraient fonctionner de manière incorrecte ou se déployer (gonfler) acci-
dentellement, ce qui serait susceptible d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire
mortelles.
●Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS
●Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de
bord, de la planche de bord, de la boîte à gants, des sièges ou du capitonnage
des sièges, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière, ou des brancards de pavillon
●Réparations ou modifications de l’aile ou du pare-chocs avant, ou du côté de
l’habitacle
●Installation de lames de déneigement, de treuils, etc. sur la calandre avant (barre
safari, barre kangourou, etc.)
●Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule
●Installation d’appareils électroniques tels qu’un émetteur-récepteur radio ou un
lecteur de CD
●Modifications à votre véhicule pour une personne aux capacités physiques
réduites
832
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
834 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
●If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys
can be made by your Lexus dealer. (P. 119)
●If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft
increases significantly. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
(P. 120)
●Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (P. 668)
●Is the power switch in ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the power switch off. (P. 190)
●Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the elec-
tronic key on your person.
●The function may not operate properly due to the condition of
the radio wave. (P. 128)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your
Lexus dealer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
835
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
●Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when
the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and then
unlock the child-protector lock. (P. 138)
●The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside
the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take
the key out from the trunk. (P. 122)
The rear door cannot be opened
The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside
836 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
●Did you press the power switch while firmly depressing the
brake pedal? (P. 189)
●Is the shift lever in P? (P. 192)
●Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle?
(P. 124)
●Is the steering wheel unlocked? (P. 193)
●Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the hybrid system can be started in a temporary
way. (P. 768)
●Is the 12-volt battery discharged? (P. 770)
●Is the power switch in ON mode?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake
pedal with the power switch in ON mode (P. 764)
●It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle.
(P. 192)
If you think something is wrong
The hybrid system does not start
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the
brake pedal
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the hybrid system is
stopped
837
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
●Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat can-
not be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (P. 164)
●The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left
in ACCESSORY or ON mode (the hybrid system is not oper-
ating) for a period of time. (P. 192)
●The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts?
(P. 714)
●The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (P. 207)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may
also sound. (P. 711, 721)
The windows do not open or close by operating the power win-
dow switches
The power switch is turned off automatically
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
838 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
●Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the
alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (P. 81)
To stop the alarm, turn the power switch to ON mode or start the
hybrid system.
●Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?
Check the message on the multi-information display.
(P. 728)
●When a warning light turns on or a warning message is dis-
played, refer to P. 711, 721.
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
839
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
●Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the
spare tire. (P. 749)
●Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud,
dirt, or snow. (P. 778)
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes stuck
840 Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Alphabetical index
A/C............................................................ 364
Air conditioning filter....................... 666
Front automatic air conditioning
system ..................................................364
Rear air conditioning system........379
S-FLOW mode..................................374
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......289
Function ................................................. 289
Warning light .........................................712
Warning message.............................725
Adaptive Front-lighting System
(AFS)........................................................215
Adaptive Variable Suspension
system (AVS)......................................290
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System)....................................................215
Air conditioning filter..........................666
Air conditioning system.....................364
Air conditioning filter....................... 666
Front automatic air conditioning
system ..................................................364
Rear air conditioning system........379
S-FLOW mode..................................374
Airbags........................................................ 38
Airbag operating conditions .......... 46
Airbag precautions
for your child ......................................... 41
Airbag warning light .......................... 712
Correct driving posture....................30
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions....................... 46
Curtain shield airbag
precautions .......................................... 44
Front passenger occupant
classification system......................... 49
General airbag precautions ............. 41
Locations of airbags............................38
Modification and disposal
of airbags...............................................45
Side airbag operating
conditions ............................................. 46
Side airbag precautions...................... 41
Side and curtain shield airbags
operating conditions....................... 46
Side and curtain shield airbags
precautions ............................................41
SRS airbags .............................................38
A
841
Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Alarm..............................................................81
Alarm............................................................ 81
Warning buzzer.......................... 711, 721
Anchor brackets...................................... 62
Antennas (smart access system
with push-button start)......................123
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).......289
Function ................................................. 289
Warning light .........................................712
Warning message.............................725
Approach warning (dynamic
radar cruise control)........................ 242
Armrest ....................................................593
Ashtrays....................................................585
Assist grips..............................................598
Audio input.............................................. 497
Audio system..........................................386
Audio input............................................497
AUX port/
USB port.....................497, 477, 487
Bluetooth® audio.............................. 465
CD/DVD player................................433
CD/DVD player information......453
DVD video............................................. 441
iPod.......................................................... 485
MP3/WMA disc ...............................435
Optimal use......................................... 495
Portable music player......................497
Radio ....................................................... 409
Rear seat audio controls ............... 498
Steering wheel audio switch .......503
USB memory.......................................475
Automatic headlight leveling
system......................................................216
Automatic light control system ........213
AUX port .................................................497
Auxiliary boxes .....................................580
AVS (Adaptive Variable
Suspension system) ......................... 290
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs .......................696
Wattage ...................................................791
Battery (12-volt battery).....................647
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged......................................... 770
Preparing and checking before
winter......................................................319
Warning light......................................... 712
Battery (traction battery)......................74
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)...............305
Bluetooth®
Audio system.......................................465
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone) ...................... 506
Brake
Brake Hold .............................................210
Fluid ..........................................................645
Parking brake......................................207
Regenerative braking..........................72
Warning light.................................711, 714
Warning message............................... 721
B
842 Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Brake assist .............................................289
Brake Hold............................................... 210
Break-in tips..............................................173
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control...........91
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)................305
Care.................................................616, 620
Aluminum wheels ................................617
Exterior..................................................... 616
Interior .................................................... 620
Seat belts................................................. 621
Cargo capacity....................................... 186
Cargo hooks ........................................... 581
Caution label..............................................74
CD player................................................433
Chains.........................................................321
Child restraint system............................55
Booster seats, definition ....................55
Booster seats, installation..................65
Convertible seats, definition............55
Convertible seats, installation.........62
Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................49
Infant seats, definition..........................55
Infant seats, installation.......................62
Installing CRS
with LATCH anchors .....................60
Installing CRS with seat belts..........62
Installing CRS
with top tether strap.........................66
Child safety.................................................54
12-volt battery
precautions ...........................649, 773
Airbag precautions................................ 41
Child restraint system.........................55
How your child should wear
the seat belt................................. 33, 35
Installing child restraints ....................59
Moon roof precautions ....................170
Power window lock switch.............164
Power window precautions...........166
Rear door child-protectors........... 138
Removed electronic
key battery precautions..............669
Seat belt comfort guide..................... 33
Seat belt extender precautions ......37
Seat belt precautions..........................58
Seat heater precautions.................592
Trunk precautions...............................144
Child-protectors ....................................138
Cleaning ........................................ 616, 620
Aluminum wheels................................617
Exterior .....................................................616
Interior.....................................................620
Seat belts..................................................621
Clock.........................................................584
Coat hooks..............................................597
Condenser...............................................644
C
843
Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Console box............................................577
Console box light..................................577
Consumption screen.............................113
Coolant..................................................... 642
Capacity .................................................787
Checking................................................642
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................................... 319
Cooling system .....................................642
Engine overheating........................... 774
Hybrid system overheating .......... 774
Cruise control
Cruise control......................................232
Dynamic radar cruise control......236
Cup holders............................................578
Curtain shield airbags ........................... 39
Customizable features.......................807
Daytime running light system............216
Defogger
Front windshield...................................371
Outside rear view mirrors............ 384
Rear window ....................................... 384
Differential...............................................789
Dimensions ............................................. 782
Dinghy towing.........................................188
Display
Dynamic radar cruise control..... 236
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).........255
Multi-information display.................. 94
Remote Touch screen ....................330
Trip information.....................................95
Warning message............................... 721
Do-it-yourself maintenance...............631
Door courtesy lights
Location ...................................................571
Wattage ...................................................791
Door lock
Doors.........................................................137
Smart access system with
push-button start................................121
Wireless remote control..................134
Doors .......................................................... 137
Automatic door locking
and unlocking system....................139
Door glasses..........................................164
Door lock.................................................137
Open door warning buzzer..........125
Open door warning light ................714
Outside rear view mirrors ............... 161
Rear door child-protector ............. 138
D
844 Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Driver’s seat position memory......... 150
Driving.........................................................172
Break-in tips ...........................................173
Correct driving posture ....................30
Driving mode select switch ......... 286
Hybrid vehicle driving tips...............317
Procedures .............................................172
Winter drive tips.................................. 319
DVD player...................................433, 441
Dynamic radar cruise control ......... 236
Function ..................................................236
Warning message................. 723, 734
Eco drive mode.....................................286
EDR (Event data recorder).................... 11
Electric motor (traction motor)......... 70
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .......289
Function ................................................. 289
Warning light .........................................712
Warning message.............................726
Electronic key...........................................118
Battery-saving function.....................127
If the electronic key does not
operate properly.............................767
Replacing the battery...................... 668
Emergency, in case of
If the 12-volt battery is
discharged......................................... 770
If the electronic key
does not operate properly........ 767
If the hybrid system
will not start ....................................... 762
If the parking brake
cannot be released .......................765
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P............764
If the warning buzzer sounds..........711
If the warning light turns on..............711
If the warning message
is displayed.......................................... 721
If you have a flat tire.......................... 749
If you think something
is wrong ................................................710
If your vehicle becomes
stuck...................................................... 778
If your vehicle has to be stopped
in an emergency.............................703
If your vehicle needs
to be towed.......................................704
If your vehicle overheats.................774
Emergency flashers .............................702
E
845
Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Energy monitor ........................................110
Engine
Accessory mode.................................190
Compartment......................................637
Engine switch........................................189
Hood........................................................634
How to start the hybrid system....189
Identification number.......................783
Ignition switch
(power switch)..................................189
Overheating.........................................774
Power switch.........................................189
Engine compartment cover.............638
Engine coolant.......................................642
Capacity .................................................787
Checking................................................642
Preparing and checking
before winter ..................................... 319
Engine coolant temperature
gauge ........................................................89
Engine oil .................................................639
Capacity ................................................ 785
Checking............................................... 639
Oil level warning message ...........733
Oil pressure
warning message........................... 722
Preparing and checking
before winter ..................................... 319
Engine oil maintenance data............624
Engine switch...........................................189
EPS
(Electronic Power Steering)........289
Function..................................................289
Warning light......................................... 712
Warning message............................. 726
EV drive mode ........................................196
Event data recorder (EDR).....................11
First-aid kit storage net........................581
Flat tire.......................................................749
Floor mats................................................... 28
Fluid
Brake........................................................789
Hybrid transmission.........................788
Washer...................................................646
Fog lights....................................................218
Replacing light bulbs ...................... 689
Switch........................................................218
Wattage ...................................................791
Footwell light............................................571
Front passenger occupant
classification system ............................49
Front personal lights ............................572
F
846 Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Front seats................................................ 148
Adjustment............................................. 148
Cleaning................................................ 620
Correct driving posture ....................30
Driving position memory................150
Head restraints.....................................155
Power easy access system ............153
Seat heaters .........................................590
Seat position memory.......................150
Seat ventilators.....................................591
Front side marker lights.......................213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs........................697
Welcome light illumination
control..................................................... 121
Front turn signal lights ........................205
Replacing light bulbs......................... 691
Turn signal lever ................................ 205
Wattage....................................................791
Fuel.............................................................784
Capacity .................................................784
Fuel gauge................................................89
Information............................................792
Refueling................................................. 227
Type..............................................227, 784
Warning light .........................................714
Warning messages...........................737
Fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption...............96
Average fuel consumption
after refueling.......................................95
Current fuel consumption................95
Fuel filler door.........................................227
If the fuel filler door
cannot be opened.........................230
Refueling .................................................227
Fuses...........................................................670
Garage door opener..........................600
Gauges........................................................ 89
Glove box ................................................576
Glove box light.......................................576
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)...........................506
HD Radio® system................................414
Head restraints........................................155
Headlight cleaner .................................226
Headlights.................................................213
Adaptive Front-lighting
System (AFS).....................................215
Discharge headlights
precautions .......................................699
Headlight leveling
warning message............................724
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Wattage ...................................................791
Headlights aim ......................................685
Head-up display .....................................102
G
H
847
Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Heaters
Air conditioning system..................364
Heated steering wheel...................588
Seat heaters .........................................590
Outside rear view mirrors............ 384
High-voltage components ...................74
Hood.......................................................... 634
Open........................................................634
Warning message.............................728
Hooks
Cargo hooks.........................................581
Coat hooks ...........................................597
Luggage hook......................................581
Retaining hooks (floor mat).............28
Utility hook ........................................... 599
Horn.............................................................212
Hybrid battery (traction battery) .......74
Hybrid battery (traction battery)
air vents.................................................... 75
Hybrid system........................................... 70
Emergency shut off system..............75
Energy monitor/
consumption screen......................109
EV drive mode.....................................196
High voltage components ............... 74
Hybrid System Indicator ...................92
Hybrid system precautions.............. 74
Hybrid vehicle driving tips...............317
If the hybrid system
will not start........................................762
Overheating.........................................774
Power (ignition) switch....................189
Starting the hybrid system..............189
Vehicle proximity notification
system .......................................................71
Hybrid System Indicator.......................92
Hybrid transmission..............................199
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P............764
Paddle shift switches..........................201
S mode....................................................202
I/M test.....................................................630
Identification
Engine .....................................................783
Vehicle....................................................783
Ignition switch (power switch)..........189
Illuminated entry system ....................573
Immobilizer system .................................79
Indicators.....................................................87
Initialization
Maintenance ........................................ 624
Moon roof...............................................169
Power windows....................................165
Tire pressure
warning system...............................653
Initiators (tire pressure
warning system) ................................ 659
Inside door handle lights.....................571
Inside rear view mirror.........................159
Instrument panel light control..............91
Interior lights ............................................571
Intuitive parking assist..........................261
Function....................................................261
Warning message..................723, 734
I
848 Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Jack
Positioning a floor jack................... 635
Vehicle-equipped jack .................. 750
Jack handle................................................. 750
Jam protection function
Moon roof ..............................................168
Power trunk opener
and closer............................................ 143
Power windows...................................165
Keyless entry.............................................121
Smart access system
with push-button start..................... 121
Wireless remote control................. 134
Keys...............................................................118
Battery-Saving Function...................127
Electronic key .........................................118
Engine switch........................................189
If the electronic key
does not operate properly ........767
Key number plate .................................118
Keyless entry .................................121, 134
Mechanical key......................................118
Power switch.........................................189
Replacing the battery...................... 668
Warning buzzer.................................. 125
Wireless remote control key ........ 134
Knee airbags ............................................. 39
Language
(multi-information display)............... 98
LATCH anchors...................................... 60
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever.........................634
Hood lock release lever.................634
Internal trunk release lever .............144
Shift lever .................................................199
Turn signal lever.................................205
Wiper lever.............................................219
Lexus Enform*
Lexus night view ...................................... 311
License plate lights................................213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Welcome light
illumination control............................121
Light bulbs
Replacing.............................................. 689
Wattage ...................................................791
J
K
L
849
Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Lights
Fog light switch .................................... 218
Headlight switch...................................213
Illuminated entry system.................573
Interior light...........................................572
Interior lights list................................... 571
Personal lights .....................................572
Replacing light bulbs.......................689
Trunk light............................................... 143
Turn signal lever ................................ 205
Vanity lights ......................................... 583
Wattage....................................................791
Welcome light illumination
control..................................................... 121
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)...............251
Operation..............................................252
Warning
messages........ 724, 734, 735, 736
Load capacity.......................................... 186
Lock steering column...........................192
Low profile tire.......................................656
Luggage hook......................................... 581
Luggage security system.....................142
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance...........631
General maintenance.....................626
Maintenance data..............................782
Maintenance requirements.......... 623
Malfunction indicator lamp................ 712
Master warning light............................. 714
Meter............................................................ 89
Head-up display ..................................102
Indicators .................................................. 87
Instrument panel light control ..........91
Meters........................................................89
Multi-information display.................. 94
Warning lights........................................85
Micro dust and pollen filter...............374
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror......................159
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers...........................................384
Outside rear view mirrors ............... 161
Vanity mirrors .....................................583
Moon roof................................................. 167
Door lock linked
moon roof operation..................... 168
Jam protection function................... 168
Operation................................................167
Warning message............................. 729
MP3 disc ................................................. 435
M
*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
850 Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Multi-information display..................... 94
Dynamic radar cruise control......236
Energy monitor......................................110
Lane-Keeping Assist....................... 255
Language..................................................98
Switching the display...........................95
Trip information .....................................95
Warning message...............................721
Navigation system*
Noise from under vehicle .......................8
Odometer ..................................................89
Oil
Engine oil............................................... 785
Differential oil ...................................... 789
Opener
Hood........................................................634
Trunk ........................................................... 141
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights .................................. 571
Wattage....................................................791
Outside rear view mirrors................... 161
Adjusting and folding ......................... 161
Blind spot monitor ............................305
Linked mirror function
when reversing..................................162
Mirror position memory ................. 150
Outside rear view
mirror defoggers............................384
Outside temperature display............. 95
Overheating............................................774
Paddle shift switches.............................201
Parking assist sensors
(intuitive parking assist)....................261
Parking brake .........................................207
If the parking brake
cannot be released .......................765
Operation.............................................. 207
Parking brake engaged
warning buzzer...............................730
Parking brake engaged
warning message...........................730
Parking lights ...........................................213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Welcome light
illumination control............................121
N
O
P
851
Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
PCS (Pre-Collision System)............ 296
Function ..................................................296
PCS OFF switch ................................297
Warning light .........................................713
Warning
message........................723, 735, 741
Personal lights........................................ 572
Power control unit ...................................74
Power control unit coolant............... 642
Capacity .................................................787
Checking................................................642
Preparing and checking before
winter..................................................... 319
Power easy access system................ 153
Power outlets.........................................586
Power steering (Electric Power
Steering system)................................289
Warning light .........................................712
Warning message.............................726
Power switch........................................... 189
Power trunk opener and closer ........141
Power windows.......................................164
Door lock linked
window operation........................... 166
Jam protection function...................165
Operation............................................... 164
Window lock switch.......................... 164
Pre-Collision System (PCS).............296
Function..................................................296
PCS OFF switch................................ 297
Warning light.........................................713
Warning
message........................ 723, 735, 741
Radar cruise control (dynamic
radar cruise control).........................236
Radiator.....................................................644
Radio ......................................................... 409
RBDS (Radio Broadcast
Data Systems)......................................412
Rear air conditioning system............379
Rear door sunshades.......................... 595
Rear personal lights .............................572
Rear side marker lights........................213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Welcome light
illumination control............................121
Rear seat heaters .................................590
Rear sunshade....................................... 594
Operation..............................................594
Reverse operation feature ............595
R
852 Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Rear turn signal lights .........................205
Replacing light bulbs....................... 695
Turn signal lever ................................ 205
Wattage....................................................791
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror.....................159
Outside rear view mirrors................161
Rear view monitor system .................274
Rear window defoggers....................384
Refueling...................................................227
Capacity .................................................784
Fuel types...............................................784
If the fuel filler door
cannot be opened ........................ 230
Opening the fuel tank cap.............229
Regenerative braking.............................72
Remote Touch.......................................328
Remote Touch screen........................330
Replacing
Electronic key battery..................... 668
Fuses........................................................ 670
Light bulbs............................................ 687
Tires ..........................................................749
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners...................................820
Reset the maintenance data ............624
Road accident cautions .........................77
Safety Connect......................................607
Seat belts .....................................................32
Adjusting the seat belt........................ 33
Automatic Locking Retractor ........ 34
Child restraint system
installation ............................................. 62
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belt.........................................621
Emergency Locking
Retractor................................................ 34
How to wear your seat belt..............32
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................................... 35
Pre-collision seat belts....................... 34
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use......................................... 36
Reminder light and buzzer.............714
Seat belt extender ................................ 35
Seat belt pretensioners...................... 34
SRS warning light ................................ 712
Seat heaters............................................590
Seat position memory ..........................150
Seat ventilators........................................591
Seating capacity .....................................186
S
853
Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Seats............................................................ 148
Adjustment............................................. 148
Adjustment precautions .................. 149
Child seats/child restraint
system installation..............................59
Cleaning................................................ 620
Driving position memory................150
Head restraints.....................................155
Power easy access system ............153
Properly sitting in the seat ................30
Seat heaters .........................................590
Seat position memory.......................150
Seat ventilators.....................................591
Sensor
Automatic headlight system.......... 216
Driver monitor sensor.................... 298
Humidity sensor .................................376
Inside rear view mirror.....................160
Intuitive parking assist....................... 261
Lexus night view.................................. 315
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).........259
Radar sensor.................245, 298, 310
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers...................................................224
Service plug................................................74
Service reminder indicators ...............84
S-FLOW mode......................................374
Shift lever...................................................199
Hybrid transmission...........................199
If the shift lever
cannot be shifted from P............764
Shift lever light.........................................571
Shift lock system....................................764
Side airbags................................................39
Side marker lights ..................................213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Welcome light illumination
control......................................................121
Side mirrors............................................... 161
Adjusting and folding ......................... 161
BSM (Blind spot monitor) ............305
Linked mirror function
when reversing..................................162
Mirror position memory ................. 150
Side turn signal lights.......................... 205
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Turn signal lever.................................205
Smart access system
with push-button start.........................121
Antenna location..................................123
Entry functions ........................................121
Starting the hybrid system.............. 189
Warning message..............................727
Snow mode.............................................200
Snow tires................................................ 323
854 Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Spare tire.................................................. 749
Inflation pressure............................... 790
Storage location ................................ 750
Spark plug ............................................... 787
Specifications.........................................782
Speedometer............................................89
Sport mode .............................................286
Steering lock ............................................192
Column lock release......................... 193
Steering lock system
warning message........................... 747
Steering wheel........................................ 158
Adjustment.............................................158
Audio switches................................... 503
Heated steering wheel...................588
Power easy access system ............153
Steering wheel
position memory..............................150
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs........................697
Storage feature ..................................... 574
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck........778
Sun shade
Rear.......................................................... 594
Rear door.............................................. 595
Roof............................................................168
Sun visors.................................................583
Switches
AFS OFF switch...................................215
Audio remote control
switches ..............................................503
Brake hold switch................................210
BSM (Blind spot monitor)
switch ...................................................305
Cruise control switch .......... 232, 236
“DISP” button..........................................95
Door lock switches.............................137
Driving mode select switch..........286
Driving position memory
switches ............................................... 150
Emergency flashers switch...........702
EV drive mode switch ......................196
Fog light switch.....................................218
Garage door opener
switches ............................................. 600
Headlight cleaner switch............... 226
Heated steering wheel
switch .................................................. 588
HUD (Head-up display)
switches ................................................102
Ignition switch....................................... 189
Intuitive parking assist........................261
Lexus night view switch......................311
Light switch.............................................213
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
switch ...................................................253
Moon roof switches ...........................167
Outside rear view mirror
switches ................................................. 161
855
Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Paddle shift switches ......................... 201
Parking brake switches...................207
PCS OFF switch ................................297
Power door lock switch ...................137
Power switch.........................................189
Power window switches ................. 164
Rear sunshade switch..................... 594
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror defoggers
switch................................................... 384
Seat heater switches........................590
Seat ventilator switches ...................591
Snow mode switch...........................200
“SOS” button....................................... 607
Talk switch............................................ 353
Telephone switches......................... 507
Tilt and telescopic
steering control switch .................158
Tire pressure warning reset
switch................................................... 654
Trunk closer switch.............................142
Trunk opener switch ........................... 141
Trunk opener main switch...............142
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
button ...................................................239
VSC OFF switch ................................ 291
Window lock switch.......................... 164
Windshield wipers
and washer switch .......................... 219
Tachometer.....................................89, 104
Tail lights ....................................................213
Light switch.............................................213
Replacing light bulbs .......................697
Welcome light illumination
control......................................................121
Talk switch............................................... 353
Telephone switches............................. 507
Theft deterrent system
Alarm............................................................81
Immobilizer system...............................79
Tire inflation pressure......................... 790
Maintenance data..............................790
Tire inflation pressure display
function....................................................97
Warning light.........................................715
Warning message.............................740
Tire information .....................................795
Glossary.................................................802
Size ...........................................................798
Tire identification number ............. 797
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................800
Tire pressure warning system......... 653
Function..................................................653
Initializing ...............................................653
Installing tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters................653
Registering ID codes.......................655
Tire pressure warning reset
switch ...................................................654
Warning light.........................................715
Warning message...................740, 741
T
856 Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Tires..............................................................651
Chains........................................................321
Checking.................................................651
If you have a flat tire ..........................749
Inflation pressure............................... 790
Information............................................795
Replacing ...............................................749
Rotating tires ........................................652
Size........................................................... 790
Snow tires ..............................................323
Spare tire................................................749
Tire inflation pressure display
function...................................................97
Tire pressure warning system .... 653
Warning light ........................................ 715
Warning message.............................740
Tools...........................................................750
Top tether strap........................................ 66
Total load capacity................................ 186
Towing
Dinghy towing ......................................188
Emergency towing............................704
Towing eyelet...................................... 705
Trailer towing........................................ 187
TRAC (Traction Control).................289
Traction battery (hybrid battery) .......74
Traction motor (electric motor)........70
Transmission.............................................199
Driving mode select switch ......... 286
Hybrid transmission...........................199
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P ...................................764
S mode....................................................202
Paddle shift switches ......................... 201
Trip information ....................................... 95
Trip meters................................................. 89
Trunk .............................................................141
Internal trunk release lever .............144
Jam protection function....................143
Luggage security system.................142
Open trunk warning message.... 729
Power trunk opener
and closer ..............................................141
Smart access system
with push-button start.................... 122
Trunk closer switch.............................142
Trunk easy closer ................................143
Trunk features....................................... 581
Trunk grip................................................142
Trunk light................................................143
Trunk opener main switch ..............142
Trunk opener switch............................141
Wireless remote control..................134
Trunk light
Trunk light................................................143
Wattage ...................................................791
Turn signal lights...................................205
Replacing light bulbs ............691, 695
Turn signal lever.................................205
Wattage ...................................................791
857
Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
USB port ....................................... 477, 487
Utility hook..............................................599
Vanity lights
Vanity lights ......................................... 583
Wattage....................................................791
Vanity mirrors........................................... 583
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics
Integrated Management)..............290
Vehicle data recordings.........................10
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated
Management (VDIM).....................290
Vehicle identification number.........783
Vehicle proximity notification
system.........................................................71
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC).....................................................289
Ventilators (seat ventilators)............. 591
Voice command system....................353
VSC
(Vehicle Stability Control) ............289
Warning buzzers
Approach warning ........................... 242
Brake system ...........................................711
Downshifting........................................203
Intuitive parking assist........................261
Key reminder....................................... 744
No-handed driving warning........256
Open door ...........................................728
Open moon roof............................... 729
Open hood........................................... 728
Open trunk........................................... 729
Open window..................................... 729
Pre-collision braking........................296
Seat belt reminder...............................714
Warning lights.......................................... 85
ABS ............................................................ 712
AFS OFF indicator .............................713
Brake hold operated
indicator................................................713
Brake system .................................711, 714
Charging system ................................. 712
Electric power steering .................... 712
Low fuel level.........................................714
Malfunction indicator lamp............. 712
Master warning light..........................714
Open door .............................................714
Parking brake indicator....................713
Pre-collision system...........................713
Seat belt reminder light ....................714
Slip indicator ..........................................713
SRS.............................................................. 712
Tire pressure..........................................715
Warning messages................................ 721
U
V
W
858 Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
Warning reflector storage belt.......582
Washer.......................................................219
Checking............................................... 646
Low washer fluid
warning message...........................739
Preparing and checking
before winter ..................................... 319
Switch........................................................ 219
Washing and waxing.............................616
Weight
Cargo capacity....................................186
Load limits...............................................186
Weight.....................................................782
Welcome light illumination
control.......................................................121
Wheels
Replacing wheels.............................. 664
Size........................................................... 790
Window glasses......................................164
Window lock switch..............................164
Windows....................................................164
Power windows................................... 164
Rear window defogger.................. 384
Windshield wiper de-icer .................385
Windshield wipers .................................219
Position....................................................322
Rain-sensing windshield
wipers.................................................... 219
Winter driving tips..................................319
Wireless remote control key.............134
Battery-Saving Function...................127
Locking/Unlocking............................ 134
Replacing the battery...................... 668
WMA disc...............................................435
XM® Satellite Radio.............................419
X
859
Alphabetical index
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
860
GS450h_U (OM30D01U)
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever Trunk opener Fuel filler door
P. 634 P. 141 P. 229
Hood lock release lever Tire inflation pressure
P. 634 P. 790
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference) 17.5 gal. (66.3 L, 14.6 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type Premium unleaded gasoline only P. 227, 784
Cold tire inflation
pressure P. 790
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference)
qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
With filter 6.7 (6.3, 5.5)
Without filter 6.2 (5.9, 5.2)
Engine oil type
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
P. 785
